SDPS

SDPS
Surface Deformation Prediction System for

Windows
version 6.2B
Quick Reference Guide

and Working Examples
by
Dr. Zach Agioutantis

Department of Mining Engineering
University of Kentucky
Lexington, Kentucky 40506−0107
and
Dr. Michael Karmis
Department of Mining and Minerals Engineering
Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University
Blacksburg, Virginia 24061−0239
This software package is the property of the Department of Mining and Miner-
als Engineering, and the Virginia Center for Coal and Energy Research, Virginia
Polytechnic Institute and State University. It has been licensed and may be dis-
tributed only to O.S.M.R.E. and State Regulatory Agencies. The SDPS software
can be purchased by individuals and/or companies through Carlson Software.
May 11, 2015

This document can be cited as:
Agioutantis Z. and M. Karmis (2015), Quick Reference Guide and Working Examples, SDPS for
Windows, version 6.2B.
ii
Disclaimer
The authors declare that there are no warranties, expressed or im-

plied, which apply to the software contained herein. By acceptance
and use of said software, which is conveyed to the user without con-
sideration by the authors, the user hereof expressly waives any and
all claims for damage and/or suits for or by reason of personal in-
jury, or property damage, including special, consequential or other
similar damages arising out of or in any way connected with the
use of the software contained herein.
The purpose of this guide
The purpose of this guide is to provide a quick reference guide

to the SDPS for windows (version 6.x) suite of programs and to
develop working experience through the application of examples.
This guide is not designed to be a tutorial in ground control engi-
neering or in subsidence engineering. It is assumed that the user
is already familiar with the basic principles of ground deformation
prediction, pillar and roof stability evaluation.
Examples are also included for the NIOSH ground control pro-
grams. These do not belong to the SDPS package, but since they
can be installed through the SDPS installer a quick reference guide
is provided for these as well.
iii
Updates
As of version 6.1 the SDPS suite of programs supports AutoCAD

2013 for import/export. Support for Surfer by Golden Software is
also continued. Horizontal displacements can now be adjusted due
to sloping terrain. The latest version of the NIOSH Ground Control
toolbar can be optionally installed.
iv
Contents
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Installing / Uninstalling SDPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 SDPS Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 SDPS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 The Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6 General Configuration of the SDPS Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7 Custom Configuration of the SDPS Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.8 Software Tools Developed by NIOSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Overview of Subsidence Parameters 11

2.1 Critical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Angle of Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3 Inflection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 Angle of Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.5 Percent Hardrock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6 Edge Effect Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.7 Maximum Subsidence Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.8 Horizontal Strain Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.9 Additional Subsidence Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.10 Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3 The Profile Function Method 19

3.1 Overview of the Profile Function Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 Example P1: Subcritical Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3 Example P2: Supercritical Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4 Example P3: Setting the Basic Graph Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.5 Example P4: The Advanced Graph Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4 The Influence Function Method 33

4.1 Overview of the Influence Function Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2 Mine Plan Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2.1 Geometry and Boundary Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2.2 Panel Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.3 Prediction Points Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.3.1 Scattered Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
v
4.3.2 Grid Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.3.3 Effect of Subsidence Parameters in Ground Deformation Calculations . . . . 43
4.4 Calculation of Dynamic Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.5 Example L1: Deformations on a Transverse Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.6 Example L2: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.7 Example L3: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.8 Example L4: Deformations over Panel End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.9 Example L5: Deformations over Adjacent Longwall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.10 Example L6: Deformations over a Stable Remnant Pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.11 Example L7: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.12 Example L8: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Strain Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.13 Example L9: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Strain Contours . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.14 Example L10: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Subsidence Profiles . . . . . . . 92
4.15 Example L11: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Horizontal Displacements . . . . 98
4.16 Example L12: Strains on Pipeline over a Longwall Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
4.17 Example L13: Ground and Directional Strains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
4.18 Example L14: Surface Deformations due to Multiple Seam Mining . . . . . . . . . 113
4.19 Example L15: Deformations over a Room-and-Pillar Section (A) . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.20 Example L16: Deformations over a Room-and-Pillar Section (B) . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.21 Example L17: Deformations over Longwall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.22 Example L18: Subsidence Calibration (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.23 Example L19: Subsidence Calibration (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.24 Example L20: Subsidence Calibration (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.25 Example L21: Strain Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.26 Example L22: Subsidence Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.27 Example L23: Long-Term Risk Analysis (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.28 Example L24: Long-Term Risk Analysis (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.29 Example L25: Location Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.30 Example L26: Convert Grid to Scattered Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
5 Pillar Stability Analysis Calculations 175

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.2 Pillar Design Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.3 Example R1: Pillar Safety Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.4 Example R2: Protection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6 The ALPS Module 185

6.1 Analysis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.2 Sizing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.3 Example W1: ALPS Stability Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7 The ARMPS Module 195

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.2 Example S1: ARMPS Stability Factors - Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.3 Example S2: ARMPS Stability Factors - Retreat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
vi
8 The ARMPS-HWM Module 203
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.2 Pillar Load Bearing Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.3 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9 The CMMR Module 211

9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
9.2 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10 The ARBS Module 217

10.1 Case Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
10.2 Roof Bolt Reinforcement Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.3 Roof Fall Rate Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.4 Depth of Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.5 Intersection Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.6 Bolt Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.7 Capacity and Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.8 The ARBS Intensity Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.9 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.10 Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11 The AHSM Module 225

11.1 Overview of Horizontal Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
11.2 Examples of Effects Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
11.3 Basic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
11.4 Mine Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11.5 Mine Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11.6 Roof Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
11.7 Supplemental Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11.8 Common Misconceptions about Horizontal Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
11.9 Stress Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.10 Signs of Horizontal Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
11.11 Stress Design Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
11.12 Longwall Stress Concentration Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12 The AMSS Module 235

12.1 Overview of Multiple Seam Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.2 AMSS Step by Step Design Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
13 The Graphing Options 238

13.1 Basic Graph Formatting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
13.2 Advanced Graph Formatting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
13.3 Exporting and Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
13.3.1 Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
13.3.2 Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
13.4 The Graphing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
vii
13.4.1 Two-Dimensional Images: Cross-sectional Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13.4.2 Two-Dimensional Images: Vector Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13.4.3 Contour Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.4.4 Three-Dimensional Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
14 References and Bibliography 249

14.1 Subsidence References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
14.2 Pillar Design References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
14.3 ALPS References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
14.4 ARMPS References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
14.5 AMSS References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
14.6 AHSM References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
14.7 ARBS References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
14.8 CMRR References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
A Program Reference 263

A.1 The Profile Function Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A.1.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
A.1.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
A.1.3 Graphing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
A.1.4 The Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
A.2 The Influence Function Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
A.2.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
A.2.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
A.2.3 The Calculate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A.3 The Pillar Stability Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
A.3.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
A.3.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
A.3.3 The Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
A.4 The ALPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
A.4.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
A.4.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
A.4.3 The Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
A.5 The ARMPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
A.5.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
A.5.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
A.5.3 The Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
A.6 The ARMPS-HWM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
A.6.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
A.6.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
A.6.3 The Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
viii
A.7 The CMRR Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
A.7.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
A.7.2 The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
A.8 The Graph Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
A.8.1 The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
A.8.2 The 2-D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
A.8.3 The 3-D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B The Initialization File 311
C Troubleshooting 313
C.1 General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
C.2 Further Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
D Influence Function Primer 316

D.1 Common Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
D.2 Erroneous Panel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
D.3 Problem Simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
D.4 Troubleshooting the Influence Function Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
D.5 Error Messages in the Influence Function Solution Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
E Coordinates and Coordinate Systems 327
ix
x
List of Figures
1.1 The SDPS main menu form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.2 The SDPS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.3 General configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.4 Custom configuration options for the profile function module . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Accessing the underground stability analysis programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1 Definition of subsidence parameters (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.2 Definition of subsidence parameters (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 Definition of terms used in the profile function method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

3.2 Example P1: Profile function input window (part 1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3 Example P1: Profile function input window (part 2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.4 Example P1: Plot of conservative and average subcritical profile . . . . . . . . . 23
3.5 Example P1: Plot of conservative profile and two angles of draw . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6 Example P1: Plot of conservative and average subcritical profile . . . . . . . . . 25
3.7 Example P2: Plot of supercritical profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.8 Example P3: Graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.9 Example P3: Changing the graph style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.10 Example P4: The 2D Chart Control Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1 Steps for defining a project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4.2 Typical subsidence distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.3 Typical slope distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.4 Typical curvature distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.5 Typical horizontal displacement distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.6 Typical horizontal strain distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.7 Flowchart diagram for using the influence function module . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.8 The influence of the edge effect offset on subsidence profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.9 Points on a grid and scattered points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.10 Subcritical, critical and supercritical subsidence profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.11 The effect of the influence angle on supercritical subsidence profiles . . . . . . . 44
4.12 The effect of the supercritical subsidence factor on subsidence profiles . . . . . . 44
4.13 The influence of the edge effect offset on subsidence profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.14 Compressive and tensile strains due to dynamic subsidence . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.15 Panel boundary offset for calculating dynamic deformations (after Jarosz et al., 1990)47
4.16 Comparison of dynamic subsidence for different panel advance rates . . . . . . . 48
4.17 Example L1: View of mine plan and prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
xi
4.18 Example L1: Project description window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.19 Example L1: Rectangular mine plan input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.20 Example L1: Grid point input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.21 Example L1: Output options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.22 Example L1: Graph module, 2-D graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.23 Example L2: View of mine plan with adjusted panel boundaries . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.24 Example L2: Adjusting the panel boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.25 Example L3: View of mine plan and grid points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.26 Example L3: Transverse subsidence profile over a longwall panel with edge
effect offset applied to one side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.27 Example L4: View of mine plan and surface points on a grid at panel end . . . . . 60
4.28 Example L4: Definition of prediction point layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.29 Example L4: Transverse subsidence profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.30 Example L4: Transverse horizontal strain profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.31 Example L4: Plotting transverse strains on a longitudinal profile . . . . . . . . . 64
4.32 Example L4: Longitudinal horizontal strain profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.33 Example L5: Mine plan and prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.34 Example L5: 2-D image of subsidence over the longwall panels . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.38 Example L6: Entering a rectangular pillar in the mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.39 Example L6: Subsidence profile over remnant pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.40 Example L7: Average edge effect offset in polygonal mine plans . . . . . . . . . 77
4.41 Example L7: View of mine plan with adjusted panel boundaries . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.42 Example L7: Subsidence prediction with and without the application of edge
effect offset to the panel boundary line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.43 Example L7: Horizontal strain prediction with and without the application of
edge effect offset to the panel boundary line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.45 Example L8: Grid plane specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.46 Example L8: Generated elevations for the prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.47 Example L8: Comparison of ground and horizontal strain transverse profiles . . . 84
4.48 Example L8: Comparison of ground and horizontal strain longitudinal profiles . . 85
4.49 Example L9: Contouring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.50 Example L9: Ground strain contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.51 Example L9: Contouring options with threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.52 Example L9: Ground strain threshold contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.53 Example L9: Horizontal strain threshold contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.54 Example L10: View of mine plan and point grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.55 Example L10: Parcel management for polygonal mineplans . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.56 Example L10: Polygonal mineplan parcel management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.57 Example L10: Editing individual point elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.58 Example L10: Transverse subsidence profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.59 Example L11: View of mine plan and point grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
xii
4.60 Example L11: Calculation of surface slope for prediction points . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.61 Example L11: Calculated slope parameters for prediction points . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.62 Example L11: Calculation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.63 Example L11: Horizontal displacement vector plots without adjustment . . . . . . 104
4.64 Example L11: Horizontal displacement vector plots with adjustment . . . . . . . 104
4.65 Example L11: Comparison of maximum horizontal displacement profiles . . . . . 105
4.67 Example L12: Input/Modify scattered prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.68 Example L12: Strains on the pipeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
4.70 Example L13: Mine plan definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.71 Example L13: Definition of prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.72 Example L13: Strain Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.74 Example L14: Subsidence contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4.76 Example L15: Importing from a DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.77 Example L16: Mine plan and parcel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.78 Example L16: Comparison of transverse subsidence profiles, (points 233-186) . . 125
4.79 Example L16: Comparison of transverse strain profiles, (points 233-186) . . . . . 126
4.80 Example L16: Comparison of longitudinal subsidence profiles (points 286-234) . 126
4.81 Example L16: Comparison of longitudinal strain profiles (points 286-234) . . . . 127
4.82 Example L16: Subsidence contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.83 Example L16: Subsidence orthographic projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.84 Example L16: Maximum strain contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.85 Example L17: Mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.86 Example L17: Importing prediction points from Carlson Software . . . . . . . . . 130
4.87 Example L17: Partial plan view of mine plan and prediction points . . . . . . . . 131
4.88 Example L17: Editing the surface prediction points in the sheet editor . . . . . . . 132
4.89 Example L18: Digitized panels on scanned mine plan image (scanned mine
map after Algaier, 1982) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.90 Example L18: Importing from AutoCAD (Step 1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.91 Example L18: Importing from AutoCAD (Step 2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.92 Example L18: Mine plan and prediction points as imported into SDPS . . . . . . 135
4.93 Example L18: Edge effect management for polygonal mine plan (definition
of edge effect on west side of panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.94 Example L18: Manual entry of extraction thickness, vertex elevation and su-
percritical subsidence factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.95 Example L18: Manual entry of measured subsidence values . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4.96 Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; adjusting the range for
the influence angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
the subsidence factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
the edge effect offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
xiii
4.99 Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; calibration results . . . . 139
4.100 Example L18: Best ranked fit for measured and predicted profiles . . . . . . . . . 140
4.101 Example L19: Image of scanned mine plan and prediction points . . . . . . . . . 141
4.102 Example L19: Mine plan and prediction points as imported into SDPS . . . . . . 142
4.103 Example L19: Manual entry of measured subsidence values . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.104 Example L19: Subsidence calibration options (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4.109 Example L20: Digitized panels on scanned mine plan image (scanned mine
map after Fejes, 1986) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
4.110 Example L20: Imported mine plan to SDPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.111 Example L20: Definition of edge effect offset on selected sides of each panel . . . 147
4.112 Example L20: Best fit between measured and predicted subsidence profiles . . . . 148
4.113 Example L21: Mine plan and prediction points (O’Rourke and Turner 1979, 1981) 150
4.114 Example L21: Strain data (O’Rourke and Turner 1979, 1981) . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4.115 Example L21: Strain calibration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4.116 Example L21: Best fit between measured and predicted strain profiles . . . . . . 151
4.117 Example L21: Strain calibration results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.118 Example L22: Setting the panel advance parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4.119 Example L22: Calculation of ground deformation dynamic curves . . . . . . . . . 155
4.120 Example L22: Dynamic and final subsidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
4.121 Example L22: Dynamic and final slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.122 Example L22: Dynamic and final horizontal strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.123 Example L23: Room-and-pillar layout for long-term risk analysis calculations . . 158
4.124 Example L23: Final post mining subsidence assuming stable pillars (section
A-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.125 Example L23: Input long-term risk analysis parameters: Remnant pillar height
as a percent of extraction thickness and pillar failure risk factor . . . . . . . . . . 160
4.126 Example L23: Long-term risk analysis calculation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.127 Example L23: Options for plotting deformation profiles under long-term risk
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.128 Example L23: Comparison of long-term deformations (worst case) to defor-
mations due to stable pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.129 Example L23: Exit graph form and keep profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4.130 Example L23: Comparison of long-term deformations for all scenarios to de-
formations due to stable pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.131 Example L24: Room-and-pillar layout and long-term pillar failure risk factors . . 166
4.132 Example L24: Long-term risk analysis calculation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.133 Example L24: Graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.134 Example L24: Comparison of long-term risk analysis scenarios . . . . . . . . . . 169
4.135 Example L25: Definition of the location angle for a surface point . . . . . . . . . 170
4.136 Example L25: Location angle option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.137 Example L25: Location angles calculated based on distance from panel edge . . . 172
xiv
5.1 Pillar tributary area - plan view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.2 Pillar tributary area - section view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.3 Protection area under a surface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.4 Example R1: Pillar geometry parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.5 Example R1: Pillar strength parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.6 Example R1: Output window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
5.7 Example R1: Parametric graph for various pillar strength formulas . . . . . . . . 182
5.8 Example R2: Structure and protection area geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
5.9 Example R2: Protection area results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.1 Example W1: ALPS: Input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

6.2 Example W1: ALPS: Default loading parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.3 Example W1: ALPS: Calculation results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.4 Example W1: ALPS: Parametric graph of stability factors (A) . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.5 Example W1: ALPS: Parametric graph of stability factors (B) . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.6 Example W1: ALPS: Advanced mining geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.7 Example W1: ALPS: Advanced mining geometry plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7.1 Example S1: ARMPS: Input parameters - development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

7.2 Example S1: ARMPS: Plot of mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
7.3 Example S1: ARMPS: Calculation results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.4 Example S1: ARMPS: Parametric graph of stability factors . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.5 Example S2: ARMPS: Input parameters- retreat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.6 Example S2: ARMPS: Plot of mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.7 Example S2: ARMPS: Calculation results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.8 Example S2: ARMPS: Parametric graph of stability factors . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
8.1 Example Q0: ARMPSHWM: Plot of mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.1 CMRR and intersection span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

9.2 CMRR main parameter form (underground information selected) . . . . . . . . . 213
9.3 CMRR unit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
9.4 CMRR unit characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
9.5 CMRR adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
9.6 CMRR main parameter form (drillhole information selected) . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.7 CMRR unit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.8 CMRR unit characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9.9 CMRR plot of immediate roof with roofbolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10.1 ARBS Design of one support system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

10.2 ARBS Design of two support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.3 ARBS Cost calculations for the support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
11.1 AHSM Stress design diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

11.2 AHSM Parameters required for the concentration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11.3 AHSM Stress concentration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
xv
11.4 AHSM Azimuth of headgate and direction of σH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
13.1 Basic graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

13.2 Typical exporting and importing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
13.3 Vector plot options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.4 Vector plot of maximum horizontal displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
13.5 Invoking the contouring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
13.6 Contour plot generation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
13.7 Subsidence contours over longwall panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
13.8 Three dimensional graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
D.1 Example of digitized mine plan with logical errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

D.2 Corrected mine plan: pillars are placed inside an extraction area . . . . . . . . . . 319
D.3 Detail of bottom entry system: Overlapping pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
D.4 Detail of longwall operation with multiple adjacent extraction areas . . . . . . . . 320
D.5 Digitized mine plan with five longwall sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
D.6 Simplified mine plan where all the mains and submains sections are considered
as one parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
D.7 Simplified mine plan which including only the extracted areas that correspond
to each panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
D.8 Illegal parcel definition I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
D.9 Illegal parcel definition II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
xvi
List of Tables
1.1 System requirements for the SDPS suite of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1.2 Program files distributed with SDPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 Maximum subsidence factors (Smax /m) for longwall panels . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.2 Maximum subsidence factors (Smax /(mR∗ )) for high extraction room-and-pillar
panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Classes of damage and suggested threshold (damage limit) values of horizontal
strain and angular distortion (Karmis, et al., 1994) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.1 Typical steps to calculate and plot deformations using the influence function method 35
4.2 Identification codes for deformation indices and calculated parameters . . . . . . . 38
4.3 Example L3: Coordinates of panel vertex points (in feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.4 Example L6: Input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.5 Example L7: Coordinates of panel vertex points (in feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.6 Example L11: Coordinates of prediction points (in feet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.7 Example L12: Coordinates of prediction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.8 Example L16: Input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.9 Example L16: Mine plan coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.10 Example L16: Mine plan coordinates, continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.11 Example L16: Prediction points coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.12 Example L16: Prediction points coordinates, continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
8.1 ARMPS-HWM Suggested Minimum Stability Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

8.2 Auger Hole Geometry and Highwall Miner Web Pillar Strength . . . . . . . . . . . 206
xvii
xviii
List of Symbols
Symbol Definition
W the panel width; the minimum dimension of a panel
h the overburden depth or the depth of cover; the vertical distance between the
mining horizon or extracted panel and the surface; also known as the overburden
thickness
W /h the width-to-depth ratio of a panel
m the extraction thickness (note that the extraction thickness may be different than
the seam thickness)
R the extraction ratio
R∗ the adjusted extraction ratio
d the distance of the inflection point from the rib (a positive value indicates that the
position of the inflection point is inby); also referred to as the edge effect offset
d/h the distance of the inflection point from the rib to depth ratio
β the influence angle (measured from the horizontal)
tan β the tangent of the influence angle
r the influence radius
Smax the maximum subsidence
a the maximum subsidence factor
B the distance from the inflection point to point of Smax (profile function)
c a constant (profile function)
Bs the horizontal strain coefficient
Bf the horizontal strain factor
%HR the percent hardrock in the overburden
Wp the pillar width
H, Hp the extraction height or the pillar height
Wo the opening width
xix
xx
Chapter 1
Introduction
The original Surface Deformation Prediction System (SDPS) programs were developed by the De-
partment of Mining and Minerals Engineering, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University
(Virginia Tech), Blacksburg, VA, USA, in 1987, under the direction of Dr. Michael Karmis. At
that time, the SDPS suite of programs was developed as a research tool, rather than as an integrated
approach to the prediction of surface deformations. Programs were based on field studies and the
prediction methods were adapted to eastern U.S. mining and geological conditions.
The SDPS software has since been modified and updated, in order to facilitate user interaction
and has been transformed from a research methodology to an engineering tool for the field engi-
neer and the mine planning team. The previous version (version 4.x), was designed to provide an
integrated approach to the problem of calculating and predicting ground deformations above un-
dermined areas. Based on empirical or site-specific regional parameters, the operator was able to
calculate a variety of ground deformation indices, according to one or more numerical formulations.
Version 4.x of the SDPS package was also enhanced by an independent module used to calculate
pillar stability, based on four well accepted pillar strength formulations. This tool was provided in
an effort to help the operator evaluate the stability of pillars in room-and-pillar mines.
SDPS version 4.x was written for the DOS environment and provided pull down menus, mouse
support and context sensitive help. It was limited by the DOS limitations, such as the need for
special peripheral (printer, plotter, etc.) drivers, as well as by the infamous 640KB limit on program
size and data arrays.
Funding for the SDPS related work, leading to version 4.x, was provided by various federal and
state agencies, the mining industry and Virginia Tech.
SDPS version 6.x constitutes the latest update of SDPS software, developed specifically for the
Microsoft Windows® environment (SDPS for Windows). In this respect, all programs fully utilize
the central management of computer resources (e.g., memory, use of the clipboard, peripherals,
etc.) provided by Microsoft Windows® . All SDPS version 5.x and 6.x programs are developed in
the Visual Basic 6.0 programming language (professional edition).
The development of the Windows version of SDPS (version 5.x) was performed by Dr. Michael
Karmis and Dr. Zach Agioutantis under a contract from the Office of Surface Mining, Reclamation
and Enforcement. Software development was supervised by Dr. Zach Agioutantis. Version 5.0 was
released in December, 1998. Version 5.1 was released in October, 1999. Version 5.2 was released
in August, 2001. Version 5.3 was released in September, 2002. Version 5.4 was released in June,
2003. Version 5.5 was released in October 2004. Version 6.0 is the result of a recent contract
1
award to the Virginia Center of Coal and Energy (Virginia Tech). Version 6.0 was released in
October 2008. Version 6.1 was released in March 2012 and was partially sponsored by the ARIES
project at the Virginia Center of Coal and Energy (Virginia Tech). Version 6.2 was released in
December 2014. The software is currently maintained by Dr. Zach Agioutantis, Department of
Mining Engineering, University of Kentucky.
The authors would like to acknowledge the technical comments, discussions and suggestions
of the late Dr. Jesse Craft, Ms. Ann Stewart−Murphy, Dr. Kewal Kohli, Mr. Thomas J. Mastaller,
and Ms. Lois Uranowski, Office of Surface Mining, Reclamation and Enforcement.
Additional thanks are due to Dr. David A. Newman for his helpful suggestions and to Mr. Greg
Hasenfus for his useful comments on ground strains. The contribution of Mr. Kevin Andrews in
the development of version 6.0 of this package is greatly appreciated. Special thanks to Mr. Steven
J. Schafrik for helping develop and for troubleshooting different routines of the SDPS programs
and for his technical support all these years. Finally, many thanks to Mr. Stefanos Nikolaidis for
the mathematical derivation of the equations for the dynamic deformation indices.
The SDPS for Windows software is marketed by Carlson Software under a licensing agreement
from Virginia Tech Intellectual Properties.
Carlson Software may be contacted by:
phone: +1-606-564-5028
fax: +1-606-564-6422
e-mail: info@carlsonsw.com
internet: http://www.carlsonsw.com
postal address: Carlson Software,
102 West 2nd St., Suite 200
Maysville,
KY 41056, USA
1.1 Requirements
The hardware and operating system requirements for installing the SDPS suite of programs are
shown in Table 1.1.
1.2 Installing / Uninstalling SDPS

SDPS for Windows (version 6.x) covers all 32bit platforms such as Windows 95, Windows 98,
Windows Me, as well as the Windows NT series (WinNT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Win-
Table 1.1: System requirements for the SDPS suite of programs
Operating system Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 (32/64), Windows 8

Screen resolution 1024x768, 32 bit color and higher
Required disk space 250 MB
Printing Any printer supported by Windows
2
dows Vista, Windows 7, etc.). It will also run on 64 bit platforms (Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8).
Installing from a CDROM

Insert the CDROM in the appropriate drive and locate the single executable file on the root direc-
tory which contains the letters SDPS (e.g., SDPS62A.EXE, etc.). Double-click on the appropriate
installation file as described previously. Note that if the auto run feature of the CDROM drive is
enabled, installation may start automatically. Follow the prompts of the installation package. For
convenience select the default settings.
Optionally the Adobe Acrobat Reader may be installed through the internet free of charge
(www.adobe.com).
Installing a downloaded file

Save the file on any location (e.g., the desktop or a temporary directory). Double-click on the
installation file and follow the prompts of the installation package. For convenience select the
default settings.
Installing from diskettes

This option is not supported any more due to the size of the package.
Install Options
The user may optionally install the latest version of the Ground Control Toolbar which includes a
number of ground control software such as ALPS, ARMPS, etc.
Registration
When the SDPS package is first installed then upon execution of any program module, the indi-
cation “Demo version” will be visible. Also, the main picture in each module will be overwritten
by bright red letters. When the package is registered, these messages do not appear. To register
the product, execute the main SDPS module and click on the “Register” button. Enter the user
name and note the license code generated by the program. Contact the supplier of the program for
a license key. Enter the license key and click on “Save License”. Once registration is successful,
the registration button on the main menu will be disabled.
Uninstalling
To uninstall the SDPS software, any of the following options can be used:
• Click on the “Uninstall SDPS” shortcut under “All Programs”
3
• Switch to the installation directory, e.g., “c:\Program Files\SDPS for Windows”, and then
switch to the “SETUP” directory within the installation directory. Run the UNINSTALL.EXE
program in that directory and follow the prompts.
• Open the control panel and execute the “Add/Remove Programs” icon (Windows XP and
prior) or execute the “Uninstall a program” option under “Programs and Features” (Windows
Vista, 7, 8).
1.3 SDPS Software Overview

Table 1.2 explains the function of each of the programs included in the SDPS package.
Notes
• The individual application programs may be executed as stand-alone or through the SDPS
main menu program with the exception of the Influence Function Calculation module. The
Influence Function Calculation module can only be invoked from the Calculation menus of
the Influence Function module.
1.4 SDPS Features

The Environment
• Pull-down menus
• Easy to use input forms
• Check boxes, option buttons, command buttons, combo boxes
• Integrated graphics
• Metric and imperial (English) units
• Context sensitive help (one help file for all programs)
• General program options (settings)
• Custom program options
• Standard file selection dialog
• Standard print dialog
4
Table 1.2: Program files distributed with SDPS
Program Name Program Function

SDPS.EXE The Main Menu Program
PROF.EXE The Profile Function Program
INFL.EXE The Influence Function Main Program
INFLSOLV.EXE The Influence Function Calculation Module (should not be exe-
cuted in stand-alone mode)
GRAF.EXE The Graphing Program
PILL.EXE The Pillar Stability Program
SDPS.CHM (*) The SDPS Help File
SDPS.PDF (**) The SDPS Help File (CHM) in PDF format
QREF.PDF (**) The SDPS Quick Reference Guide in PDF format
AHSM.EXE The Analysis of Horizontal Stress in Mining Program
AHSM.CHM (*) The Analysis of Horizontal Stress in Mining Help File
ALPS.EXE The Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability Program
ALPS.CHM (*) The Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability Help File
AMSS.EXE The Analysis of Multiple Seam Stability Program
AMSS.CHM (*) The Analysis of Multiple Seam Stability Help File
ARBS.EXE The Analysis of Roof Bolting Systems Program
ARBS.CHM (*) The Analysis of Roof Bolting Systems Help File
ARMPS.EXE The Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability Program
ARMPS.CHM (*) The Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability Help File
ARMPSHWM.EXE The Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability Program - Highwall
Mining Program
ARMPSHWM.CHM (*) The Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability Program - Highwall
Mining Help File
CMRR.EXE The Coal Mine Roof Rating Program
CMRR.CHM (*) The Coal Mine Roof Rating Help File
(*) may be accessed as stand-alone and / or through the respective program(s); may require instal-
lation of compatibility software under Windows 7
(**) requires installation of the Acrobat Reader package from www.adobe.com
The File System

• ASCII files
• Custom path support for data files
• Redefinable file extensions
• Multiple line description for each project
5
Support of Peripherals
Integrates seamlessly with devices supported by the Windows environment such as:
• CDROM / DVD drives
• Network Drives
• USB drives
• Network File Systems
• Windows pointing devices
• Windows printers
1.5 The Main Menu

The SDPS main menu program allows the user to invoke all SDPS programs through one menu
system. Also, it allows access to this guide as well as the Windows Help file for SDPS (Figure 1.1).
The typical layout of the main program screen of all the modules is shown in Figure 1.2. Note
that a command/message history window is available at the bottom of the main program screen.
The user can easily record a set of actions that leads to a specific result and/or error. This window
can be turned off by the user through Utilities-Settings menu item.
Registration
When the program is not registered, it will operate in demo mode. In this mode, the SDPS programs
(excluding the programs supported by NIOSH) will operate for a month from the date of initial
installation or 200 function calls, whichever occurs first.
Once the demo limit is reached, the user has two options: Either to register the product, or ask
for an extension of the evaluation period.
Also the user can enter the registration information once the program is registered.
1.6 General Configuration of the SDPS Programs

The general configuration options (default settings) for all the SDPS programs are shown in Figure
1.3. To invoke this form select the menu item Utilities-Settings. The default settings for the NIOSH
modules are managed using similar forms.
In this form the user can select the default units, the default 3-letter extension for data files, the
default path for data files, and other options such as displaying a command history window, keeping
a recent file list, enabling the toolbar, specifying an external viewer for viewing large ASCII report
files, etc.
At the initial invocation of an SDPS module, a directory named “MySDPS” is created under
the directory “My Documents” in the standard WinNT/Win2000/WinXP file system layout. A
similar directory is created under the Win9X and WinMe file system layout. Also a temporary
6
directory “MySDPS\Temp” is created in the same file structure. This is the default location for
the initialization files (*.INI files) as well as for the data and project files. This location can be
modified using the standard configuration options menu.
Figure 1.1: The SDPS main menu form
Figure 1.2: The SDPS programs
7
Figure 1.3: General configuration options
1.7 Custom Configuration of the SDPS Programs

Each module has its own custom configuration options. As an example, the custom options for
the influence function module are shown in Figure 1.4. To invoke this form select the menu item
Utilities-Options.
1.8 Software Tools Developed by NIOSH

The SDPS suite of programs includes a number of ground control analysis tools developed by
NIOSH which include pillar stability calculations, roof characterization, horizontal stresses, etc.
These tools are mainly included in the SDPS package in order to complement the pillar stability
analysis tool included in the SDPS suite of programs.
These programs may be installed upon installation of SDPS. This installation is compatible
with the standalone installation of the NIOSH programs. In addition, the NIOSH programs may be
accessed via the SDPS main menu through the Underground Stability Analysis command button
8
Figure 1.4: Custom configuration options for the profile function module
(Figure 1.5). Also, this manual includes a brief descriptions for the NIOSH programs.
At the initial invocation of a NIOSH module, a directory named “MyNIOSH” is created under
the directory “My Documents” in the standard WinNT file system layout (Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7).
This is the default location for the initialization files (*.INI files) as well as for the data and
project files. This location can be modified using the standard configuration options menu. All
NIOSH programs are free to use without registration.
9
Figure 1.5: Accessing the underground stability analysis programs
10
Chapter 2
Overview of Subsidence Parameters
2.1 Critical Conditions

A panel is considered subcritical for W /h less than 1.2, critical for W /h = 1.2 and supercritical
for W /h > 1.2, where W is the width (least dimension) of the panel and h is the height of the
overburden (depth of cover).
2.2 Angle of Draw

Angle of draw is the angle between the vertical at the panel edge and the line connecting this edge
(or rib) with the surface point which defines the termination of subsidence trough (i.e., zero sub-
sidence). Since the subsidence profile diminishes to extremely small values far before it reaches
the edge of the subsidence basin, it follows that this angle is of limited value in subsidence control
(Peng 1992). Furthermore, the concept of ”zero” subsidence is rather difficult to measure or im-
plement. In this regard, a better approach may be to define a minimum, ”measurable”, subsidence
level as a reference point (Figures 2.1 and 2.2).
Figure 2.1: Definition of subsidence parameters (1/2)
11
Figure 2.2: Definition of subsidence parameters (2/2)
2.3 Inflection Point

The inflection point corresponds to s = Smax/2 on the subsidence profile or zero curvature. This
point is usually displaced from the rib of the excavation at a distance, d, towards the panel center.
The location of the inflection point from the rib, with respect to overburden depth, d/h, can
be estimated based on two empirical curves (see the Inflection Point Diagram). Both curves were
statistically generated from the available field data. The first is an average curve based on a least
squares estimator, while the second is considered an envelope or conservative curve in the sense
that it tends to over predict the surface impact of a given excavation area. In essence, this means that
for average data the predicted subsidence profile could be either inside or outside of the measured
subsidence line, whereas for conservative (envelope) data, an attempt is made to keep the prediction
lines outside the measured ones, i.e., overestimate the influence of the mined area to the surface.
From experience and constant validation of the programs, the authors recommend that, for
Appalachian predictions, improved accuracy is obtained by using the following rules:
• determine the d/h ratio using the conservative curve for subcritical panels (W /h < 1.2),
• determine the d/h ratio using the average curve for critical and supercritical panels (W /h ≥
1.2).
Notes
Always use the actual width-to-depth ratio.
12
2.4 Angle of Influence
The angle of principal influence (β, beta) or the angle of influence is one of the basic parameters
used in the influence function method since it has a major impact on the distribution of the defor-
mations on the surface. It is the angle between the horizontal and the line connecting the projection
of the inflection point position of the subsidence trough, at the seam level, with the surface point
of ”zero influence”, i.e., where subsidence is about 0.6 percent of the maximum subsidence value
(VPI & SU 1987). The average value determined for the Appalachian coalfields is β ≃ 67 deg.
The parameter required for these calculations is the tangent of this angle (e.g., tanβ = 2.31). The
angle of influence is related to the radius of influence as shown in the equation:
h
tan β = (2.1)
r
where
h = the overburden depth
r = the radius of influence.
This value should be determined for each site by fitting a calculated subsidence profile to a
measured subsidence profile. If this is not possible, the influence angle can be approximately set
as the complementary angle to the angle of draw.
2.5 Percent Hardrock

The percent hardrock as defined in subsidence investigations, represents the sum of the strong rocks
(e.g., sandstone, limestone), having a minimum thickness of 5 feet, expressed as a percentage of
the total overburden thickness.
2.6 Edge Effect Offset

The edge effect offset, d, is the distance of the location of the inflection point of the subsidence
profile from the rib of the excavation. The magnitude of the edge effect offset is mainly related to
the amount of yielding of the rib due to panel advance or panel mining. Also, the edge effect may
be impacted by the rigidity of the immediate roof strata (see also Section 4.2.1 on page 40).
2.7 Maximum Subsidence Factor

For a given profile, the ratio of the maximum subsidence value in that profile over the extraction
thickness at mine level defines the subsidence factor of the profile. The subsidence factor as de-
fined above is related to both the geometry of the panel (i.e., subcritical, critical or supercritical
conditions, as well as the geology of the overburden). In order to remove the effect of geome-
try, the maximum or the maximum possible subsidence factor can be defined, which corresponds
to the maximum subsidence factor that can be attained for the same geological environment under
13
Table 2.1: Maximum subsidence factors (Smax /m) for longwall panels
Percent Hardrock in the Overburden

W /h 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80%
0.6 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.42 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.16
0.7 0.69 0.63 0.55 0.46 0.36 0.28 0.22 0.18
0.8 0.71 0.65 0.57 0.47 0.38 0.29 0.23 0.18
0.9 0.72 0.66 0.58 0.48 0.38 0.30 0.23 0.19
1.0 0.73 0.67 0.58 0.49 0.39 0.30 0.24 0.19
1.1 0.74 0.68 0.59 0.49 0.39 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.2 0.74 0.68 0.59 0.49 0.39 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.3 0.74 0.68 0.60 0.49 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.4 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.5 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.6 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.7 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.8 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
1.9 0.76 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
2.0 0.76 0.69 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.31 0.24 0.19
supercritical conditions. The maximum subsidence factor is also referred to as the supercritical sub-
sidence factor. It should be noted that in both prediction methodologies presented in this manual,
the supercritical subsidence factor is used.
The values of maximum subsidence factor, as function of the width-to-depth ratio and the per-
cent hardrock in the overburden, are shown in the supercritical subsidence factor tables for longwall
panels and for room-and-pillar panels respectively. When using the profile function method, the
subsidence factor is calculated for the actual width-to-depth ratio of the panel. For example, for a
panel with W /h = 0.8 (subcritical) and %HR = 50% the subsidence factor is equal to 0.38.
As already discussed, when using the influence function method, the methodology requires
knowledge of the supercritical subsidence factor, which will subsequently be adjusted through the
superposition concept by the program itself. For example, for a panel with W /h = 0.8 (subcritical)
and %HR = 50% the subsidence factor is found for W /h = 1.5 (supercritical) and equal to 0.40.
The supercritical subsidence factors used in the calculations both for the profile function method
and the influence function method are presented in Tables 2.1 and 2.2. It should be noted that due
to numerical approximations there may be slight differences between the supercritical subsidence
factors presented in the supercritical subsidence factor tables and program calculations.
Notes
Figure 4.10 in chapter 4 highlights the differences in the obtained profiles under subcritical, critical
or supercritical conditions.
14
Table 2.2: Maximum subsidence factors (Smax /(mR∗ )) for high extraction room-and-pillar panels
Percent Hardrock in the Overburden

W /h 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80%
0.6 0.52 0.48 0.42 0.35 0.28 0.22 0.17 0.13
0.7 0.57 0.53 0.46 0.38 0.30 0.24 0.19 0.15
0.8 0.60 0.55 0.48 0.40 0.32 0.25 0.19 0.15
0.9 0.61 0.56 0.49 0.41 0.32 0.25 0.20 0.16
1.0 0.62 0.57 0.49 0.41 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16
1.1 0.62 0.57 0.50 0.41 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16
1.2 0.63 0.58 0.50 0.42 0.33 0.26 0.20 0.16
1.3 0.63 0.58 0.51 0.42 0.34 0.26 0.20 0.16
1.4 0.64 0.58 0.51 0.42 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.16
1.5 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.42 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.16
1.6 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.42 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.16
1.7 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.16
1.8 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.17
1.9 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.17
2.0 0.64 0.59 0.52 0.43 0.34 0.27 0.21 0.17
2.8 Horizontal Strain Factor

The value of the horizontal strain factor, Bf , is directly related to the magnitude of the calculated
horizontal strain and curvature values over an undermined area. The horizontal strain factor can be
empirically estimated by the average ratio of measured strain and curvature over a set of surface
points.
The average relationship determined for the Appalachian coalfields is:
h h
Bf = Bs = (0.35 ± 0.05) (2.2)
tan β tan β
where Bs is the horizontal strain coefficient, h is the excavation depth in feet and tan β is the
influence angle. The horizontal strain factor is expressed in units of length and the horizontal
strain coefficient is unitless. When using meters for length units, the horizontal strain coefficient
becomes:
Bs = 0.35 × 0.3048 m/ft = 0.107 (2.3)
and, therefore the equation for the strain factor Bf becomes:
h
Bf = (0.107 ± 0.015) (2.4)
tan β
Notes
• When the value for Bs increases, the magnitude of the calculated horizontal strains and dis-
placements increases.
15
• The average (default) value for Bs is 0.35 when length is measured in feet, while the default
value is set to 0.107 when length is measured in meters. The user can calculate site specific
values based on strain field measurements.
2.9 Additional Subsidence Definitions

• Angle of Break, ζ: It is the angle between the vertical at the panel edge and the line con-
necting this rib with the surface point exhibiting maximum tensile horizontal strain (Figure
2.2).
• Angle of Critical Deformation (also referred to as Angle of Damage or Protection), δ: It is

defined as the angle between the vertical at the panel edge and the line connecting the panel
edge with a surface point which exhibits an allowable deformation without sustaining any
degree of damage. This angle lies between the angle of draw and the angle of break (Figure
2.2).
2.10 Damage
Various aspects of ground deformation, such as tension, compression, shear, tilt, curvature, angular
distortion, bending, and horizontal strain, have been identified to be responsible for the majority
of subsidence-related damage (modified from Singh, 1992). While most aspects of subsidence
are readily understood, a few require further explanation. Tilt is defined as a rigid body motion;
horizontal strain is defined as the change in horizontal length between two points divided by the
original horizontal distance between the two points, while ground strain takes into account topog-
raphy; curvature is the derivative of the slope of the subsidence trough; and angular distortion is
the ratio of the differential displacement and the horizontal distance between two points (Triplett,
et al. 1992).
In general, mining-related ground movements cause rotations and deformations of building
foundations. As the degree of deformation increases, the strength and deformability of the founda-
tion is tested (Marino, 1986). The superstructure (upper part of building) is indirectly affected by
ground movements by way of the foundation (Marino, 1986). This implies that interaction at the
ground-foundation interface of subsidence-affected buildings plays a significant role in determin-
ing the magnitude of effects experienced by both the foundation and the superstructure. However,
due to the overwhelming number of possible combinations of soil type and foundation type, pre-
diction methods for subsidence-induced damage typically assume that the structure moves with the
ground (Marino, 1986).
Various subsidence researchers have reported correlations between aspects of subsidence move-
ment and surface structure damage. Geddes and Cooper (1962) found relationships between the
length of a building, the horizontal ground strain, and the damage to the building. Marino (1986)
states that the ratio of building length to building width determines the probability and magnitude
of the type of deformation that will occur. Conroy and Gyarmaty (1982) found that tilt and ground
strain are responsible for the most damage and argue that more effort should be put into measure-
ment of tilt and ground strain, rather than vertical displacement. Similarly, Triplett, et al. (1992)
found a strong correlation between ground surface curvature (related to ground strain) and damage
16
to house foundations. Karmis, et al. (1994) used horizontal strain, angular distortion, and curvature
to assess surface damage from mining subsidence. Boone (1996) reports that ground curvature is
a main cause of cracks in houses, but notes that angular distortion is more readily measured. Luo,
et al. (2003) also uses critical values of strain, curvature, and slope to assess potential damage due
to subsidence.
To assess the damage to surface structures, and the correlation of damage to ground strains and
other aspects of subsidence, it is necessary to classify the various degrees of observed damage.
Many authors have compiled subsidence damage observations and constructed various forms of
damage criteria. Classification of subsidence damage can be approached by assessing the actual
severity of structural damage or by evaluating the value of the damage-causing subsidence param-
eters, such as ground strain, in the affected area (Triplett, et al. 1992). Many classification schemes
provide correlations of measured subsidence parameters with characteristics of observed surface
structure damage. Geddes and Cooper (1962) present a classification by Orchard of damage caused
by horizontal ground movements associated with mining subsidence. Orchard’s work presents sug-
gested correlations between ground strain and typical damage observed in houses in England that
were not specially designed to accommodate horizontal ground movements from mining subsi-
dence.
In 1975, the National Coal Board (NCB) produced a general guide for predicting the intensity of
subsidence damage. It is noted that “accurate prediction also depends upon an expertise difficult to
reduce to quantitative terms and which can only be acquired from a wide experience with buildings
of various age and type of construction” (NCB, 1975). The main factors considered for the NCB’s
damage classification scheme are strain and building length. The NCB classification scheme is
very similar to that presented by Orchard in Geddes and Cooper (1962).
Karmis, et al. (1994) compared damage criteria suggested by multiple authors in order to define
ranges of threshold damage values. Karmis, et al. (1994) noted that the damage criteria presented
by NCB (1975), while widely used, ignores the construction materials, design, shape, and age of
the structure experiencing the damage. In order to establish threshold values of ground movement
parameters which describe a particular severity damage level, three prominent damage classifica-
tion schemes (by NCB (1975), Bruhn et al. (1982), Bhattacharya and Singh (1985), Singh (1992))
were compared and then combined (Karmis, et al. 1994).
After establishing equivalencies among the damage classifications presented by NCB (1975),
Bruhn et al. (1982), Bhattacharya and Singh (1985), Singh (1992), Karmis, et al. (1994) used mea-
sured values of horizontal strain and angular distortion from Singh (1992) to define ranges of sub-
sidence parameter values associated with each class of damage. Table 2.3 summarizes the ranges
of strain and distortion values associated with each combined damage class.
Establishment of the ranges of threshold damage values for each class of damage allowed
Karmis, et al. (1994) to define ranges of subsidence parameters that correspond to a threshold,
above which structural damage due to mine subsidence is likely and below which structural dam-
age is unlikely. Because horizontal strain data is most abundant, it is considered the predominant
damage index. The threshold value range for horizontal strain is 1.5 × 10−3 to 3 × 10−3 (Karmis,
et al. 1994). A value of 1.5 × 10−3 is used as a default for the examples in this manual. Other
threshold value ranges, such as those for angular distortion, curvature and slope, were also defined
by Karmis, et al. (1994). However, it is noted that the values are based on significantly less data
than the horizontal strain values.
17
Table 2.3: Classes of damage and suggested threshold (damage limit) values of horizontal strain and angular
distortion (Karmis, et al., 1994)
Class of Damage or Severity Level (*) Horizontal Strain (**) Angular Distortion (**)
NCB System→SIS→DCS
Negligible→Slight→Architectural 0.5 × 10−3 1.0 × 10−3
−3
Slight→Moderate→Functional 1.5 − 2.0 × 10 2.5 − 3.0 × 10−3
Appreciable→Moderate→Functional 1.5 − 2.0 × 10−3 2.5 − 3.0 × 10−3
−3
Severe→Severe→Structural 3.0 × 10 7.0 × 10−3
Very Severe→Very Severe→Structural > 3.0 × 10−3 > 7.0 × 10−3
(*) comparative/comprehensive scheme by Bhattacharya and Singh (1985), Singh (1992)
(**) suggested damage limit values after Singh (1992)
18
Chapter 3
The Profile Function Method
3.1 Overview of the Profile Function Method

A profile function defines the distribution of subsidence values on the surface along an axis or-
thogonal to the boundary of a theoretical, infinitely long, underground excavation (Figure 3.1). In
general, a function which is asymptotic to two horizontal lines is required, and the parameters to
be used for this equation must be determined from field data. The prediction model used in this
formulation is based on the hyperbolic tangent formulation as shown in the equation:
{ [ ]}
1 cx
S(x) = Smax 1 − tanh (3.1)
2 B
where:
S(x) = subsidence at x;
x = the distance from the inflection point;
Smax = the maximum subsidence of the profile;
B = the distance from the inflection point to point of Smax ; and
c = a constant.
This model is sensitive to the maximum subsidence factor for the area, Smax , and the distance
of the inflection point from the rib. The maximum subsidence factor can be calculated as a func-
tion of the percentage of hard material in the overburden (percent hardrock). The position of the
inflection point can be calculated as a function of the overburden depth. Both estimations are based
on statistical procedures used to evaluate data from Eastern U.S. coalfields and should be used for
predicting subsidence movements over areas with similar characteristics.
In this profile function formulation, the magnitude of the maximum subsidence factor is not
affected by the position of the inflection point. Thus, the same maximum subsidence factor is
obtained using either an average or a conservative estimate of the position of the inflection point.
The position of the inflection point, however, determines the distribution of the subsidence profile
with respect to the rib of the excavation. It should be emphasized that the profile function developed
for this area may not be applicable for subsidence predictions in other coalfields with different
characteristics.
19
Overview of Profile Function Formulation
B
Inflection
Point
W/h = 1.2 h
Angle of Subsidence
Draw
Smax = f(W/h) Profile
W
Mined Coal
s(x) = Smax [1-tanh{cx/B)]

x=distance from inflection point Limits of Mining
c=constant
Input:
(1) Mine Plan Geometry (approx.) Panel Width
Seam Thickness
(2) Surface Topography (approx.) Overburden Depth
(3) Empirical Parameters Percent Hardrock
Figure 3.1: Definition of terms used in the profile function method
Notes
• The width-to-depth ratio, W /h, should be greater than 0.5 in order to conform with the limits
of the database used to generate the empirical parameters of this profile function.
• Due to the mathematical nature of the hyperbolic tangent function, slight variations in the
magnitude of the calculated maximum subsidence value, Smax , might occur for different
panel widths, under supercritical conditions. In other words, although the calculated maxi-
mum subsidence value should be the same for supercritical conditions, a slight increase in
the value of Smax is observed with increasing width-to-depth ratio within the supercritical
range. Such variations introduce a margin of error of less than one percent (1%).
• The type of the profile function and its parameters can not be modified by the user.
20
3.2 Example P1: Subcritical Panel
Instructions
1. Execute the Profile Function module.
2. Select the Edit - Input Parameters option (Figure 3.2). Enter or select the following param-
eters:
(a) panel type = Longwall

(b) panel width = 600 ft
(c) panel depth = 500 ft
(d) extraction thickness = 5 ft
(e) percent hardrock in the overburden = 50%
(f) automatic surface point spacing (= 0)
(g) prediction mode = Conservative
3. Leave the definition for Zero Subsidence to its default value (e.g., 0.5% Smax).
4. Click on the Output Options tab.
5. Select Display Graph as Results Mode and Single Curve as Graph Mode (Figure 3.3).
6. Click on the Display Graph button to calculate subsidence and plot the results.
Figure 3.2: Example P1: Profile function input window (part 1/2)
21
Figure 3.3: Example P1: Profile function input window (part 2/2)
7. Close the Graph window.
8. Select Append Curve as Graph Mode.
9. Click on Graph Options and ensure that more than one curves are selected. Adjust the selec-
tion by sliding the horizontal select bar.
Note: When in Append mode, the graphing option allows comparison of up to six graphs, i.e.,
the program remembers the last six sets of data generated/plotted (see Setting the Basic Graph
Options in Section 3.4 starting on page 29). Each curve may be generated by modifying the
input data.
10. Click on the Subsidence Parameters tab. Select Average Profile as Prediction Mode (Figure
3.2).
11. Click on the Display Graph button to calculate subsidence and plot the results. Two curves
should appear on the graph. Curve #1 corresponds to the first curve plotted and Curve #2 to
the second curve plotted. In other words, blue corresponds to the conservative calculation
and red corresponds to the average calculation (Figure 3.4).
Note: The conservative subsidence profile delineates a larger subsidence trough than the
average profile.
13. Click on the OK button to exit the input window.
22
Figure 3.4: Example P1: Plot of conservative and average subcritical profile
14. Select the File - Save option to save the input data. Enter EX1 at the file selection dialog box.
The data should be saved as EX1.PRF. Click on the Save button to save the data.
15. Select Edit - Project Parameters. Ensure that Zero Subsidence is set to 0.5% Smax.
16. Select Conservative Profile as Prediction Mode.
17. Select Display Graph as Results Mode.
18. Select Single Curve as Graph Mode. The Plot Angle of Draw check box is enabled. Click
on the Plot Angle of Draw check box.
19. Select Append Curve as Graph Mode. The Plot Angle of Draw check box is disabled and
locked in the checked status.
20. Click on the Display Graph button to calculate subsidence and plot the results. The panel
half width is plotted and a line corresponding to the angle of draw is plotted in the same color.
Note that the angle of draw is estimated at 23.6 deg based on the current definition of Zero
Subsidence. Close the Graph window.
21. Set Zero Subsidence to 0.6% Smax
should appear on the graph. Curve #1 corresponds to the first curve plotted and Curve #2
to the second curve plotted (Figure 3.5). The second subsidence curve plotted overlays the
23
first one (they are the same). Hence only one subsidence profile is shown. However, due to
a different setting of Zero Subsidence the angle of draw for the second curve is calculated as
22.2 deg.
23. Click on Edit - Clear Graph. Exit the graph form.
24. Calculate subsidence for conservative and average prediction using current settings (Figure
3.6.
25. Exit the program and return to the calling environment.
Notes
• When a graph has already been created with the Plot Angle of Draw option enabled, the latter
option can not be disabled. This is to avoid plotting a graph with multiple curves with and
without angle of draw lines. To change this option, clear the graph first, select Single Curve,
uncheck the Plot Angle of Draw option and then plot the graph again.
• The zero subsidence specification is only used when estimating the angle of draw for a spe-
cific profile.
Figure 3.5: Example P1: Plot of conservative profile and two angles of draw (zero subsidence corresponds
to 0.5% Smax and 0.6% Smax respectively); the panel half-width is also shown
24
Figure 3.6: Example P1: Plot of conservative and average subcritical profile with angle of draw estimates
(zero subsidence corresponds to 0.6% Smax)
• If the user needs to extend the calculation further out from the angle of draw, the spacing of
the surface points should be increased to create more points on the flat portion of the curve.
This is helpful if the user needs to emphasize that a structure lies well outside of the point of
zero subsidence.
Copying a Graph
The user can copy the graph to any Windows word processor (or other application) that supports
clipboard functions. This can be accomplishing though the following procedure:
• Copy the graph to the clipboard using the Edit - Copy menu option in the Graph window.
• Alternatively you may use the “Print Screen”, or any other screen/window capture utility.
• Activate the word processing application (either launch it or maximize it from the taskbar).
• Paste the graph in the application.
• Save the file for future reference or report generation.
• Add more graphs in the same file.
25
Further Practice
After completing this original exercise the user may experiment by changing the values one at a
time to compare the changes in the curves and the angle of draw values.
Tips
It always helps to sketch the mine plan on graph paper before using this program.
26
3.3 Example P2: Supercritical Panel
Instructions
2. Select the Edit - Input Parameters option (Figure 3.2). Enter or select the following param-
eters:
(a) panel type = Longwall

(b) panel width = 600 ft
(c) panel depth = 300 ft
(d) extraction thickness = 5 ft
(e) percent hardrock in the overburden = 50%
(f) automatic surface point spacing (= 0)
(g) prediction mode = Conservative
3. Click on the Output Options tab.
4. Select Display Graph as Results Mode and Single Curve as Graph Mode (Figure 3.3).
5. Click on the Display Graph button to calculate subsidence and plot the results.
6. Select Average Profile as Prediction Mode.
7. Select Append Curve as Graph Mode.
should appear on the graph. Curve #1 corresponds to the first curve plotted and Curve #2 to
the second curve plotted (Figure 3.7). Close the Graph window.
9. Exit the program and return to the calling environment.
Notes
• The supercritical portion of the profile is not affected by the prediction mode (conservative
or average).
27
Figure 3.7: Example P2: Plot of supercritical profiles
28
3.4 Example P3: Setting the Basic Graph Options
Instructions
2. Repeat steps 2 - 5 as shown in Section 3.3, starting on page 27.
3. Click on the Graph Options button. Several basic graph formatting options can be set using
the controls in the window shown in Figure 3.81 .
4. Select the Set Format Parameters to Last Used option. This setting allows the user to change
the basic formatting parameters of the graph.
5. Set the Graph Style option to Lines and Symbols.
6. Click on the OK button to accept the settings.

1
To display this window, click on the Graph Options button in the Parameters window (Figure 3.3), or click on the
Options - Basic Options menu item of the Graph window (Figures 3.4 or 3.5)
Figure 3.8: Example P3: Graph options
29
7. Click on the Display Graph button to calculate subsidence and plot the results (Figure 3.9).
9. Close the Parameters window, exit the program and return to the calling environment.
Notes
For more information see Chapter 13 starting on page 238.
Further Practice
Advanced graph options can be accessed through the graph tool bar as explained in section 3.5,
starting on page 31. Also see Chapter 13.
Figure 3.9: Example P3: Changing the graph style
30
3.5 Example P4: The Advanced Graph Formatting Options
Instructions
3. Right click on the chart. A property window will appear (Figure 3.10).
4. Click on the ChartArea tab and then on the Interior tab.
5. Select a new background color and click on the Apply button. The background color of the
chart will change to the new selection.
6. Click on the PlotArea tab and then on the Interior tab.
7. Select a new background color and click on the Apply button. The background color of the
plot area of the chart will change also.
8. Apply other formatting changes.
9. Close the 2D Chart Control Properties window.
11. Close the Parameters window, exit the program and return to the calling environment.
Figure 3.10: Example P4: The 2D Chart Control Properties Window
31
32
Chapter 4
The Influence Function Method
4.1 Overview of the Influence Function Method

Influence function methods for subsidence prediction have the ability to consider any mining geom-
etry, to negotiate superposition of the influence from a number of excavated areas having different
mining characteristics and, also, to calculate horizontal strains as well as other related deformation
indices. The function utilized in SDPS is the bell-shaped Gaussian function, often also referred to
as “Knothe’s prediction method” (Knothe, 1957). In other references it is also cited as the Budryk-
Knothe Method (Budryk and Knothe, 1953). This method assumes that the influence function for
the two-dimensional case is given by:
[ ]
So (x) (x − s)2
g(x, s) = exp −π (4.1)
r r2
where:
r = the radius of principal influence = h/ tan(β);
h = the overburden depth;
β = the angle of principal influence;
s = the coordinate of the point, P (s), where subsidence is considered;
x = the coordinate of the infinitesimal excavated element; and
So(x) = the convergence of the roof of the infinitesimal excavated element.
Subsidence at any point P (s), therefore, can be expressed by the following equation:
[ ]
1 ∫ +∞ (x − s)2
S(x, s) = So (x) exp −π dx (4.2)
r −∞ r2
where:
So (x) = m(x)a(x);
m(x) = the extraction thickness; and
a(x) = the roof convergence (subsidence) factor.
For finite excavation limits x1 and x2 , equation [4.2] becomes:
[ ]
Smax ∫ x2 (x − s)2
S(x, s) = exp −π dx (4.3)
r x1 r2
33
where Smax is the maximum possible subsidence (supercritical subsidence) within finite excavation
limits x1 and x2 .
In the case of the half-infinite horizontal plane excavation, extraction is assumed to occur from
x to +∞. By identifying the coordinate s with the coordinate x and by selecting the origin of the
coordinate system to be at the edge of the extracted area, equation [4.3] can be written as:
[ ]
Smax ∫ ∞ λ2
S(x) = exp −π 2 dλ (4.4)
r x r
As a result, the following indices can be calculated:
• Slope or tilt, T (x), given as the first derivative of the subsidence equation, i.e.,
[ ]
dSx Smax x2
T (x) = =− exp −π 2 (4.5)
dx r r
• Curvature, K(x), given as the first derivative of slope (i.e., the variation of tilt between
adjacent locations on the surface), or the second derivative of subsidence, i.e.,
[ ]
d2 Sx 2πSmax x2
K(x) = = x exp −π (4.6)
dx2 r3 r2
• Radius of curvature, ρ(x), given as the inverse of curvature, i.e.,

[ ]
1 r3 1 x2
ρ(x) = = exp π 2 (4.7)
K(x) 2πSmax x r
• Assuming that horizontal displacement, U (x), is proportional to the first derivative of subsi-
dence, then: [ ]
dSx Smax x2
U (x) = −Bs = Bs exp −π 2 (4.8)
dx r r
• Consequently, horizontal strains, E(x) can be determined as the first derivative of the hori-
zontal displacements with respect to x, i.e.,
[ ]
dU x 2πSmax x2
E(x) = = −Bs x exp −π (4.9)
dx r3 r2
The program typically calculates Ex , Ey , i.e., horizontal strains along the x and y axes. The
maximum of the two values constitutes the maximum horizontal strain at a point (either in tension
or in compression). The directional horizontal strain refers to horizontal strains along a specific
direction (i.e., along a line of monitoring points or stations). This can easily be calculated using the
angle of the profile (line) vector from the horizontal axis. It should be noted that all of the above
calculations depend on the actual location of the surface point, but the point itself is assumed to lie
on a horizontal plane at that location.
Furthermore, ground strain is the strain experienced on the ground surface taking into account
the slope of the original surface. In the case of a sloping terrain, the compressional portion of the
34
Table 4.1: Typical steps to calculate and plot deformations using the influence function method
* Load the Influence Function Program

* Select the type of Mine Plan
* Select the type of Prediction Points layout
* Input/Edit Data (Manual Input or Import from AutoCAD or other sources)
* Mine Plan Data
* Prediction Point Data
* Empirical Parameters
* Save the Project File
* Calculate Deformations
* Select the Deformation Indices
* Subsidence
* Horizontal Strain
* Horizontal Displacement
* Slope
* Curvature
* Directional and/or Ground Strain
* Select other Calculation Options
* Calculate Surface Deformations
* View the Reports
* Load the Graphing Program
* Plot the Calculated Deformations
strain curve may be enhanced or diminished in relationship to the tensile portion depending on
whether the slope is parallel to the expected trough or vice versa.
Thus, the influence function formulation can be applied to calculate surface deformations (sub-
sidence, strain, slope, curvature, displacements) above longwall and room-and-pillar panels, given
the geometry of the excavation, information on the overburden geology, as well as the location of
the prediction points on the surface. More specifically, the required data include:
• the geometry of the mine plan and the associated properties (extraction thickness, subsidence
factor for supercritical conditions)
• the location (coordinates) of the points on the surface for which prediction of the deformation
indices (subsidence, strain, slope, curvature, horizontal displacement) is to be performed
• the empirical parameters that numerically represent the behavior of the overburden
Typically, the steps required for calculating surface deformations using the influence function
method, are shown in Table 4.1. Figure 4.1 presents a schematic diagram for developing the input
data. Figures 4.2 to 4.6 present typical distributions for the deformation indices that can be calcu-
lated by the influence function method. Table 4.2 shows all the indices that can be calculated by
the influence function method.
35
Surface
*******************
C
Overburden
Panel boundary Seam level
B
Panel #1 Panel #2 Panel #3
A Decide on the type of mineplan & prediction points
SurvCADD AutoCAD
Panels
B Define mine plan in 3D space
Pillars
Rectangles Polygons
SurvCADD AutoCAD
C Define surface points in 3D space
Grid Scattered
points
D Save all data in project file

(entities may be created/imported/loaded separately)
Figure 4.1: Steps for defining a project file
36
Distance from panel center
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Subsidence
0.0
Figure 4.2: Typical subsidence distribution

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700

Slope
0.00
Figure 4.3: Typical slope distribution

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Curvature
0.00
Figure 4.4: Typical curvature distribution

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Horz. displ.
0.00
Figure 4.5: Typical horizontal displacement distribution

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Strain
0.00
Figure 4.6: Typical horizontal strain distribution
37
Table 4.2: Identification codes for deformation indices and calculated parameters
No Deformation Index Name Code Notes Units

1 Subsidence SU ft or m
2 Measured Subsidence SuM ft or m
3 Slope in the X-direction TX 0 -
4 Slope in the Y-direction TY 0 -
5 Directional Slope TA 0 -
6 Maximum (Total) Slope TM 0 -
7 Angle of Maximum Slope TE 1 deg
8 Horizontal Displacement in the X-direction VX ft or m
9 Horizontal Displacement in the Y-direction VY ft or m
10 Directional Horizontal Displacement VA ft or m
11 Maximum (Total) Horizontal Displacement VM ft or m
12 Measured Horizontal Displacement (X-dir) VxM ft or m
13 Measured Horizontal Displacement (Y-dir) VyM ft or m
14 Measured Maximum Horizontal Displacement VmM ft or m
15 Angle of Maximum Horizontal Displacement VE 1 deg
16 Curvature in the X-direction KX 2 1/ft or 1/m
17 Curvature in the Y-direction KY 2 1/ft or 1/m
18 Directional Curvature KA 2 1/ft or 1/m
19 Maximum Principal Curvature K1 2 1/ft or 1/m
20 Minimum Principal Curvature K2 2 1/ft or 1/m
21 Maximum Curvature KM 2 1/ft or 1/m
22 Angle of Maximum Principal Curvature KE 1 deg
23 Horizontal Strain in the X-direction EX 3,5 -
24 Horizontal Strain in the Y-direction EY 3,5 -
25 Maximum Principal Horizontal Strain E1 3 -
26 Minimum Principal Horizontal Strain E2 3 -
27 Maximum Horizontal Strain EM 3 -
28 Measured Strain EmM 3 -
29 Angle of Maximum Principal Strain EE 1 deg
30 Horizontal Strain along Profile ED 3,4,5 -
31 Ground Strain along Profile and Grid EG 3,4,5 -
32 Shear Strain on the XY Plane ES 3 -
33 Shear Strain Perpendicular to Profile ET 3 -
34 Pre-Mining Surface Elevations EL ft or m
35 Post-Mining Surface Elevations SE ft or m
0 expressed in % (divide by 100 to obtain actual value).
1 This angle is calculated in degrees from the positive X-Axis in a counter-clockwise direction. It gives the
direction of the maximum value of the corresponding index on the X-Y plane. When this angle can not be
calculated (i.e., division by zero) then the program outputs “999” which should be interpreted as undefined.
2 expressed in hundreds of ppm (divide by 10,000 to obtain actual value)
3 expressed in millistrains (divide by 1000 to obtain actual value)
4 for a horizontal surface, ED and EG are equal.
5 for a line parallel to X or Y, ED is equal to EX or EY respectively.
38
Start
Type of analysis ?
Simplified Mine Plan: Rectangular Actual Mine Plan: Polygonal Panels

Panels and Surface Points on a Grid and Scattered Surface Points using a
using a Local Coordinate System World (Global) Coordinate System
Prepare Mine Plan and Prediction

Points in AutoCAD (or other CAD
Enter data manually package). Place similar entities in
separate layers.
AutoCAD
2000 or higher ?
no
yes
Export to DXF. Import Import directly
DXF file to SDPS into SDPS
Adjust Subsidence Parameters based

on regional data or calibration
Calibration
Data Save Project File
yes yes
Run Calculation
View Results and Plot Deformations
Change Subsidence
Parameters or Geometry ?
no
End
Figure 4.7: Flowchart diagram for using the influence function module
A typical flowchart for using the influence function module is also shown in Figure 4.7.
39
4.2 Definition of a Mine Plan in the Influence Function Pro-
gram
Mine plan data describe the extraction area under consideration using various conventions. An
extraction area is always defined in three-dimensional space by specifying the X,Y,Z coordinates
of the points defining that area. Mine panels and pillars are referred to as excavation parcels. A
parcel can be either active or not active. A parcel, which is not active, is not deleted from the file,
but it does not participate in the calculations.
4.2.1 Geometry and Boundary Adjustment

The geometry of a mine plan is determined by the geometry of the excavation panels adjusted by the
edge effect offset. This parameter represents the distance between the actual rib of the excavation
and the position of the inflection point, as determined by panel geometry and site characteristics.
The location of the inflection point, which defines the transition between horizontal tensile and
compressive strain zones, is very important for the application of the influence function method.
The distance of the inflection point from the rib using either an average and a conservative estimate
as a function of the width-to-depth ratio of a panel can be estimated using the graph in Figure 4.8.
Thus, the magnitude of the edge effect offset can be determined as follows:
• using the graph showing the variation of the location of the inflection point for the conserva-
tive or average estimate (Figure 4.8),
• by selecting the Edge Effect Management tab in the Rectangular Mine Plan window of the
influence function program and clicking on Automatic Adjustment,
• by analyzing subsidence curves measured at a specific site or region.
4.2.2 Panel Representation

Simple mine layouts can usually be approximated using sets of rectangular extraction areas. In this
case, the input required for every parcel includes the parcel number; the coordinates of the west,
east, south, and north borders; the seam elevation; the extraction thickness (mining height); and
the average supercritical subsidence factor (in percent) associated with it. These coordinates can
be specified in a local or a global coordinate system with axes parallel to the parcel sides. In the
Influence function module, this option is implemented as Rectangular Mine Plans.
Complex mine layouts can usually be approximated by a closed polygon (i.e., a piece-wise
linear shape). In this case, the input required for every point within a parcel includes the point
reference number; the northing (Y), easting (X), and elevation (Z); the extraction thickness (mining
height); and the supercritical subsidence factor (in percent) associated with it. The mine plan editor
can provide access to all points in a parcel, add new points, and add new parcels provided that
the current parcel is defined by three or more points. The points should be entered in a counter-
clockwise fashion. The location of each point should be adjusted to reflect the edge effect offset, or
the relative position of the inflection point. The maximum number of parcels and points per parcel
can be adjusted within the limits of the available memory. In the Influence function module, this
option is implemented as Polygonal Mine Plans.
40
0.30
location of the inflection point with respect to depth (d/h)

0.25
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-0.05
-0.10
-0.15
Conservative Estimate
-0.20
Average Estimate
-0.25
-0.30
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
width-to-depth ratio (W/h)
Figure 4.8: The influence of the edge effect offset on subsidence profiles
Warning
Pillars can not exist outside extracted areas. If a pillar is defined outside an extracted area the results
are unpredictable. Currently, the parcel definition module of the program can not check for such
inconsistencies. Examples of erroneous panel definitions are given in Appendix D.
Notes
• If no adjustments are made to the geometry of the mine plan, the program assumes that the
inflection point is over the rib of the excavation.
• The user must specify whether each parcel represents an extracted panel or a pillar within an
extracted panel. A pillar is mathematically represented as a parcel with a negative subsidence
factor. Setting the pillar option for a parcel will reset the subsidence factor associated with
this parcel. In that sense, an mined parcel can be either positive (i.e., longwall panel) or
negative (i.e., pillar in the middle of a panel). Thus, a mine plan that consists only of pillars
(without an extraction boundary) will generate positive(!) subsidence values.
• It should be emphasized that the subsidence factor used in the majority of the influence func-
tion formulations is the subsidence factor for supercritical conditions.
• The program supports more than one format for input data for the convenience of the user. For
example, certain panels or pillars can be easily represented as rectangles and can be entered
as single records, compared to four or more entries required if these panels are digitized
41
point by point. Additionally, calculations for rectangular parcels are much faster compared
to calculations for parcels defined by individual points.
4.3 Definition of the Prediction Points in the Influence Function

Program
Prediction point data describe the surface points where the deformation indices will be calculated.
Prediction points are always defined in three-dimensional space, by specifying the X,Y,Z coordi-
nates of these points. A point can be either active or not active. A point which is not active is not
deleted from the file, but will not be included in the calculations.
4.3.1 Scattered Points

A scattered point set may consist of any number of points that are randomly located on the surface.
If such points can be specified as part of a grid, the Grid Points option should be used (Figure 4.9).
Required parameters for each point include:
• the point reference code which can be any alphanumeric string,
• the easting, northing and elevation of each point,
• the point status, i.e., active or not active (an inactive point will not be displayed in the View
option and will not participate in any of the calculations).
4.3.2 Grid Points

A grid point set may consist of any number of points which are uniformly distributed in a virtual
window in XY space. This window is defined by minima and maxima in the X- and Y- directions
as well as the cell size in each direction.
Points on a grid Scattered points

Figure 4.9: Points on a grid and scattered points
42
Figure 4.10: Subcritical, critical and supercritical subsidence profiles
The grid can only be oriented parallel to the current coordinate system. If the current coordinate
system is a State Plane coordinate system or based on WGS84, the X-direction corresponds to the
easting and the Y-direction corresponds to the northing (see also Appendix E, starting on page 327).
If the grid needs to be oriented at an angle to the current coordinate system, the grid points should be
generated by a different tool and imported as scattered points into the Influence Function module.
Results can be exported and contoured with third party software tools.
The user has three options regarding grid elevations:
• to consider a flat surface and specify a uniform elevation for all points,
• to generate a sloping surface based on plane azimouth angle and slope with respect to a
reference point on the surface, and
• to consider each point separately and specify individual point elevations; this can be easily
accomplished when editing the grid point data set in spreadsheet mode.
4.3.3 Effect of Subsidence Parameters in Ground Deformation Calculations

Figure 4.10 highlights the difference between a supercritical, critical and subcritical panel with
respect to calculated subsidence values. Figure 4.11 highlights the effect of the influence angle on
calculated subsidence profiles, while Figure 4.12 shows the effect of the supercritical subsidence
factor on calculated subsidence profiles. Figure 4.13 presents the effect of the edge effect offset
on subsidence profiles. The examples presented in Figures 4.10-4.13 correspond to a 600×2000 ft
longwall panel, 300-800 ft of overburden, 5 ft extraction thickness and a supercritical subsidence
factor of 40-60%.
43
Figure 4.11: The effect of the influence angle on supercritical subsidence profiles
Figure 4.12: The effect of the supercritical subsidence factor on subsidence profiles
44
Figure 4.13: The influence of the edge effect offset on subsidence profiles
45
4.4 Calculation of Dynamic Deformations using the Influence
Function Method
An understanding of the difference between final, or static, subsidence and dynamic subsidence
must be established in order to properly assess almost any mine subsidence issue. In general, the
dynamic subsidence differs from the final subsidence in that it is the subsidence movements that
occur as mining progresses toward, beneath, and past a point on the surface. In contrast, static or
final subsidence relates to the degree of subsidence that occurs at a given point on the surface after
the mining has passed the point and no further subsidence-related movements are expected to occur.
The distinction between dynamic and static states of subsidence is very important because the
distribution of strains, and therefore damage potential, for each condition is significantly different.
When evaluating an area to be undermined, it is important that mining engineers assess the damage
potential from both dynamic and static subsidence. A basic diagram depicting the concept of a
moving “wave” of subsidence, accompanied by both tensile and compressive strains, is presented
in Figure 4.14.
The main and residual phases of subsidence are believed to often constitute approximately 90%
of the total subsidence.
The methodology discussed by Jarosz et al. (1990) and based on Knothe (1953), has been im-
plemented into SDPS to enable the prediction of dynamic subsidence experienced by surface points
as longwall mining approaches, passes, and moves away. The basic time-subsidence function pro-
posed by Knothe (1953) is: [ ]
Ṡ(t) = c S f (t) − s(t) (4.10)
where:
S f (t) = the final subsidence;
c = a time coefficient; and
S(t) = subsidence at time t.
Using the relationship by Knothe (1953), and an influence function for final subsidence at a
point above a panel, the following equation for calculating subsidence development due to under-
Figure 4.14: Compressive and tensile strains due to dynamic subsidence
46
Figure 4.15: Panel boundary offset for calculating dynamic deformations (after Jarosz et al., 1990)
mining by a longwall panel was developed The equation assumes that the longwall panel has a
constant width and that the extraction advances at a constant rate.
, y2 , z, ∆t) = S f (xt , xo , y1 , y2 , z)−
S(xt , x(o , y1)
( )
u2z uz xt rz uz rz u z
− exp exp S f (xt + , xo + , y1 , y2 , z)+ (4.11)
4π rz 2π 2π
+∆S f (xt , xo , y1 , y2 , z)[1 − exp(−c∆t)]
where:
xt = xo + vt;
xo = the starting x-coordinate for the advancing panel;
v = the rate of advance of mining assumed to be constant;
t = the time since mining began;
x1 , x2 = x-coordinates for the advancing panel;
y1 , y2 = y-coordinates for the advancing panel, i.e., they define the width of the advancing panel,
which is assumed to be constant;
z = the depth of mining;
∆t = time since excavation has stopped (∆t = 0 for advancing faces);
S f = final subsidence at time t;
S = subsidence at time t;
cz rz
uz = − ;
v
cz = time coefficient for horizon z;
rz = the radius of influence at horizon z (i.e., ground surface); and
rz uz
= the magnitude of translation used to calculate surface effects due the advancing longwall
2π
panel (see figure 4.15).
The first part of equation [4.11] represents final, asymptotic subsidence at a point. Subsidence
development at the point while the face is moving at a constant rate (i.e., feet/day) is represented by
the first two parts of the equation. Finally, the residual subsidence, or the subsidence development
between the time at which the face stops and the time when the maximum subsidence is reached,
47
Figure 4.16: Comparison of dynamic subsidence for different panel advance rates
is represented by the entire equation (Jarosz et al., 1990). To calculate the subsidence due to the
advancing longwall at a given point, the methodology proposed by Jarosz et al. (1990) evaluates
the effects of extraction at an offset panel location. For any actual panel location, the method cal-
culates the predicted effects of subsidence from a panel position offset a distance equal to rz2πuz in
the opposite direction of mining advance (second part of equation [4.11]. The offset distance is
referred to as the magnitude of translation. Prediction of subsidence due to an advancing longwall
panel involves numerous calculations of predicted subsidence for translated panel positions corre-
sponding to each actual panel location. The calculations reduce the final subsidence for each face
location according to the influence of the offset (or translated) panel location.
The overall effect of the translations is that the higher the advance rate, the greater the effective
edge effect offset, which is a combination of the static edge effect offset and a dynamic distance
due to panel advance. Figure 4.16 illustrates the difference between predicted dynamic subsidence
for an advance rate of 20 feet/day as compared to predicted subsidence for an advance rate of 30
feet/day. As is evident from the figure, a more rapid face advance rate (30 feet/day) yields less
subsidence than a slower face advance rate (20 feet/day), for the same face location. This relation-
ship causes the inflection point of the dynamic subsidence curve (which defines the offset distance
due to panel advance) to be located further from the actual panel location, therefore increasing the
offset distance due to panel advance.
Notes
Accurate prediction of the end of the main phase of subsidence is particularly important for subsi-
dence mitigation activities and for planning development of surface structures on recently under-
mined land.
48
4.5 Example L1: Deformations on a Transverse Line
The mine plan and prediction points layout is shown in Figure 4.17.
Instructions
1. Execute the Influence Function module.
2. Select the Edit - Project Description option (Figure 4.18).
3. Set the following parameters:
• enter a project description

• select feet as units (default value)
• select Rectangular Mine Plan
• select Points on a Grid
• select Use Custom Parameters
• set the tangent of influence angle = 2.31
• set the horizontal strain coefficient = 0.35
• set the percent hardrock = 50%
• set the time coefficient = 0.075
5. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option (Figure 4.19).
600 ft
2000 ft
400 ft
Figure 4.17: Example L1: View of mine plan and prediction points
49
Figure 4.18: Example L1: Project description window
• adjustment options = Automatic Adjustment

• parcel type = Panel
• parcel status = Active
• parcel reference code = M1 (automatically set, but user is allowed to change)
• west border = −300 ft
• east border = +300 ft
• south border = −1000 ft
• north border = +1000 ft
• parcel elevation = 0 ft1
• extraction thickness = 6 ft
1
the program can accept actual or relative seam elevations; surface point elevations should be adjusted accordingly
50
Figure 4.19: Example L1: Rectangular mine plan input window
• critical / supercritical subsidence factor = 39.5% (automatically set since the adjustment
options are set to Automatic Adjustment; user is not allowed to redefine)
7. Click on the View button to view the mine plan.
8. Close the viewing window.
9. Click on the OK button to close the input window and retain the changes. If the Cancel button
is selected, the input data entered above will not be accepted.
10. Select the Edit - Prediction Points option (Figure 4.20).
11. Enter the following parameters (the program will automatically calculate the total number of
points):
• minimum easting = −700 ft

• maximum easting = +700 ft
• cell size in the X-direction = 50 ft
• minimum northing = 0 ft
• maximum northing = 0 ft
• cell size in the Y-direction = 0 ft
• average point elevation = 500 ft
51
Figure 4.20: Example L1: Grid point input window
12. Click on the View All button to view the mine plan and points (Figure 4.17).
14. Click on the OK button to close the input window and retain the data. If the Cancel button is
selected, the input data entered above will not be accepted.
15. Select the File - Save Project option
16. Enter L1 as file name. Save the project.
17. Select the Calculate - Calculate Deformations menu item (Figure 4.21).
18. Verify that the file prefix code is L1 and check the options shown in Figure 4.21.
19. Leave the remaining options to their default values.
20. Click on the Calculate command button.
21. Accept the warning on Steep Surface Terrain. (This warning message can be disabled from
the Utilities - Options menu item.)
22. Accept the warning on Logical Errors in Project Definition. (This warning message can be
disabled from the Utilities - Options menu item.)
23. The model will be solved. Close the solution module monitor window. Close the calculation
control window.
24. Select the Graph menu option.
52
Figure 4.21: Example L1: Output options window
25. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option (Figure 4.22).
26. Select the appropriate cross-section (X or Y). Note that in this case, the preselected cross-
section is X, (along the X-Axis) since a cross-section along the Y-Axis can not be selected.
27. Select the index to plot and click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected defor-
mation index will be plotted on the screen. If the option Set default format parameters is
enabled, all graph options will be locked. By selecting the Set format parameters to last used
option, the user can modify current graph settings.
Further Practice
After completing this original exercise one may experiment by changing the values one at a time
to compare the changes in the curves.
53
Figure 4.22: Example L1: Graph module, 2-D graph options
Tips
It always helps to sketch the mine plan on graph paper or any computer based graphing tool before
using this program.
54
4.6 Example L2: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (A)
The edge effect offset is a very important parameter in subsidence prediction (see also Section
4.2.1 on page 40). It incorporates the influence of the strength or the rigidity of the panel rib to the
development of the subsidence trough on the surface. The example below illustrates the case for a
rectangular extraction area where the rib pillars are considered rigid (non-yielding). The mine plan
and prediction points layout is shown in Figure 4.23.
Instructions

• parcel reference code = M1
• parcel number = 1.01 (automatic)
600 ft
2000 ft
400 ft
Figure 4.23: Example L2: View of mine plan with adjusted panel boundaries
55
Figure 4.24: Example L2: Adjusting the panel boundaries

• parcel elevation = 0 ft
• critical / supercritical subsidence factor = 39.5% (automatically set since the adjustment
options are set to Automatic Adjustment; user is not allowed to redefine)
4. Enable Edge Effect Management and click on the Edge Effect Management tab (Figure 4.24).
Acknowledge the message that the overburden depth is not defined. The window shown in
Figure 4.24 allows the user to “adjust” panel boundaries by the edge effect offset distance,
depending on the boundary conditions of each panel.
5. Enter 500 ft as overburden depth.2
6. There are three Adjustment Options. Do not adjust, Manual Adjustment and Automatic Ad-
justment.
• Selecting Do not adjust will disable any adjustments to the geometry of the panel or
the supercritical subsidence factor. The original values set in the window as the one
shown in Figure 4.19 will be used for the calculations. Selecting Manual Adjustment,
2
if the surface points were defined prior to the mine plan, the program would set the average surface elevation as
the value for overburden depth; if the Auto Update checkbox is checked then the program will automatically adjust the
boundaries at solution time based on an average parcel elevation; the Parcel Depth value in this form is only used for
the edge effect offset calculations.
56
the program allows the user to enter specific (measured or other) values in the fields
to the right of the original panel coordinates and the original supercritical subsidence
factor (Figure 4.24). The manually adjusted values will be used in the calculations.
• Selecting Automatic Adjustment, the program automatically calculates the necessary
adjustments based on the input in this window (Figure 4.24). Such input includes the
type of the subsidence estimate, the percent hardrock, the panel depth, the condition of
the rib (yielding or rigid), etc. The automatically adjusted values will be used in the
calculations. Overburden depth needs to be defined for these options to work. If pre-
diction points are already defined, the overburden depth is calculated as the difference
between the elevation of the prediction points and the seam. Otherwise the user should
enter an elevation manually.
• In case the user wishes to start from the automatically calculated adjustments and update
them to reflect current mining conditions, the Automatic Adjustment option should be
selected in this window to calculate the default values and then the Manual Adjustment
option should be selected to disable any further changes to these values and/or to allow
selective modifications to these values.
7. Select Automatic Adjustment and Rigid ribs on the West, East, South and North borders.
8. Click on View All to plot the adjusted mine plan on the screen (Figure 4.23).
9. Click on OK to close the Edge Effect Management window and keep the changes. Click on
OK to close the Rectangular Mine Plan window and keep the changes.
13. Select the Calculate - Calculate Deformations menu item and solve the problem.
14. Compare results with the example presented in Section 4.5.
Notes
• Under Yielding boundary conditions, the boundary is not adjusted.
• The original (geometric) boundaries are kept and displayed when viewing the panel.
• Adjustments are not allowed for pillars.
• Using an Automatic adjustment will override the value for the subsidence factor as well.
Further Practice
After completing this exercise one may experiment by changing the input parameters one at a time
to compare the changes in the curves.
57
4.7 Example L3: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (B)
The example below illustrates the application of an edge effect offset on one side of a longwall
panel when it is represented as a polygonal panel.
Instructions
2. Define a polygonal panel with the vertex coordinates shown in Table 4.3.
3. Set the following parameters (a) extraction thickness = 6 ft (b) critical / supercritical subsi-
dence factor = 39.5%.
4. Click on the View button to display the mine plan (Figure 4.25).
5. Click on the Edge Effect Management tab (Figure 4.40) and select Manual Edge Effect.
6. Click on New Side button. Select “1.002” on the first dropdown control. Select “1.003” on
the second dropdown control. Enter 100 ft for the edge effect offset. The edge effect offset
will be applied to the side defined by vertex points “1.002” and “1.003”.
7. Click on the View button to display the mine plan (Figure 4.25). The edge effect offset is
shown inby the selected panel side.
8. Define a transverse surface profile using grid prediction points as follows: minimum east-
ing = −700 ft, maximum easting = +2200 ft, cell size in the X-direction = 50 ft, minimum
northing = 2500 ft, maximum northing = 2500 ft, cell size in the Y-direction = 0 ft, average
point elevation = 500 ft
10. Calculate deformations and graph the subsidence profile. Compare the left and right side of
the profile (Figure 4.26). Note the inflection point of the left part of the curve is at x=0 ft
(over the rib). The inflection point of the right part of the subsidence curve is at x=1400 ft,
thus displaced by 100 ft inby compared to the rib location at x=1500 ft.
Table 4.3: Example L3: Coordinates of panel vertex points (in feet)
ID Easting (X) Northing (Y) Elevation (Z)

1.001 0 0 0
1.002 1500 0 0
1.003 1500 5000 0
1.004 0 5000 0
58
Figure 4.25: Example L3: View of mine plan and grid points
Figure 4.26: Example L3: Transverse subsidence profile over a longwall panel with edge effect offset applied
to one side
59
4.8 Example L4: Deformations over Panel End
Instructions
4. Enter the following parameters (the program automatically calculates the number of points):

• minimum northing = −1500 ft
• maximum northing = −500 ft
Figure 4.27: Example L4: View of mine plan and surface points on a grid at panel end
60
Figure 4.28: Example L4: Definition of prediction point layout
5. Click on the View All button to view the mine plan and prediction points (Figure 4.27).
7. Click on the OK button to accept the data.
8. Select the File - Save Project option.
10. Select the Calculate - Calculate Deformations menu item.
control window.
14. Select the Graph option.
15. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option. Select the index to view (i.e.,
subsidence). Specific sections along the X or Y axis can be selected. By default the X section
is selected, i.e., to create profiles along the X axis (Figure 4.22).
16. Click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index will be plotted
on the screen. Figure 4.29 shows three transverse subsidence profiles at Y=−900, Y=−950
and Y=−1000 ft superimposed on the same graph. Figure 4.30 shows a similar graph for
horizontal strains in the X-direction.
61
Figure 4.29: Example L4: Transverse subsidence profile
17. Click on the +plane -plane buttons to plot the previous or the following sections overlaid on
the current graph.
18. Close the plot window.
19. Select sections along the Y axis and select Ex - Horizontal Strain - x (Figure 4.31). Click
on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index will be plotted on the
screen (Figure 4.32). Close the 2-D window.
20. Select the 3-D option.
21. Select the index to view and click on the Graph button. A 3D graph of the selected deforma-
tion index will be plotted on the screen.
62
Figure 4.30: Example L4: Transverse horizontal strain profile
63
Figure 4.31: Example L4: Plotting transverse strains on a longitudinal profile
64
Figure 4.32: Example L4: Longitudinal horizontal strain profile
65
4.9 Example L5: Deformations over Adjacent Longwall Panels
Instructions
2. Select the Edit - Project Description option.
3. Enter the following parameters:

• select Points on a grid
• tangent of influence angle = 2.31
• strain coefficient = 0.35
• percent hardrock = 50%
• time coefficient = 0.075
600 ft
4000 ft
400 ft
1300 ft
Figure 4.33: Example L5: Mine plan and prediction points
66
5. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option and enter the coordinates for the first panel (dimensions
= 600 × 4000 ft, elevation = 0 ft, extraction thickness = 6 ft) as follows:

• parcel reference code = M1 (automatic)
• critical / supercritical subsidence factor = 39.5% (automatic)
6. Click on Append in the Insert Mode frame or verify that Append is selected. This changes
the Insert Parcel button to Append Parcel. Click on the Append Parcel button to add a parcel
at the end of the parcel sequence. If the parcel was inserted, it would be inserted before the
current parcel so it would become the first parcel in the sequence. This does not affect the
solution procedure, but it allows the user to position the parcel in the proper location in the
mine plan database for easy access.
7. Enter the input parameters for the second panel (dimensions 600 × 4000 ft) at a horizontal
offset of 200 ft:

• parcel reference code = M2 (automatic)
• west border = 500 ft
• east border = 1100 ft
• supercritical subsidence factor = 39.5% (automatic)
67
9. Select the Edit - Prediction Points option.
10. Enter the input parameters for the grid points (to cover the south panel edge of both panels)
as follows:

• maximum northing = −1200 ft
• average elevation = 500 ft
14. Select the File - Save Project option.
control window.
21. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option. Select the index to view (e.g.,
subsidence), and click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index
will be plotted on the screen (Figure 4.34).
22. Close the plot window. Close the 2-D window.
23. Select the 3-D option.
24. Select the index to view and click on the Graph button. A 3D graph of the selected deforma-
tion index (e.g., subsidence) will be plotted on the screen (Figure 4.35).
25. By changing some of the display options, shaded contours can be displayed on the X=Y plane
and grid lines can be displayed on the X-Z and Y-Z planes (Figure 4.36).
68
Figure 4.34: Example L5: 2-D image of subsidence over the longwall panels
Further Practice
After completing this exercise one may experiment by changing the value of the project parameters
one at a time to compare the differences in the resulting surface deformations.
69
70
71
4.10 Example L6: Deformations over a Stable Remnant Pillar
The data for this project are shown in Table 4.4 and the the mine plan layout is shown in Figure
4.37.
Instructions
3. Enter or select following parameters:

5. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option.
Table 4.4: Example L6: Input parameters
Overburden depth 600 ft Edge effect offset None

Extraction ratio 90% Tangent of influence angle 2.31
Extraction thickness 6 ft Strain coefficient 0.35
Percent hardrock 50%
72
6. Enter the input parameters for the first panel:

• subsidence factor = R&P panel (This indicates that the panel is a high-extraction room-
and-pillar panel and, thus, the supercritical subsidence factor should be automatically
calculated accordingly. This option should not be confused with the panel and pillar
designation of each parcel. The latter is adjusted in the Parcel Type frame of the win-
dow.)
• dimensions = 600 × 400 ft
• elevation = 0 ft
• critical / supercritical subsidence factor = 33.6% (automatic for above settings)
7. Click on Append in the Insert Mode frame or verify that Append is selected. This changes
the Insert Parcel button to Append Parcel. Click on the Append Parcel button to add a parcel
at the end of the parcel sequence.
8. Enter the input parameters for the second parcel (pillar) (Figure 4.38):

• subsidence factor = R&P panel (This indicates that the panel is a high-extraction room-
and-pillar panel and, thus, the supercritical subsidence factor should be automatically
calculated accordingly. This option should not be confused with the panel and pillar
designation of each parcel. The latter is adjusted in the Parcel Type frame of the win-
dow.)
• parcel type = Pillar
• dimensions = 150 × 100 ft (the user is free to select the exact location of the pillar, so
that the influence of underground workings on the surface becomes more evident)
• critical / supercritical subsidence factor = 33.6% (automatically calculated based on the
above settings)
9. Click on the View button to view the mine plan (Figure 4.37).
11. Click on the OK button to exit the mine plan input window.
73
Figure 4.38: Example L6: Entering a rectangular pillar in the mine plan

• grid cell size = 50 ft
17. Select the File - Save Project option to save the project. Enter L6 as file name.
19. Check the appropriate options and click on the Calculate command button.
control window.
22. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option.
23. Select the index to plot and click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deforma-
tion index will be plotted on the screen (Figure 4.39).
74
Figure 4.39: Example L6: Subsidence profile over remnant pillar
75
4.11 Example L7: Applying an Edge Effect Offset (C)
The example below illustrates the application of an edge effect offset in the case of polygonal panels.
The influence function program can apply either average offsets to a single panel or variable offsets
(per side of the polygon). The user should be careful when defining offsets so that the resulting
boundary does not include overlaps.
Instructions
2. Define a polygonal parcel with the vertex coordinates shown in Table 4.5.
3. Set the following parameters (a) extraction thickness = 6 ft (b) critical / supercritical subsi-
dence factor = 39.5%
4. Click on the Edge Effect Management tab (Figure 4.40) and set an average edge effect of
50 ft.
5. Click on View (Figure 4.41). Close the mine plan edit form.
6. Select Grid Points as prediction points and enter the following parameters:
• minimum easting = 5300 ft

• maximum easting = 6600 ft
Table 4.5: Example L7: Coordinates of panel vertex points (in feet)
ID Easting Northing Elevation ID Easting Northing Elevation

(X) (Y) (Z) (X) (Y) (Z)
2.001 5600 4900 0 2.011 6500 6000 0
2.002 6500 4900 0 2.012 5600 6000 0
2.003 6500 5200 0 2.013 5600 5800 0
2.004 6300 5200 0 2.014 5800 5800 0
2.005 6300 5400 0 2.015 5800 5600 0
2.006 6500 5400 0 2.016 5600 5600 0
2.007 6500 5600 0 2.017 5600 5400 0
2.008 6300 5600 0 2.018 5800 5400 0
2.009 6300 5800 0 2.019 5800 5200 0
2.010 6500 5800 0 2.020 5600 5200 0
76
Figure 4.40: Example L7: Average edge effect offset in polygonal mine plans
Figures 4.42 and 4.43 illustrate the difference in subsidence and horizontal strain calculations
before and after application of the edge effect offset.
77
Figure 4.41: Example L7: View of mine plan with adjusted panel boundaries
Figure 4.42: Example L7: Subsidence prediction with and without the application of edge effect offset to
the panel boundary line
78
Figure 4.43: Example L7: Horizontal strain prediction with and without the application of edge effect offset
to the panel boundary line
79
4.12 Example L8: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Strain
Profiles
This example highlights the difference between the horizontal and ground strains calculated over
an extracted area. As already mentioned in section 4.1, ground strain is the strain experienced
on the ground surface taking into account original ground slopes. Obviously ground strains and
horizontal strains are the same when there are no elevation differences in the original topography
(flat surface). It should also be emphasized that in both cases the program calculates the strains on
the surface and not the strains on a structure located on the surface.
Instructions
2. Select the Edit - Project Description option. Set the following parameters:

80
4. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option. Enter the input parameters for a panel:

• critical supercritical subsidence factor = 39.5% (automatic)
• enable edge effect management and set the edge effect offset for an average overburden
of 500 ft (the edge effect offset should be automatically calculated to 100 ft)
5. Click on the View button to view the mine plan (Figure 4.44a). Both the original and the
adjusted panel boundaries are shown.
9. Enter the input parameters for the grid points (to cover the south side of the panel) as follows:

• maximum northing = +1500 ft
10. Click on the Set Individual Point Elevations check box.
11. Click on the Generate command button. This function allows the user to calculate grid point
elevations on a tilted plane (Figure 4.45).
12. Create a plane dipping to the East by 10 degrees. The strike direction of this plane is on the
North - South axis. Enter the input parameters for the plane as follows:
81
Figure 4.45: Example L8: Grid plane specification
• X-coordinate of base point = 500 ft

• Y-coordinate of base point = 0 ft
• Z-coordinate of base point = 500 ft
• plane direction = 90 deg (directions are given as angles counterclockwise from the pos-
itive X-axis)
• plane slope = 10 deg
13. Click on the Generate command button. Exit the Grid Plane Specification form.
14. Click on the Table command button to list the individual elevations (Figure 4.46). Exit the
Spreadsheet Editor.
15. Click on the View All button to view the mine plan and prediction points (Figure 4.44a).
Figure 4.44b shows a cross-sectional view of the mine panel and sloping surface.
20. Check the horizontal and ground strain (grid) options. Note that when the ground strain
(grid) option is checked, the subsidence and horizontal displacement options are automati-
cally checked and disabled. The results from these calculations are necessary to calculate
ground strains.
82
Figure 4.46: Example L8: Generated elevations for the prediction points
control window.
23. Select the Graph option. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option.
24. Select the EG Index (Ground Strain), X profile and the 1300 intercept of the X profile (this
will generate a strain profile at Y=1300 on the project coordinate system. click on the Graph
button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index will be plotted on the screen.
25. Export the data to a file (Export ASCII Data XY). Name the file L8-X1300-Eg.dat.
26. Close the graph. Select the EM index (maximum horizontal strain), X profile and the 1300
intercept of the X profile. Click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation
index will be shown on the screen.
27. Import the previously saved data to the graph (Import ASCII Data XY). A second curve will
be plotted. The combined graph is shown in Figure 4.47.
28. Close the graph window.
83
Figure 4.47: Example L8: Comparison of ground and horizontal strain transverse profiles
29. Repeat the procedure just described and compare the maximum horizontal and ground strain
profiles for a Y profile at intercept of 500 ft (at the axis of symmetry of the longwall panel)
30. The combined graph is shown in Figure 4.48.
84
Figure 4.48: Example L8: Comparison of ground and horizontal strain longitudinal profiles
85
4.13 Example L9: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Strain
Contours
This example is based on the example presented in section 4.12 and highlights the difference be-
tween the horizontal and ground strains calculated over an extracted area. As already mentioned
in section 4.1, ground strain is the strain experienced on the ground surface taking into account
original ground slopes. Obviously ground strains and horizontal strains are the same when there
are no elevation differences in the original topography (flat surface). It should also be emphasized
that in both cases the program calculates the strains on the surface and not the strains on a structure
located on the surface.
To run this example as described here, Surfer 8 or higher should be installed. Note that in 64
bit systems Surfer should be installed as a 32 bit application.
Instructions


86
9. Enter the input parameters for the grid points (to cover the south side of the panel) as follows:

• maximum northing = +1500 ft
10. Click on the Set Individual Point Elevations check box.
11. Click on the Generate command button. This function allows the user to calculate grid point
elevations on a tilted plane (Figure 4.45).
12. Enter the input parameters for the plane as follows:

• plane direction = 90 deg (directions are given as angles counterclockwise from the pos-
itive X-axis)
• plane slope = 10 deg
13. Click on the Generate command button. Exit the Grid Plane Specification form.
14. Click on the Table command button to list the individual elevations (Figure 4.46). Exit the
Spreadsheet Editor.
20. Check the horizontal and ground strain (grid) options. Note that when the ground strain
(grid) option is checked, the subsidence and horizontal displacement options are automati-
cally checked and disabled. The results from these calculations are necessary to calculate
ground strains.
87
21. Select Surfer Grid for output format.
control window.
24. Select the Graph option. In the graphing module, select the Contouring option.
25. Select the Contours from Grid Files option.
26. Select Ground Strain and set the contouring options as shown in Figure 4.49.
27. Click on the Plot Contours command button.
28. Surfer will be invoked and the ground strain contours will be plotted as shown in Figure 4.50.
29. Return to the Graf module (Surfer may be minimized or closed).
30. Select Contour based on Damage Thresholds and Specify Damage Thresholds. Keep the
value of 1.5 millistrains (Figure 4.51). Click on the Plot Contours command button.
31. Surfer will be invoked and the ground strain contours at 1.5 millistrains will be plotted. In
addition color hatch patterns will be created, delineating the areas where compression or
tension exceeds this value. Results are shown in Figure 4.52.
32. Repeat the same procedure for plotting horizontal strains. Results are shown in Figure 4.53.
By comparing the two figures, the differences can easily be observed with respect to the
extent of the high compression or high tension zone in each case.
88
Figure 4.49: Example L9: Contouring options
Figure 4.50: Example L9: Ground strain contours
89
Figure 4.51: Example L9: Contouring options with threshold values
Figure 4.52: Example L9: Ground strain threshold contours
90
Figure 4.53: Example L9: Horizontal strain threshold contours
91
4.14 Example L10: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Subsi-
dence Profiles
Instructions

• select Polygonal mine plan
• select Points on a grid
700 ft
45
°
ft
0 00
60
2
0
ft
950 ft
Figure 4.54: Example L10: View of mine plan and point grid
92
Figure 4.55: Example L10: Parcel management for polygonal mineplans
5. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option and enter the coordinates for the panel. The panel dimen-
sions are 600 × 2000 ft, the azimuth of the long axis is +45o to the north (rotation of the
panel is relative to point (x, y)=(0,1000)), the elevation is 0 ft, and the extraction thickness is
6 ft). The coordinates of the panel corners are given below assuming that the center of panel
is at 0,0. Alternatively, the parcel may be defined in AutoCAD and imported to SDPS:
• enter the data for the first point: Easting (X) = 505.03 ft, Northing (Y) = -919.24 ft,
Elevation = 0 ft, Extraction Thickness = 6 ft (Figure 4.55)
• enter the data for the second point (in a counter-clockwise direction): Easting = 80.76 ft,
Northing = -494.97 ft, Elevation = 0 ft, Extraction Thickness = 6 ft
• enter the data for the third point: Easting = 1494.97 ft, Northing = 919.24 ft, Elevation
= 0 ft, Extraction Thickness = 6 ft
• enter the data for the fourth point: Easting = 1919.24 ft, Northing = 494.97 ft, Elevation
= 0 ft, Extraction Thickness = 6 ft
93

• average point elevation = 0 ft (individual point elevations will be generated at a subse-
quent step)
11. Select the Set Individual Point Elevations option.
12. Click on the Generate button to generate elevations for points on a sloping plane (Figure
4.56).

• Plane Direction = 90o (the plane direction is measured from the positive X-Axis in a
counter clockwise direction, i.e., a direction of 0o , will generate a plane striking East-
West, dipping to the North)
• Plane Slope = 10o
14. Click on the Generate button to generate elevations for points on a sloping plane.
15. Click on the Close button to accept the data and close the window.
16. Click on the Table button to view the individual point elevations in spreadsheet format (Figure
4.57). Note that this button is active only if the respective option is enabled under the Utilities
- Options menu item.
17. Individual elevations may be edited if needed. Close the spreadsheet window.
94
Figure 4.56: Example L10: Polygonal mineplan parcel management
control window.
26. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option. Select the index to view (e.g.,
subsidence). Specific sections along the X or Y axis can be selected. By default the X section
is selected, i.e., to create profiles along the X axis (Figure 4.22).
27. Click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index will be plotted
on the screen. Figure 4.58 shows three transverse subsidence profiles at Y=−900, Y=−950
and Y=−1000 ft superimposed on the same graph. Similar graphs can be generated for other
indices in the X- or Y- directions.
28. Close the plot window. Close the 2-D window.
95
Figure 4.57: Example L10: Editing individual point elevations
96
Figure 4.58: Example L10: Transverse subsidence profiles
97
4.15 Example L11: Deformations on Sloping Terrain: Hori-
zontal Displacements
In this example the influence of sloping terrain to horizontal displacements will be demonstrated.
As an additional complication, the prediction point set will only consist of a transverse line. In
order for the program to calculate the influence of sloping terrain, a surface grid file needs to be
loaded (in addition to the definition of prediction points) that will represent the surface. For this
example, this surface grid file will be generated by SDPS, and loaded in a separate step. For an
actual application this grid file will need to be generated by a gridding program such as Carlson
Software or Surfer utilizing the actual surface contours. It is important that the grid point spacing
is similar to the prediction point spacing. The grid should be extended to cover all prediction points
for which a horizontal displacement adjustment is needed.
Instructions

• select Rectangular mine plan
• select Scattered Points
Figure 4.59: Example L11: View of mine plan and point grid
98
• slope adjustment factor = 0.5

• dimensions = 1000 × 2000 ft (-500 to 500 in the X direction and 0 to 2000 in the Y
direction)
8. Enter the point coordinates shown in Table 4.6 to generate a transverse monitoring line almost
at the North edge of the panel.
11. Select the Edit - Surface Grid option.

• average point elevation = 0 ft (individual point elevations will be generated at a subse-
quent step)
99
13. Click on the View button to view the prediction points.
15. Select the Set Individual Point Elevations option.
16. Click on the Generate button to generate elevations for points on a sloping plane.
• Plane Direction = 0o (the plane direction is measured from the positive X-Axis in a
counter clockwise direction, i.e., a direction of 0o , will generate a plane striking East-
West, dipping to the North)
• Plane Slope = 10o
18. Click on the Generate button to generate.
19. Click on the Close button to accept the data and close the window.
20. Click on the Table button to view the individual point elevations in spreadsheet format. Note
that this button is active only if the respective option is enabled under the Utilities - Options
menu item.
21. Individual elevations may be edited if needed. Close the spreadsheet window.
Table 4.6: Example L11: Coordinates of prediction points (in feet)
ID Easting Northing Elevation ID Easting Northing Elevation

(X) (Y) (Z) (X) (Y) (Z)
P1 -700 1000 500 P16 50 1000 500
P2 -650 1000 500 P17 100 1000 500
P3 -600 1000 500 P18 150 1000 500
P4 -550 1000 500 P19 200 1000 500
P5 -500 1000 500 P20 250 1000 500
P6 -450 1000 500 P21 300 1000 500
P7 -400 1000 500 P22 350 1000 500
P8 -350 1000 500 P23 400 1000 500
P9 -300 1000 500 P24 450 1000 500
P10 -250 1000 500 P25 550 1000 500
P12 -150 1000 500 P27 600 1000 500
P13 -100 1000 500 P28 650 1000 500
P14 -50 1000 500 P29 700 1000 500
P15 0 1000 500
100
Figure 4.60: Example L11: Calculation of surface slope for prediction points
23. Select the File - Save - Project option
24. Enter L11A as file name.
25. Select the Edit - Prediction Points option. Ensure that the All Active checkbox is checked
in the Surface Slope Data frame and then click on the Calculate based on Surf Grid button
(Figure 4.60).
26. Click on the Table button to see the results of these calculations (Figure 4.61).
28. Verify that the file prefix code is L11A and check the options shown in Figure 4.62.
control window.
32. Uncheck the Apply slope adjustment checkbox.
33. Select the File - Save As - Project option
34. Enter L11U as file name.
101
Figure 4.61: Example L11: Calculated slope parameters for prediction points
36. Verify that the file prefix code is L11U and check the options shown in Figure 4.62.
control window.
39. Select the Graph option (the graph module automatically opens the current project file).
40. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Vector Maps option. Select VM - Displacement Max-
imum as the index and click on Graph to plot the horizontal displacements vectors (Figure
4.63). All vectors are oriented along the transverse scattered points prediction line.
41. Exit the Graph window.
42. Select the File - Open Project option and select L11 which will load the project file with the
adjusted horizontal displacements.
43. Plot the horizontal displacement vectors for this data set. Horizontal vectors point downslope
(Figure 4.64).
44. A comparison of maximum horizontal displacement profiles can be easily created using the
procedure outlined in section 4.12 (Figure 4.65).
102
Figure 4.62: Example L11: Calculation Options
103
Figure 4.63: Example L11: Horizontal displacement vector plots without adjustment
Figure 4.64: Example L11: Horizontal displacement vector plots with adjustment
104
Figure 4.65: Example L11: Comparison of maximum horizontal displacement profiles
105
4.16 Example L12: Strains on Pipeline over a Longwall Panel
Instructions

• select Scattered Points
4. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option. Enter the parameters for the panel:

B z=700 ft
z=610 ft B
A
section view
4000 ft
600 ft
plan view
106
9. Enter the parameters for the prediction points as shown in Table 4.7 (these are scattered points
over the edge of the panel).
15. Check the appropriate options including the options for directional horizontal and ground
strain (along line).
control window.
18. Select the Graph option. In the graphing module, select the 2D - Cross Sections option.
Table 4.7: Example L12: Coordinates of prediction points
Number Point Easting (X) Point Northing (Y) Point Elevation (Z)
P1 0 4200 610
P2 100 4100 620
P3 200 4000 630
P4 300 3900 640
P5 400 3800 650
P6 500 3700 660
P7 600 3600 670
P8 700 3500 680
P9 800 3400 690
P10 900 3300 700
107
Figure 4.67: Example L12: Input/Modify scattered prediction points
19. Select the Ed index (directional strain) to view and click on the Graph button. A 2-D graph
of the selected deformation index will be plotted on the screen.
20. Export the data to a file. Name the file L12dir.dat.
21. Close the graph. Select the EG index (ground strain) to view and click on the Graph button.
A 2-D graph of the selected deformation index will be shown on the screen.
22. Import the previously saved data to the graph. A second curve will be plotted. The combined
graph is shown in Figure 4.68.
108
Figure 4.68: Example L12: Strains on the pipeline
109
4.17 Example L13: Ground and Directional Strains
This example highlights the difference between the maximum horizontal strains, the horizontal
strains along a line or a profile and the corresponding ground strains calculated over an extracted
area.
The mine plan and prediction profile are shown in Figure 4.69. The surface is sloping downward
towards the northeast. Profile points are set in sequence starting from the south-west towards the
north-east
The differences between these three ground deformation indices are discussed in section 4.1.
Panel characteristics are shown in Figure 4.70, while the definition of some of the prediction points
is shown in Figure 4.71. Figure 4.72 compares the maximum horizontal strain, the directional
horizontal strain and the ground strain for the above profile. Note that the strain adjustment for
ground strains depends on the strains of the neighboring points on the profile and not on the strains
of the general terrain in the area.
110
Figure 4.70: Example L13: Mine plan definition
111
Figure 4.71: Example L13: Definition of prediction points
Figure 4.72: Example L13: Strain Comparison
112
4.18 Example L14: Surface Deformations due to Multiple Seam
Mining
Instructions
2. Use default subsidence parameters and influence angle
3. Define two rectangular parcels with dimensions 600 × 4000 ft.
4. Position parcels so that they overlap by 200 ft along the x-axis and that they are offset by
400 ft along the y-axis (Figure 4.73).
5. Define the elevation of the bottom parcel as 0 ft.
6. Define the elevation of the top parcel as 200 ft.
7. Define the thickness for both seams as 5 ft.
200 ft
600 ft
4000 ft
600 ft
4000 ft
400 ft
1300 ft
400
113
Figure 4.74: Example L14: Subsidence contours
8. Define the supercritical subsidence value for both seams as 39.5% (this value may be auto-
matically calculated using the default value for %HR=50%).
9. Define the prediction point datum at +600 ft.
10. Define a grid of points overlapping both parcels with a cell size of 100 ft (Figure 4.73).
11. Save the project and calculate deformations.
12. Plot subsidence contours (Figure 4.74).
114
4.19 Example L15: Deformations over a Room-and-Pillar Sec-
tion (A)
(In this example it is assumed that the user is familiar with AutoCAD terminology and functions.)
Instructions
1. Digitize the mine plan and surface points in AutoCAD (Figure 4.75). Digitize the pillars and
panel boundaries as polylines. Place all pillars in layer PILLARS, the panel boundary in layer
PANELS and the surface points in layer POINTS. Elevations for all entities may be entered.
Also, please note that it is recommended that all polylines are digitized in a counter-clockwise
fashion.
2. Export all entities in DXF format.
3. Exit AutoCAD.
5. Use default subsidence parameters and influence angle.
6. Select the File - Import SDPS Components option. Import the mine plan and prediction points
in two steps (Figure 4.76). Ensure that default layer values for pillars, panels and points are
PILLARS, PANELS and POINTS respectively.
100 ft
Key
solid pillar
surface points
115
7. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option and view the mine plan and prediction points (Figure 4.75).
11. Allow the program to check the model for clockwise parcels.
control window.
13. Select the Graph option and plot the results.
Optionally, the user can import the panels and points directly from the AutoCAD DWG file.
For this option to work, AutoCAD 2000 or higher should be installed on the same computer as
SDPS (see section D.4 for issues related to the installed version of AutoCAD). To accomplish this,
follow these steps:
2. Use default subsidence parameters and influence angle.
3. Select the File - Import SDPS components option. Select the AutoCAD DWG tab and click
on Import from AutoCAD. Specify the name for the DWG file and select the layer names for
panels, pillars and points.
4. When the mine plan and prediction points have been imported go to step 5 above.
116
Figure 4.76: Example L15: Importing from a DXF file
117
4.20 Example L16: Deformations over a Room-and-Pillar Sec-
tion (B)
Description
This example represents an actual room-and-pillar case study monitored by Virginia Polytechnic
Institute and State University, identified as RUVAVT2. It was selected due to its complicated min-
ing geometry and unique, as well as highly variable, mining and geological parameters. In this
particular mine, the amount of hardrock ranged from 40% to 80%, the overburden was extremely
shallow (average depth 365 feet), and the extraction method produced a highly irregular excavation
geometry, since pillars were often left in place in order to combat ground control problems.
Subsidence predictions for such a case study, using a general method based on average field
values, will not yield accurate results. However, the prediction methods can be modified by adjust-
ing the empirical parameters used to calculate subsidence and strain so that the predicted profiles
are forced to fit the measured profiles (VPI&SU 1987). Thus, the general prediction method can be
transformed to a site−specific prediction model for a particular case study. This was accomplished
by applying the influence function method and employing a trial and error procedure in order to
calculate the values for the tangent of the influence angle and the strain coefficient for the particular
case study. The input parameters shown in Table 4.8 correspond to those that produced the best
match between measured and calculated subsidence and strain profiles.
Table 4.8: Example L16: Input parameters
Excavation Data Smax Elevation Extraction Extraction Subsidence

Parcel Points (ft) (ft) Thickness (ft) Ratio (%) Factor (%)
1 32 2.10 2,400 5 85% 42
2 6 1.85 2,400 5 70% 29
3 8 1.05 2,400 5 50% 21
4* 10 1.85 2,400 5 70% −13 *
5* 4 0 2,400 5 0 −42 *
6* 4 0 2,400 5 0 −42 *
(*) Negative subsidence factors describe the effect of the remnant pillars. This is the result of
assigning subsidence factors (positive) to parcels characterized as pillars.
Grid of Prediction Points Value Empirical Parameters Value
Minimum easting (ft) −900 Tangent of influence angle 4.29
Maximum easting (ft) 1200 Strain coefficient 0.12
Cell size in the X-direction (ft) 50 Edge effect offset (ft) ** 73
Minimum northing (ft) −900
Maximum northing (ft) 400
Cell size in the Y-direction (ft) 50
Average surface elevation (ft) 2765 (**) conservative
118
Parameters
The mine plan for this case study is shown in Figure 4.77. Before entering the mine plan data
into the influence function program, a decision was made with respect to the most appropriate
method to represent the mine plan in a digital form. Since the mine plan could be divided into
areas of relatively uniform extraction, it was decided that it would be much quicker, without loss
of accuracy in the predictions, to represent the mine plan as a set of six (6) parcels. Three (1-3)
of these represent extracted areas, while the remaining three (4-6) represent pillars or pillar areas.
Using this procedure, one can avoid entering the coordinates of each individual pillar into the mine
plan. Once the excavated area was identified on the mine map, the outer boundaries of that area
were modified by the edge effect offset before the parcel coordinates were entered into the program.
The mine plan points, prediction point data, and the empirical parameters used in this example are
summarized in Table 4.8.
The empirical parameters for this example were obtained as follows:
• The edge effect offset was calculated using the conservative line of Figure 4.8 for W/h = 1.2.
Thus d = 0.2 × 365 = 73 ft.
• The default value for the tangent of the influence angle was selected as the initial value. The
influence function program was executed and the predicted subsidence values were compared
to the measured data. Subsequently, the initial value was modified until a satisfactory match
between the measured and predicted subsidence values was obtained.
• The default value for the strain coefficient was selected as the initial value. The influence
function program was executed and the predicted strain values were compared to the mea-
sured data. Subsequently, the initial value was modified until a satisfactory match between
the measured and predicted strain values was obtained.
The subsidence factors were calculated as follows:
• 40%HR, high extraction room-and-pillar => subs.factor = 42%
• 40%HR, 70% extraction room-and-pillar => subs.factor = 42% × 0.7 = 29%
• 40%HR, 50% extraction room-and-pillar => subs.factor = 42% × 0.5 = 21%
Notes
• The edge effect offset value was not modified, since a good match was obtained by manipu-
lating the influence angle. In other case studies, manipulation of the edge effect offset may
be necessary.
• The extraction ratios given for each parcel are the average ratios measured for the corre-
sponding parcels.
• The subsidence factors for pillars are negative values and are calculated as a percentage of
the supercritical subsidence factor based on the remaining portion of the pillar.
119
The influence function program was setup for polygonal parcels and points on a grid. For
simplicity a local coordinate system was selected with the origin in the middle of the panel. The
mine plan and prediction point coordinates are detailed in Tables 4.8, 4.9, 4.10, 4.11 and 4.12. Note
that all coordinates are given in feet.
pt #234
200 ft
pt #186
pt #233
pt #286
Key solid pillar

partially extracted pillar
totally extracted pillar
surface points
1-6 parcel numbers
Figure 4.77: Example L16: Mine plan and parcel layout
120
Table 4.9: Example L16: Mine plan coordinates
MINE PLAN DATA

Polygonal Mine Plan
Total Parcels: 6
Parcel No: 1 -> Points: 32 Status: Active Panel
Point No Easting Northing Seam Extraction Subs.
Elevation Thickness Factor
3.000 806.54 -258.31 2425.00 5.00 42.00
4.000 637.79 -159.98 2415.00 5.00 42.00
5.000 486.75 64.68 2405.00 5.00 42.00
6.000 487.98 163.35 2400.00 5.00 42.00
7.000 392.82 167.22 2400.00 5.00 42.00
8.000 391.41 139.84 2400.00 5.00 42.00
9.000 133.76 89.74 2390.00 5.00 42.00
10.000 130.54 175.49 2390.00 5.00 42.00
11.000 -286.65 183.04 2380.00 5.00 42.00
12.000 -290.27 123.51 2380.00 5.00 42.00
13.000 -360.26 120.56 2380.00 5.00 42.00
14.000 -360.31 -89.85 2380.00 5.00 42.00
15.000 -295.96 -92.80 2380.00 5.00 42.00
16.000 -286.92 -650.15 2390.00 5.00 42.00
17.000 -214.77 -653.62 2390.00 5.00 42.00
18.000 -212.37 -692.75 2390.00 5.00 42.00
19.000 -157.89 -653.75 2395.00 5.00 42.00
20.000 -9.88 -654.90 2400.00 5.00 42.00
21.000 -16.37 -588.94 2400.00 5.00 42.00
22.000 134.34 -591.53 2410.00 5.00 42.00
23.000 133.03 -537.35 2410.00 5.00 42.00
24.000 63.49 -471.10 2410.00 5.00 42.00
25.000 74.61 -178.74 2410.00 5.00 42.00
26.000 212.24 -183.73 2410.00 5.00 42.00
27.000 210.40 -45.24 2400.00 5.00 42.00
28.000 238.25 -2.80 2400.00 5.00 42.00
29.000 260.97 27.45 2400.00 5.00 42.00
30.000 314.29 21.93 2400.00 5.00 42.00
31.000 309.91 115.94 2395.00 5.00 42.00
32.000 419.47 112.37 2400.00 5.00 42.00
33.000 421.44 -229.67 2420.00 5.00 42.00
34.000 778.03 -300.05 2430.00 5.00 42.00

35.000 417.98 -48.65 2405.00 5.00 29.00
36.000 420.86 113.02 2400.00 5.00 29.00
37.000 313.33 115.85 2395.00 5.00 29.00
38.000 313.57 20.58 2400.00 5.00 29.00
39.000 260.22 24.73 2400.00 5.00 29.00
40.000 211.09 -45.26 2400.00 5.00 29.00
121
Table 4.10: Example L16: Mine plan coordinates, continued

41.000 419.33 -231.67 2420.00 5.00 21.00
42.000 417.94 -50.02 2405.00 5.00 21.00
43.000 211.77 -45.28 2400.00 5.00 21.00
44.000 213.59 -184.45 2410.00 5.00 21.00
45.000 75.26 -180.13 2410.00 5.00 21.00
46.000 68.56 -304.69 2410.00 5.00 21.00
47.000 337.84 -306.98 2415.00 5.00 21.00
48.000 338.21 -215.15 2415.00 5.00 21.00
Parcel No: 4 -> Points: 10 Status: Active Pillar

49.000 -89.44 98.35 2390.00 5.00 -13.00
50.000 -141.49 99.72 2390.00 5.00 -13.00
51.000 -148.07 -540.92 2400.00 5.00 -13.00
52.000 -209.83 -544.09 2400.00 5.00 -13.00
53.000 -207.53 -638.73 2390.00 5.00 -13.00
54.000 -105.39 -638.00 2395.00 5.00 -13.00
55.000 -107.91 -421.35 2400.00 5.00 -13.00
56.000 63.19 -404.61 2410.00 5.00 -13.00
57.000 61.87 -376.48 2410.00 5.00 -13.00
58.000 -110.74 -320.53 2400.00 5.00 -13.00

59.000 120.82 92.82 2390.00 5.00 -42.00
60.000 74.95 94.71 2390.00 5.00 -42.00
61.000 76.40 45.33 2390.00 5.00 -42.00
62.000 126.43 45.38 2390.00 5.00 -42.00

63.000 189.84 32.75 2395.00 5.00 -42.00
64.000 150.24 38.59 2395.00 5.00 -42.00
65.000 143.12 -23.59 2395.00 5.00 -42.00
66.000 191.66 -28.30 2395.00 5.00 -42.00
122
Table 4.11: Example L16: Prediction points coordinates
Scattered Points
Transverse Profile
Point No Easting Northing Elevation Point No Easting Northing Elevation
186 575.02 -0.15 2834.26 211 -49.77 -0.29 2791.73
187 549.91 -0.26 2836.55 212 -75.64 0.39 2787.67
188 525.11 -0.21 2835.44 213 -99.67 0.02 2783.61
189 500.01 -0.16 2832.53 214 -125.33 -0.31 2778.05
190 475.31 -0.18 2829.46 215 -149.89 -0.08 2774.32
191 450.27 -0.12 2826.09 216 -174.94 -0.18 2770.75
192 424.20 -0.11 2822.94 217 -199.88 -0.16 2768.04
193 400.25 -0.02 2820.42 218 -225.08 -0.17 2765.08
194 375.08 -0.15 2819.67 219 -249.76 -0.07 2761.25
195 350.40 -0.19 2820.14 220 -274.85 -0.15 2758.27
196 325.24 1.13 2820.49 221 -299.87 0.05 2754.71
197 300.30 -0.22 2820.76 222 -324.94 -0.21 2750.46
198 275.31 -0.05 2821.77 223 -349.87 -0.07 2746.48
199 250.31 -0.20 2823.22 224 -374.80 -0.04 2741.49
200 225.21 -0.26 2824.45 225 -399.93 -0.18 2735.62
201 200.21 -0.15 2824.18 226 -424.20 -0.13 2733.80
202 175.25 -0.28 2822.27 227 -449.97 0.11 2726.78
203 150.21 -0.34 2819.70 228 -475.39 -0.13 2721.38
204 125.37 -0.22 2815.94 229 -500.35 -0.02 2716.60
205 100.15 -0.24 2811.96 230 -523.87 -0.89 2711.98
206 75.11 -0.17 2809.03 231 -550.09 -5.46 2706.58
207 50.10 -0.25 2805.59 232 -575.19 -6.01 2703.62
208 25.11 -0.27 2803.34 233 -599.09 -5.77 2701.52
209 -0.03 -0.13 2799.96
210 -24.95 -0.15 2797.76
123
Table 4.12: Example L16: Prediction points coordinates, continued
Scattered Points
Longitudinal Profile
Point No Easting Northing Elevation Point No Easting Northing Elevation
234 -0.15 600.43 2703.73 262 0.16 -99.65 2800.11
235 -0.33 574.67 2709.03 263 -0.50 -124.95 2798.59
236 0.10 550.01 2713.94 264 0.22 -149.87 2795.08
237 1.14 524.97 2715.99 265 0.32 -175.09 2790.60
238 0.19 499.75 2720.67 266 0.25 -199.94 2784.78
239 0.15 474.86 2724.51 267 0.27 -224.97 2779.95
240 0.15 449.95 2728.80 268 0.36 -250.05 2774.73
241 -0.61 424.80 2733.62 269 0.22 -275.50 2769.83
242 0.31 399.67 2736.40 270 0.56 -300.06 2765.09
243 -0.02 374.42 2738.85 271 -0.85 -324.72 2758.94
244 0.16 349.50 2741.92 272 0.34 -350.12 2754.21
245 -0.03 323.58 2746.09 273 0.49 -375.02 2758.21
246 -0.08 299.79 2747.68 274 0.55 -399.95 2764.05
247 0.01 275.07 2750.19 275 0.25 -425.13 2771.88
248 0.40 249.04 2754.17 276 0.66 -450.22 2776.86
249 0.15 224.26 2758.77 277 0.49 -475.36 2780.58
250 0.27 199.84 2767.18 278 0.33 -500.18 2787.56
251 0.03 175.10 2770.00 279 -0.06 -525.02 2794.43
252 0.28 149.94 2770.86 280 0.46 -550.19 2797.32
253 0.30 124.84 2770.91 281 0.57 -575.08 2792.31
254 0.29 99.98 2775.58 282 0.43 -599.91 2784.80
255 0.25 75.03 2784.12 283 0.45 -625.22 2777.68
256 -0.04 49.86 2789.90 284 0.51 -650.37 2769.98
257 0.36 26.41 2798.08 285 0.48 -675.02 2761.06
258 -0.04 -0.13 2799.96 286 0.57 -700.41 2749.46
259 0.20 -25.24 2802.69
260 0.21 -45.09 2801.82
261 0.07 -75.01 2802.35
124
Distance from center line
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600

1.0
0.5
0.0
Subsidence (ft)
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5 Fitted Profile

Measured Profile
-3.0
Figure 4.78: Example L16: Comparison of transverse subsidence profiles, (points 233-186)
Figure 4.78 compares the fitted and measured subsidence profiles, while Figure 4.79 compares
the fitted and measured strain profiles, in the transverse direction. Figures 4.80 and 4.81 show
corresponding comparisons in the longitudinal direction. Figure 4.82 presents subsidence contours
over the affected area, while Figure 4.83 presents a three-dimensional projection of the subsidence
trough over that area. Figure 4.84 presents the corresponding strain contours.
Notes
• Subsidence and maximum strain contouring was accomplished using third party contouring
packages.
• Although SDPS features a graphing program, the profiles shown above were also plotted
using third party plotting packages.
125
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600

8.0
6.0
4.0
Subsidence (ft)
2.0
0.0
-2.0
-4.0
-6.0 Fitted Profile

Measured Profile
-8.0
Figure 4.79: Example L16: Comparison of transverse strain profiles, (points 233-186)
-700 -600 -500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
1.0
0.5
0.0
Subsidence (ft)
-0.5
-1.0
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5 Fitted Profile

Measured Profile
-3.0
Figure 4.80: Example L16: Comparison of longitudinal subsidence profiles (points 286-234)
126
-700 -600 -500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
Strain (1/1000)
1.0
0.0
-1.0
-2.0
-3.0
-4.0 Fitted Profile

Measured Profile
-5.0
Figure 4.81: Example L16: Comparison of longitudinal strain profiles (points 286-234)
Figure 4.82: Example L16: Subsidence contours
127
3-D Subsidence Projection
y x
Figure 4.83: Example L16: Subsidence orthographic projection
Figure 4.84: Example L16: Maximum strain contours
128
4.21 Example L17: Deformations over Longwall Panels
(In this example it is assumed that the user is familiar with AutoCAD and Carlson Software (for-
merly SurvCADD) functions. Note that although currently Carlson Software supports both Auto-
CAD and IntelliCAD, SDPS only supports AutoCAD.)
Instructions
1. Digitize the mine plan in AutoCAD (Figure 4.85). Digitize the pillars and panel boundaries
as polylines. Place all pillars in layer PILLARS, the panel boundaries in layer PANELS and
the surface points in layer POINTS. Elevations for all entities may be entered. Also, please
note that it is recommended that all polylines are digitized in a counter-clockwise fashion.
Export all entities in DXF format.
Figure 4.85: Example L17: Mine plan
129
Figure 4.86: Example L17: Importing prediction points from Carlson Software
2. Load the surface contour lines (surface topography) in AutoCAD.
3. Create a 3D grid in Carlson Software and save to a file (*.GRD).
4. Exit AutoCAD.
6. Select the File - Import SDPS Components option. Import the mine plan. Ensure that the
default layer names for pillars and panels are PILLARS and PANELS respectively.
7. Import the prediction points from the Carlson Software grid file. This is an one-step proce-
dure and no parameters are needed (Figure 4.86).
8. Select the Edit - Mine Plan option and View the mine plan (Figure 4.85) and prediction points
(Figure 4.87). Note that the mine plan shown in Figure 4.85 is incomplete in the sense that
the bounding line for the pillars is missing.
9. Select the Edit - Prediction Points option and click on the Table button to view the data
in spreadsheet format (Figure 4.88) and verify that prediction point elevations are imported
properly.
10. Select the File - Save Project option and save the project.
130
Figure 4.87: Example L17: Partial plan view of mine plan and prediction points
13. Allow the program to check the model for clockwise parcels.
control window.
15. Select the Graph option and plot the results.
131
Figure 4.88: Example L17: Editing the surface prediction points in the sheet editor
132
4.22 Example L18: Subsidence Calibration (A)
Description
In this case study, the quality of the data was excellent, i.e., mine plan, point locations, and sur-
veyed information. The case study pertains to the Deer Creek Mine in Utah and all the subsidence
information has already been published (Algaier 1982, 1988).
1. The mine plan was scanned using a desktop scanner.
2. The scanned image was imported into AutoCAD and appropriately scaled.
3. The panels were digitized on top of this image to create the input parameters for SDPS. The
digitized mine plan is shown in Figure 4.89.
4. The mine plan and prediction points were imported into SDPS (Figure 4.90 and Figure 4.91).
5. The project was displayed and checked. Figure 4.92 shows the digitized C line for panel 5E.
6. The panel sides on which edge effect offset will be applied were defined for Panel 5E (top
panel Figure 4.92) through the Edge Effect Management tab (Figure 4.93).
7. The extraction thickness, vertex elevation and supercritical subsidence factor overburden
distance were keyed-in manually (Figure 4.94).
8. The measured subsidence values were then entered for each prediction point (Figure 4.95).
Figure 4.89: Example L18: Digitized panels on scanned mine plan image (scanned mine map after Algaier,
1982)
133
Figure 4.90: Example L18: Importing from AutoCAD (Step 1/2)
Figure 4.91: Example L18: Importing from AutoCAD (Step 2/2)
134
Figure 4.92: Example L18: Mine plan and prediction points as imported into SDPS
Figure 4.93: Example L18: Edge effect management for polygonal mine plan (definition of edge effect on
west side of panel)
135
Figure 4.94: Example L18: Manual entry of extraction thickness, vertex elevation and supercritical subsi-
dence factor
Figure 4.95: Example L18: Manual entry of measured subsidence values
136
Figure 4.96: Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; adjusting the range for the influence
angle
9. The calibration routine was then executed for various parameter ranges, each time narrow-
ing down the active range of the influence angle (tanβ), the supercritical subsidence factor
(Smax), the edge effect offset distance, etc. (Figure 4.96, Figure 4.97, Figure 4.98). The
number at the bottom left shows the number of iterations.
10. After each calibration run, results were checked using the View Result Summary option (Fig-
ure 4.96). Results rank the solutions by the least percent error (Figure 4.99). The percent
error (P E) is an indication of how well the predicted curve fits the measured and can be
calculated by: ∑
|(measured − calculated)|
PE = ∑ × 100 (4.12)
|(measured)|
11. Using the Graph option, a graph is created showing the predicted versus the measured profile,
for each solution, starting from the best ranked solution (Figure 4.100).
12. This procedure can be repeated until the user is satisfied with the results.
13. As it can be observed from Figure 4.100 the fit between predicted and measured is pretty good
and thus, the subsidence parameters used may be considered representative of that panel or
mine.
137
Figure 4.97: Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; adjusting the range for the subsidence
factor
Notes
In order to run calibrations, the calibration feature should be enabled:
• Select the Utilities - Options menu option.
• Enable (if not already enabled) the Enable Subsidence/Strain Calibration under the Advanced
Options tab.
138
Figure 4.98: Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; adjusting the range for the edge effect
offset
Figure 4.99: Example L18: Calibration based on subsidence profile; calibration results
139
Figure 4.100: Example L18: Best ranked fit for measured and predicted profiles
140
4.23 Example L19: Subsidence Calibration (B)
Another typical processing sequence for the York Canyon Mine in New Mexico is given below
(Gentry and Abel, 1977). In this example the mine plan and prediction points have been digitized
and imported into SDPS. Before invoking the calibration procedure, it is recommended that the
surface deformations are calculated using default regional parameters to ensure that there are no
logical errors.
Instructions
1. The mine plan and prediction points were digitized from existing maps (Figure 4.101) and
imported into the Influence Function.
2. The project was displayed and checked (Figure 4.102).
3. Measured values for surface movements where entered in the prediction points form (Figure
4.103).
4. Calculate surface deformations using default regional parameters.
5. Select the Calculate - Calibration for Subsidence menu item (Figure 4.104).
Figure 4.101: Example L19: Image of scanned mine plan and prediction points
141
Figure 4.102: Example L19: Mine plan and prediction points as imported into SDPS
Figure 4.103: Example L19: Manual entry of measured subsidence values
6. Select the range for the tangent of the influence angle, the range of the subsidence factor
(Figure 4.105), and the range for the edge effect offset (Figure 4.106), under the respective
tabs. Make sure that the do not change check box or radio button is not enabled.
7. Select the appropriate options (Figure 4.107).
142
Figure 4.104: Example L19: Subsidence calibration options (1/5)
8. Click on the Run Calibration command button.
9. The solution module will invoked and the values of the tangent of the influence angle and of
the subsidence factor will be calculated for all cases. The values that minimize the total error
between the predicted and measured subsidence values will be suggested as the site specific
values.
10. The optimum parameter values will appear in the Results tab (Figure 4.108).
11. Click on the Graph command button, to plot the measured and predicted subsidence values
and visually inspect the match.
12. View and/or print the summary and detailed reports for the calibration procedure.
143
144
145
4.24 Example L20: Subsidence Calibration (C)
Description
A third typical processing sequence for a case study is given below. As it will be evident from
the results obtained, this case study was especially chosen because data may have included some
surveying errors or erroneous mine plan information. This case study pertains to the Price River #3
Mine in Utah and all the subsidence information for this mine has been published as well (Fejes,
1986).
4. The mine plan and prediction points were imported into SDPS (Figure 4.110).
5. The edge effect offset was defined for each extracted panel (Figure 4.111).
6. After keying in the remaining data, the calibration was run for various parameter ranges, as
already explained in the previous example and similar results were obtained.
7. The best fit is shown in Figure 4.112. Although there is a good match between predicted and
measured, the following points should be noted:
8. The measured subsidence on the right side of the profile, does not reach zero. This is most
probably attributed to a base line survey that was established after subsidence was initiated
Figure 4.109: Example L20: Digitized panels on scanned mine plan image (scanned mine map after Fejes,
1986)
146
Figure 4.110: Example L20: Imported mine plan to SDPS
Figure 4.111: Example L20: Definition of edge effect offset on selected sides of each panel
9. The measured subsidence value at the lowest point of the profile, is not a typical value. This
can be due to a topo error, or a local extraction larger than the average.
147
Figure 4.112: Example L20: Best fit between measured and predicted subsidence profiles
148
4.25 Example L21: Strain Calibration
Description
The processing sequence for the case study below pertains to strain calibration. This case study
refers to the Old Ben #24 Mine, Longwall panel 1, in Illinois, and all the subsidence information
for this mine is available in the literature (O’Rourke and Turner 1979, 1981).
4. The mine plan and prediction points were imported into SDPS.
5. The extensometer strain data were extracted from the graph in Figure 4.114.
6. The mine plan information, prediction point information and strain data were imported into
SDPS (see previous examples).
7. The strain calibration was then run by clicking on the Run Calibration command button on
the Strain Calibration Options window (Figure 4.115) and the best fit graph is shown in
Figure 4.116. Figure 4.117 presents a text file with the iteration results ranked by the lowest
percent error.
Although there is a good match between predicted and measured strain, the following points
should be noted:
• There is a sudden drop in the measured strains around the 200 ft mark of the graph. This
may be attributed to a survey error or to a monument movement that is not related to the
subsidence mechanism.
• The compressional part of the curve and the location of the inflection point do not show such
deviations
149
Figure 4.113: Example L21: Mine plan and prediction points (O’Rourke and Turner 1979, 1981)
Figure 4.114: Example L21: Strain data (O’Rourke and Turner 1979, 1981)
150
Figure 4.115: Example L21: Strain calibration window
Figure 4.116: Example L21: Best fit between measured and predicted strain profiles
151
Figure 4.117: Example L21: Strain calibration results
152
4.26 Example L22: Subsidence Development
Description
This example details the steps required to calculate ground deformation development curves, i.e.,
the deformations that a point on the surface experiences as a longwall mine passes under the point.
This option works only with rectangular mine plans. The Dynamic Analysis and Dynamic Devel-
opment options should be enabled through the Utilities-Options-Advance Options form.
1. Select Rectangular Mine Plan and Scattered Points.
2. Define a longwall panel with dimensions 2000x1000 ft. Panel coordinates should be speci-
fied in a way that the long axis (2000 ft) lies in the West-East direction.
3. Set the Subsidence Factor = 40
4. Set the Extraction Thickness = 5 ft.
5. Click on the Parcel Active for Dynamic Analysis check box.
6. Click on the Edge Effect Management Enabled check box.
7. Access the Edge Effect Management tab.
8. Set the Percent Hardrock to 50 and the Set Parcel Depth to 500 ft.
9. Select the Automatic Adjustment option and Conservative estimate.
10. Set the East boundary to Rigid. Set all other boundaries to yielding. The adjusted boundary
should be calculated equal to 1900 ft.
11. Access the Dynamic Options tab.
12. Set the East Border Solution Increment = 50 ft, the Number of Increments = 20 and the Mean
Extraction Rate = 20 ft/day; this instructs the program to simulate extraction for another
50x20=1000 ft extending east of the currently defined east border of the panel (Figure 4.118).
13. Click on the Animate Extraction button to see a simple animation of the extraction.
14. Exit the Mine Plan form. Enter the Prediction Point form.
15. Set a point over the east panel boundary on the symmetry axis of the panel, e.g., at x=2500 ft
and y=500 ft with an elevation of 500 ft.
16. Select Calculate-Development of Deformations (Figure 4.119).
17. Click on the Calculate button. Close the calculation window when finished.
18. Verify that Set Distance in Terms of Depth is not checked.
19. Verify that Set Deformations as Ratio to Maximum is not checked.
153
Figure 4.118: Example L22: Setting the panel advance parameters
20. Verify that Compare to Final Deformations is checked.
21. Click on the Graph button. A plot of the subsidence experienced by a single point as the
longwall travels underneath it will be shown (Figure 4.120).
22. Click on the Next Index button to generate a graph for dynamic slope for the same point
(Figure 4.121).
23. Click again for horizontal displacement, curvature and horizontal strain (Figure 4.122).
24. For further practise, repeat procedure for different panel advance rates and/or more surface
points, located on the symmetry axis, further to the north.
154
Figure 4.119: Example L22: Calculation of ground deformation dynamic curves
Figure 4.120: Example L22: Dynamic and final subsidence
155
Figure 4.121: Example L22: Dynamic and final slope
Figure 4.122: Example L22: Dynamic and final horizontal strain
156
4.27 Example L23: Long-Term Risk Analysis (A)
Description
This example details the steps required to calculate ground deformation values for various long-
term pillar failure scenarios. This procedure applies only to room-and-pillar layouts, where failure
may occur after mining is completed. To utilize this procedure, two parameters should be defined:
1. The user should assign a failure risk factor to each pillar. The value of the pillar failure
risk factor may be equal to the value of a traditional stability factor, or an ARMPS/ALPS
stability factor appropriately modified or a factor based entirely on engineering judgement.
The utility of the failure risk factor is that the user can allow specific areas of the mine to
fail based on a range of values of the assigned failure risk factors and examine / compare the
different scenarios with respect to their impact on the surface. Hence, pillars with similar
behavior/characteristics should be assigned a similar failure risk factor.
2. When pillars fail, the loose material occupies the space between entries. In a high extraction
room-and-pillar mine as shown in this example, there are no restrictions with respect to the
“degree” of pillar failure. Hence, a pillar can fail 100% and the equivalent pillar height after
failure can be 0 ft. If the pillar is assumed to fail by 50%, the equivalent pillar height is half the
extraction thickness. Note that the program does not perform any logical checks regarding
the remnant pillar height. For example, in a case of a low extraction room a pillar parcel (e.g.,
50% extraction), specifying a remnant pillar height of less than 50% of the original height is
a logical error. In other words the higher the original extraction ratio, the lower the remnant
pillar height percentage can be.
The Enable Long-Term Risk Analysis Calculations option should enabled through the Utilities-
Options-Advance Options form.
1. Select Rectangular Mine Plan and Points on a Grid.
2. Define a room-and-pillar panel with four pillars as follows:
(a) Define an extraction area (parcel) 210 × 210 ft. Set the Subsidence Factor = 40%. Set
the Extraction Thickness = 5 ft.
(b) Define three pillars 50 × 50 ft within the extraction area as shown in Figure 4.123. Set
the Subsidence Factor = 40%. Set the Extraction Thickness = 5 ft.
3. The extraction ratio for the panel can be calculated as:

( )
3 × 50 × 50
R= 1− × 100 ≃ 83% (4.13)
210 × 210
therefore the panel can be considered as a high extraction room-and-pillar panel.
4. Define a rectangular grid over the extracted area so that deformation profiles A-B, C-D, E-F
spanning the pillars can be developed (Figure 4.123). Set the average surface elevation for
the grid points = 300 ft.
157
Figure 4.123: Example L23: Room-and-pillar layout for long-term risk analysis calculations
5. Calculate surface deformations. The program will estimate deformations assuming stable
pillars.
6. Plot subsidence across line A-B. This is the expected subsidence assuming that the pillars
are stable after mining is completed. This will also serve as the base line for comparing
deformation assuming long-term pillar failure (Figure 4.124). Export the data to ASCII.
7. To estimate surface deformations under various scenarios (e.g., total collapse of all pillars,
or total collapse of one pillar at a time) the following parameters should be entered:
(a) The value of the percentage remnant pillar height should be entered for long-term risk
analysis calculations, i.e, 10% (Figure 4.125).
(b) A long-term factor should be assigned to each pillar. This number may be a relative
failure risk factor as discussed above. In this example a different failure risk factor is
assigned to each pillar, e.g., 1,2,3.
8. Invoke the long-term risk analysis calculation menu. Select the option Pillars Fail under
Worst Case Scenario as shown in Figure 4.126. Enable the option to the Calculate Deforma-
tions for Stable Pillars. Note that the option for calculating ground strain on a grid may be
disabled if prediction points are specified on a one-dimensional grid is specified. Click on
the Calculate button to calculate surface deformations.
9. Invoke the Graphing program and select 2D-Cross Sections. Surface deformation profiles
can only be plotted for the worst case scenario (Figure 4.127). Ensure that the option to Plot
Deformations for Stable Pillars is checked.
158
10. Click on the Graph button to plot surface subsidence. Two lines will be plotted. One corre-
sponding to the deformations for stable pillars (baseline) and one for the worst case scenario
(Figure 4.128). Note that the profile plotted here as baseline is the same shown in Figure
4.124 corresponding to final post mining deformations.
11. Exit the Graph program and return to the long-term risk analysis calculation menu.
12. Select the option Pillars Fail based on Pillar Failure Risk Factor and set the range for the
failure risk factors that will correspond to pillar failure. Ensure that the option to the Calculate
Deformations for Stable Pillars is enabled.
13. Click on the Calculate button to calculate surface deformations.
14. Invoke the Graphing program and select 2D-Cross Sections.
15. Select Step 1 and ensure that the option to Plot Deformations for Stable Pillars is not checked.
16. Click on the Graph button to plot surface subsidence.
17. Exit the graph form, by selecting Exit, Keep Graph from the File menu (Figure 4.129).
Alternatively, and if both the options form and the graph form can fit on your monitor side
by side, you can go to the next step without closing the graph form.
18. Select Step 2 and ensure that the option to Plot Deformations for Stable Pillars is not checked.
19. Ensure that the Maximum Curves setting is greater or equal to 4.
20. Click on the Graph button to plot surface subsidence. The graph will show three lines.
21. Exit the graph form, by selecting Exit, Keep Graph from the File menu. Alternatively, and
if both the options form and the graph form can fit on your monitor side by side, you can go
to the next step without closing the graph form.
22. Select Step 3 and ensure that the option to Plot Deformations for Stable Pillars is checked.
23. Click on the Graph button to plot surface subsidence. The graph will show four lines, i.e.,
deformations due to stable pillars and under all scenarios prescribed in the analysis (Figure
4.130).
159
Figure 4.124: Example L23: Final post mining subsidence assuming stable pillars (section A-B)
Figure 4.125: Example L23: Input long-term risk analysis parameters: Remnant pillar height as a percent
of extraction thickness and pillar failure risk factor
160
Figure 4.126: Example L23: Long-term risk analysis calculation options
161
Figure 4.127: Example L23: Options for plotting deformation profiles under long-term risk analysis
162
Figure 4.128: Example L23: Comparison of long-term deformations (worst case) to deformations due to
stable pillars
163
Figure 4.129: Example L23: Exit graph form and keep profiles
164
Figure 4.130: Example L23: Comparison of long-term deformations for all scenarios to deformations due
to stable pillars
165
4.28 Example L24: Long-Term Risk Analysis (B)
Description
In this example a long-term risk analysis is performed for the case study presented in example L15.
Figure 4.131 shows the failure risk factors assigned to each pillar. Failure risk factors range from
1 to 4. The remnant pillar height assigned to each pillar is 20%.
Figure 4.132 shows the long-term risk analysis calculation options. The parametric analysis
is prescribed to range from 1 to 3. Figure 4.133 shows the graph options set for displaying the
results. Not the setting for Axial Projection. Step 1 corresponds to scenario 1, i.e., failure of pillars
with failure risk factor = 1, Step 2 corresponds to scenario 2, i.e., failure of pillars with failure risk
factor = 2, etc. Finally Figure 4.134 presents an overlay of the four scenarios, i.e., final post mining
subsidence stable pillars), and long-term risk analysis scenarios 1,2,3 respectively.
Figure 4.131: Example L24: Room-and-pillar layout and long-term pillar failure risk factors
166
Figure 4.132: Example L24: Long-term risk analysis calculation options
167
Figure 4.133: Example L24: Graph options
168
Figure 4.134: Example L24: Comparison of long-term risk analysis scenarios
169
4.29 Example L25: Location Angles
Description
In this example the location angles of the prediction points used for subsidence calibration are
calculated. The location angle for a surface point is defined as shown Figure 4.135.
When a surface point is located within an excavated panel, the location angle is shown as “999”.
For points lying outside the panel, the distance to the panel is shown as a negative number. The
measured subsidence value is also shown and the records with a value less than the “zero” subsi-
dence value are highlighted. The records with positive measured subsidence are also highlighted.
See the discussion on the “zero” subsidence value in Section 2.2.
This option is only available through the subsidence calibration menu item as shown in Figure
4.136. The program can calculate location angles using two options:
• based on the distance of the first point in a profile from panel edge; this assumes that the
points are pretty much on a straight line and orthogonal to the panel edge.
• by specifying a panel edge as defined in the mine plan; the program then calculates the or-
Figure 4.135: Example L25: Definition of the location angle for a surface point
170
Figure 4.136: Example L25: Location angle option
thogonal distance of every point form the specified panel edge.
Figure 4.137 shows how the user can select any side side from the polygonal panel as a reference
edge for calculating the location angles of the surface points.
171
Figure 4.137: Example L25: Location angles calculated based on distance from panel edge
172
4.30 Example L26: Convert Grid to Scattered Points
Description
This step-by-step example shows how to convert a project file defined using grid points to an
equivalent project file which uses scattered points.
Instructions
• Execute the Influence Function module.
• Load the project file.
• Save the mine plan portion of the project file by selecting File - Save As - Mine Plan.
• Export the prediction points as XYZ points by selecting File - Export - Points to XYZ. Select
a filename for the prediction point file and click on the Export button.
• Create a new prediction point data set (in the existing project) by selecting File - New -
Prediction Points. This option deletes all the defined prediction point data in the project and
unlocks the prediction point type selection.
• Select File - Edit - Project Description to edit the project description and clock on Scattered
Points to specify the new type of prediction points.
• Import the exported points by selecting File - Import SDPS Components - XYZ Points.
• Save the project file under a different name.
173
174
Chapter 5
Pillar Stability Analysis Calculations
Pillar design should take into consideration the function of a pillar or a set of pillar during the
lifetime of a mining section. Since the original pillar design formulations were proposed several
decades ago, other formulations have been developed to address pillar stability. The SDPS suite
of programs, currently includes a traditional pillar stability program as well as the pillar stabil-
ity formulations developed by the USBM (now NIOSH) regarding stability of pillars in longwall
operations and stability of pillars in room and pillar retreat operations.
5.1 Overview
The pillar stability program uses data that describe mine geometry and overburden characteristics,
as well as coal pillar strength, to calculate safety factors based on four well-accepted pillar design
formulations, namely those proposed by Bieniawski, Holland, Holland-Gaddy, Obert-Duvall, and
Mark-Bieniawski.
The safety factors associated with the aforementioned pillar equations can be calculated using
the pillar tributary area concept (Figures 5.1 and 5.2). Parametric graphs for the calculated safety
factors can be generated for all formulations.
In 1966, the Pennsylvania Bituminous Mine Subsidence Act (commonly referred to as “Penn-
sylvania Law”), provided protection for certain surface structures by using an offset from the struc-
ture and a protection angle assumed to be 15o . The program can calculate the dimensions of the
protection area at seam level underneath a rectangular surface structure. Extraction within this area
should be limited if the surface structure is to be protected (Figure 5.3).
5.2 Pillar Design Equations

The goal of solid pillar design is that the pillar strength be greater than the load by a pre-determined
stability factor during all stages of mining. Researchers have compiled empirical formulae for pillar
strength and pillar load estimation methods for solid pillar design. The strength is estimated by
empirical formulae, which define strength in terms of pillar width and height, and the in situ strength
of the coal. In some formulae the strength is a function only of the width to height ratio. Pillar loads
are calculated using tributary areas and concepts of side and front load abutments given in previous
chapters. The following well-known strength formulae are included in this SDPS module:
175
tributary area
length
pillar
pillar
width
Figure 5.1: Pillar tributary area - plan view
tributary area
pillar
width
Figure 5.2: Pillar tributary area - section view
• the Bieniawski equation:

( )
w
Sp = S1 0.64 + 0.36 (5.1)
h
where:
Sp = the pillar strength (lb/in2 );
S1 = the in situ coal strength (lb/in2 ) or the strength of a 3 ft × 3 ft cube (generally accepted
as 900 psi or 6.2 MPa);
w = the pillar width (ft);
176
structure dimension surface
adjustment
protection angle
mine
level
width of
protection area
protection area
structure width
structure
length of
plan
length
view
Figure 5.3: Protection area under a surface structure
h = the pillar height (ft).
• the Holland Equation:

√
w
Sp = S1 (5.2)
h
where:
• the Holland-Gaddy Equation:

√
w
Sp = k (5.3)
h
where:
Sp = the pillar strength (lb/in2 ); √
k = the coal strength factor (psi√ in); the coal strength factor can be determined from lab-
oratory testing as k = Sc d, where Sc the unconfined √ compressive strength of a cube
of side d, or through the in situ coal strength as k = S1 min(h, 36);
177
• the Obert-Duvall equation:

( )
w
Sp = S1 0.778 + 0.222 (5.4)
h
where:
• the Mark-Bieniawski equation (Mark and Chase 1997):

( )
w w2
Sp = S1 0.64 + 0.54 − 0.18 (5.5)
h hl
where:
l = the pillar length (ft);
178
5.3 Example R1: Estimation of Pillar Safety Factors
Instructions
1. Execute the Pillar Stability Analysis Module.
2. Select the Edit - Pillar Stability option, Standard Geometry.
3. Enter the following parameters (Figure 5.4):
• average unit weight of overburden = 162 pcf

• average overburden depth = 500 ft
• pillar width = 40 ft
• pillar length = 100 ft
• pillar height = 5 ft
• opening width = 20 ft
Figure 5.4: Example R1: Pillar geometry parameters
179
• average extraction ratio = 45 % (note that the tributary area extraction ratio is automat-
ically calculated and displayed in red; for this example the average extraction ratio is
equal to 44.44%)
4. Click on the View Plan button to display a plan view of the defined mine section.
5. Click on the Pillar Strength tab of the current window (Figure 5.5).
6. Enter the value for the in situ pillar strength (e.g., 900 psi) - Mode A operation. The program
automatically calculates the corresponding laboratory uniaxial compressive strength of the
seam and the coal strength factor. The program can also calculate the in situ pillar strength
based on available laboratory data (i.e., uniaxial compressive strength of cubic specimens,
specimen size) and the pillar height (as entered in the Standard Geometry tab) - Mode B
operation. In both cases the program will calculate the coal strength factor, k, for calculating
safety factors using the Holland-Gaddy equation. If the coal strength value is know, then the
program will back calculate the in site pillar strength - Mode C operation.
7. Click on Results to view the results (Figure 5.6).
9. Select the Output - Graph - Standard Geometry menu option to select the type of graph to
plot. The user can select between six parametric graphs.
10. Select Safety factor vs Pillar width and a graph of all pillar strength formulas will be plotted
on the screen (Figure 5.7).
12. Select the File - Save menu item and save the project file.
Notes for Advanced Users

• Optionally the user can use the Edit - Pillar Stability - Advanced Geometry option and enter
the pillar geometry in terms of number of entries, center-to-center distance between entries
and center-to-center distance between cross-cuts. The results are similar but the extraction
ratio is calculated as an average on all entries.
• The range for the parametric graphs is based on a percentile maximum and minimum values
as defined in the Utilities-Options menu item.
180
Figure 5.5: Example R1: Pillar strength parameters
Figure 5.6: Example R1: Output window
181
Figure 5.7: Example R1: Parametric graph for various pillar strength formulas
182
5.4 Example R2: Estimation of the Protection Area
Instructions
1. Execute the Pillar Stability Analysis Module.
2. Select the Edit - Protection Area option.
3. Enter the following parameters (Figure 5.8):
• overburden depth = 500 ft

• structure width = 40 ft
• structure length = 50 ft
• keep the default values for the remaining parameters
4. Click on the Results button.
5. The tabulated results will appear on the screen (Figure 5.9).
Figure 5.8: Example R2: Structure and protection area geometry
183
Figure 5.9: Example R2: Protection area results
Note
The extraction area is based on the assumed maximum extraction ratio for the area under the struc-
ture; in this example, 50%. Using an appropriate seam (extraction) thickness, this can be converted
to extraction volume and tonnages.
184
Chapter 6
The ALPS Module
1
The ALPS (Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability) program is a stand alone program that was
developed by NIOSH and is freely distributed. It is included in the SDPS suite of programs to allow
direct comparisons of pillar stability calculations. The program can calculate the ALPS stability
factors, utilizing the widely accepted ALPS formulation for assessing pillar stability.
The ALPS method consists of three basic steps:
• Estimating the loading that will be applied to the pillars during all the phases of longwall
mining;
• Estimating the load-bearing capacity of the longwall pillar system, and;
• Calculating stability factors (SF) by comparing the load to the load-bearing capacity.
Since its development, the ALPS method has been verified by back-analysis of more than 100
actual mining case histories (Mark 1992). A complete discussion of the formulas used in ALPS
can be found in that reference, copies of which are available from the author.
Recent research (Mark et al. 1994) has shown that the ALPS SF used in design should be based
on the structural competence of the mine roof, measured by the Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR). A
complete description of the CMRR, including field data collection and procedures for calculating
the ratings, have been provided by Molinda and Mark (1994). Spreadsheet programs for calculating
the CMRR are also available (Riefenberg and Wuest 1994) (see also Chapter 9, starting on page
211).
Calculations are performed for two distinct modes:
• the analysis mode (or forward model)
• the sizing mode (or inverse model)
6.1 Analysis Mode

The calculation phase of ALPS consists of several simple routines which compute the development
loads, the abutment loads, the strengths and load-bearing capacities of the pillars, and the stability
1
information in this Chapter is based on the ALPS help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
185
factors. The development loads, which are present before longwall mining, are determined by the
depth of cover using the tributary area theory. Abutment loads occur as a portion of the weight
of the overburden, that had been supported by the excavated longwall panel, is transferred to the
pillars. They are determined by the depth of cover, the panel width, and the abutment angle.
ALPS calculates the unit strength of the pillars using an empirical pillar strength formula by
Bieniawski. The pillar strength is multiplied by load-bearing area and divided by the crosscut
spacing to compute the load-bearing capacity per foot of gate entry. Then the load-bearing capacity
of the longwall pillar system is obtained by summing the capacities of the individual pillars. Finally,
stability factors are obtained by dividing the system’s load-bearing capacity by the total loading.
In this mode, output consists of four (4) screens of data:
• ALPS stability factors
• Pillar load-bearing capacity
• Design loadings on pillar system (load per length of gate entry)
• Individual pillar loading

The most important output provided by ALPS in the analysis mode are the stability factors.
These are determined for five loading conditions:
• Development loading: The loading on the pillar system before any longwall retreat mining.
It is equal to the tributary area load.
• Headgate loading: The pillar loading adjacent to headgate corner of the longwall face, which
is equal to the development load plus the first front abutment.
• Bleeder loading: The loading on a pillar system adjacent to a mined-out panel, which equals
the development load plus the first side abutment.
• Tailgate loading: The loading on a double-use gate entry system when it is adjacent to the
tailgate corner of the longwall face, equal to the development load plus the first side abutment
plus the second front abutment.
• Isolated loading: The loading on a pillar system located between two mined-out panels, equal
to the development load plus two side abutments.
Since most gate entry systems are used twice, first as a headgate and then as a tailgate, the
stability factor for tailgate loading is usually employed in design. That is why the results for
tailgate loading are marked with asterisks (***) in the output (Figure 6.3). Single-use gate entries
should be designed for either headgate or bleeder loading. As already indicated, a Stability Factor
between 0.7 and 1.3 is usually appropriate for gate entries, depending on the CMRR.
The pillar load-bearing capacity screen includes the following:
• pillar width,
• width-to-height ratio,
• the unit pillar strength calculated using the Bieniawski formula, and
186
• the pillar load-bearing capacity per foot along the length of the gate entry.
The total pillar system load-bearing capacity, which is the sum of the load-bearing capacities
of the individual pillars, is the parameter that is needed to compute the SF. It is compared directly
with design loadings that are also provided.
In the analysis mode, the last output screen provides estimates of the loadings applied to the
individual pillars in the gate entry system. The initial development loadings are calculated using
tributary area theory, and the subsequent abutment loadings are added using the exponential stress
decay formula developed by Mark (1990). As noted in the output, the individual pillars loadings do
not consider load transfer due to pillar yielding. In general, if the applied stress exceeds a pillar’s
strength, load transfer may be assumed to occur. No estimates of individual pillar loads are provided
for the tailgate and isolated loading phases, because the field data available from those phases is
not sufficient for the development of general formulas.
6.2 Sizing Mode

In the sizing mode, ALPS will calculate the pillar size required to achieve desired stability factors
that are entered by the user. The user must choose a longwall pillar configuration from three options:
• a three-entry system employing equal-sized pillars;
• a three-entry system employing a large abutment pillar and a small yield pillar, (Yield-Abut-
ment, YA), and;
• a four-entry system employing a single large abutment pillar and two small yield pillars
(Yield-Abutment-Yield, YAY).
If either the YA or YAY options are chosen, ALPS requests the width of the yield pillar. In this
case the actual pillar width, rather than the center-to-center entry spacing, is required.
ALPS also requires stability factors (SF) for the sizing mode. The suggested SF depends on the
CMRR for the case being analyzed, and ranges from approximately 0.7 for strong roof (CMRR=75)
to 1.3 for weak roof (CMRR=35).
In the sizing mode, ALPS computes the pillar widths that are necessary to achieve the desired
stability factors. A secant variation of Newton’s root-solving algorithm is used to solve the follow-
ing equation, in which the pillar width is the only unknown:
0 = SF − (B/L) (6.1)
where SF is the stability factor, B is the pillar system load-bearing capacity, and L is the design
loading. The algorithm terminates when successive iterations have converged on a pillar width to
within 0.1 ft.
In this mode, output consists of four (4) screens of data:
• ALPS pillar sizing results;
• Pillar load bearing capacity;
187
• Design loadings on pillar system (load per length of gate entry);
• Individual pillar loading.
In the sizing mode, ALPS prints the pillar widths which will provide the specified stability
factors for the specified design type. The pillar lengths are also given, because ALPS will automat-
ically increase the crosscut spacing to maintain square pillars if the required pillar width exceeds
the user-specified crosscut spacing. Also, as noted on the printout, the pillar widths and lengths are
actual dimensions, not centers.
The remaining 3 screens of output data are similar to those described above for the analysis
mode.
If the CMRR is known or can be estimated, the user simply inputs the proper CMRR, and the
program returns a suggested ALPS SF using the formula:
SF = 1.76 − 0.014 × CMRR (6.2)

According to Mark et al. (1994) this equation was derived from evaluations of tailgate perfor-
mance at more than 60 U.S. longwalls.
The CMRR library is a text file that contains summaries of roof descriptions and CMRR values
obtained from 97 locations. The library helps users estimate the CMRR when data is not available,
and it allows users to check their own CMRR estimates against observations already made. More
complete descriptions of the same 97 observations may be found in the appendix to Molinda and
Mark (1994).
188
6.3 Example W1: Estimation of ALPS Stability Factors
Instructions
1. Execute the ALPS Module.
2. Select the Input - Project Parameters option.
3. Enter the following parameters for mine geometry (Figure 6.1):
• entry height = 5 ft
• depth of cover = 500 ft
• panel width = 400 ft
• entry width = 20 ft
• cross-cut spacing = 100 ft
• number of entries = 5
• center-to-center spacing for each entry = 100 ft
4. Keep the default load parameters as shown under the tab Defaults (Figure 6.2).
5. Click on the OK button to exit the parameters window.
6. Select the Output - Stability Factors (Standard Geometry) menu option.
7. The tabulated results will be displayed in a results window (Figure 6.3).
Figure 6.1: Example W1: ALPS: Input parameters
189
Figure 6.2: Example W1: ALPS: Default loading parameters
8. Close the results window.
9. Select the Output - Graph (ALPS Classic) menu option.
10. Select the SF vs Entry Height option. The graph shown in Figure 6.4 will be created. Close
the window. Select the SF vs Depth of Cover option. The graph shown in Figure 6.5 will be
created.
12. Select the File - Save menu item or click on the diskette icon on the tool bar to save the
project.
Note
The Advanced tab in Figure 6.1 allows for entering slanted crosscut entries (Figures 6.6 and 6.7).
190
Figure 6.3: Example W1: ALPS: Calculation results
Figure 6.4: Example W1: ALPS: Parametric graph of stability factors (A)
191
Figure 6.5: Example W1: ALPS: Parametric graph of stability factors (B)
Figure 6.6: Example W1: ALPS: Advanced mining geometry
192
Figure 6.7: Example W1: ALPS: Advanced mining geometry plot
193
194
Chapter 7
The ARMPS Module
7.1 Overview
1
The ARMPS (Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability) program is a stand alone program that
was developed by NIOSH and is freely distributed. It is included in the SDPS suite of programs
to allow direct comparisons of pillar stability calculations. The program can calculate the ARMPS
stability factors, utilizing the ARMPS formulation for assessing pillar stability.
Preventing pillar squeezes, massive pillar collapses, and bumps is critical to the safe and ef-
ficient retreat mining of coal. To help prevent these problems, the U.S. Bureau of Mines (now
NIOSH) developed the Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability (ARMPS) computer program.
ARMPS calculates Stability Factors (SF) based on estimates of the loads applied to, and the load
bearing capacity of pillars during retreat mining operations. The program can model the signifi-
cant features of most retreat mining layouts, including angled crosscuts, varied spacings between
entries, barrier pillars between the active section and old (side) gobs, and slab cuts in the barriers
on retreat. It also features a pillar strength formula that considers the greater strength of rectangular
pillars. The program may be used to evaluate bleeder designs as well as active workings.
A database of 160 pillar retreat case histories has been collected across the United States to
verify the program. It was found that satisfactory conditions were very rare when the ARMPS SF
was less than 0.75. Conversely, very few unsatisfactory designs were found where the ARMPS SF
was greater than 1.5.
The loadings applied to the Active Mining Zone (AMZ) include development loads, abutment
loads, and loads transferred from barrier pillars. The development loads, which are present before
retreat mining, are determined by the depth of cover using the tributary area theory. Abutment
loads occur as a result of retreat mining and gob formation. They are determined by the depth of
cover, the width of the extraction front, the gob extents, and the abutment angles. The abutment
loads are assumed to be distributed following the abutment load distribution function. Only the
portion of the front abutment load that falls within the AMZ is included in the calculation of the
SF. Loads are also applied to barrier pillars, but if the barriers are too small, there are three ways in
which loads may be transferred to the AMZ:
• A portion of the side abutment load may be transferred according to the abutment load dis-
tribution function.
1
information in this Chapter is based on the ARMPS help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
195
• If the barrier pillar yields, a portion of the side abutment load may be transferred, and;
• Front abutment loads may be transferred from yielded remnant barrier pillars inby the pillar
line.
Loadings that can occur in ARMPS are:
• Development: Loading Condition: 1, 2, 3, 4
• Front Abutment: Loading Condition: 2, 3, 4
• Side Abutments: Loading Condition: 3, 4
• Transfer from Remnant Barriers: Loading Condition: 3, 4
Stability factors are obtained by dividing the total load−bearing capacity of the AMZ by the
total load applied to it.
The next, critical step is the interpretation of the stability factor. The ARMPS method has been
verified through back analysis of pillar recovery case histories. To date, more than 200 case histories
have been obtained from 10 states, almost all from mine visits. They cover an extensive range of
geologic conditions, roof rock cavability characteristics, extraction methods, depths of cover, and
pillar geometries. Ground conditions in each case history have been categorized as being either
satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Pillar failures responsible for unsatisfactory conditions included:
• Pillar squeezes;
• Massive pillar collapses, usually accompanied by airblasts, and/or;
• Coal pillar bumps.
Current research (by NIOSH) is under way to evaluate other factors that may contribute to
satisfactory conditions when the ARMPS SF falls between 0.75 and 1.5.
196
7.2 Example S1: Estimation of ARMPS Stability Factors - De-
velopment
Instructions
1. Execute the ARMPS Module.
2. Select the Input - Project Parameters option.
3. Enter the mine geometry parameters as shown in Figure 7.1.
4. Click on the View button to plot the mine plan on the screen (Figure 7.2).
5. Keep the default load parameters (in situ coal strength, overburden unit weight, breadth of
AMZ) as shown under the tab Defaults.
6. Click on the OK button to exit the edit window.
7. Select the Output - Stability Factors menu option.
9. Select the Output - Graph menu option.
Figure 7.1: Example S1: ARMPS: Input parameters - development
197
Figure 7.2: Example S1: ARMPS: Plot of mine plan
10. Select the SF vs Entry Height option. The graph shown in Figure 7.4 will be created.
project.
198
Figure 7.3: Example S1: ARMPS: Calculation results
Figure 7.4: Example S1: ARMPS: Parametric graph of stability factors
199
7.3 Example S2: Estimation of ARMPS Stability Factors - Re-
treat
Instructions
1. Execute the ARMPS Module.
2. Follow the steps as detailed in Section 7.2 to enter the mine parameters.
3. Select the Retreat tab in the Input Parameters form (Figure 7.5).
4. Enter the parameters shown for the active gob and side gob areas.
5. Click on the View button to plot the mine plan on the screen (Figure 7.6).
6. Click on the OK button to exit the edit window.
7. Select the Output - Stability Factors menu option.
9. Select the Output - Graph menu option.
10. Select the SF vs Depth of Cover option. The graph shown in Figure 7.8 will be created. Note
that the graph has two lines, one for development and one for retreat.
Figure 7.5: Example S2: ARMPS: Input parameters- retreat
200
Figure 7.6: Example S2: ARMPS: Plot of mine plan
project.
201
Figure 7.7: Example S2: ARMPS: Calculation results
Figure 7.8: Example S2: ARMPS: Parametric graph of stability factors
202
Chapter 8
The ARMPS-HWM Module
8.1 Overview
1
The ARMPS-HWM (Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability - Highwall Mining) program is
a stand alone program that was developed by NIOSH and is freely distributed. It is included in
the SDPS suite of programs to allow direct comparisons of pillar stability calculations. The pro-
gram can calculate the ARMPS-HWM stability factors, utilizing the ARMPS-HWM formulation
for assessing pillar stability.
Preventing pillar failure is critical to the safe and efficient highwall mining of coal. To help
mine planners prevent pillar failures, ARMPS-HWM calculates Stability Factors (SF) based on
estimates of the loads applied to, and the load bearing capacity of pillars during mining operations.
The program can model the significant features of most highwall mining layouts, including web
pillars and barrier pillars. Suggested design criteria are suggested based on evaluations of highwall
mining experience across the US.
The purpose of web and barrier pillar design is to prevent a major pillar collapse. Based on
extensive research into instances of highwall mining pillar instability and pillar collapses in under-
ground mines, the suggested ARMPS-HWM design procedure is as follows:
1. Select the number of holes between barrier pillars. ARMPS-HWM suggests that, in general,
no more than 20 holes should be mined before leaving a barrier pillar. Limiting the number
of holes helps to limit the potential size of a web pillar collapse if one were to occur.
2. Select the web pillar size. ARMPS-HWM suggests that the distance between the barrier
pillars should determine the Stability Factor (SF) of the web pillars. When the span is less
than about 200 ft (60 m), the SF on the individual web pillars can be as low as 1.3, because the
barrier pillars will likely be able to prevent a collapse from initiating. When distance between
the barriers is wider, a higher SF of approximately 1.6 has been found to be appropriate. Also,
it should be noted that very slender web pillars, with width-height ratios much less than 1.0,
may be troublesome even if their SF appears to be adequate.
3. Select the barrier pillar size Barrier pillars are essential to preventing the initiation and prop-
agation of web collapses. The suggested SF for barrier pillars depends upon the width-to-
height ratio (w/h) of the barriers. Research conducted by Mark, Chase, and Zipf (1997) into
1
information in this Chapter is based on the ARMPS-HWM help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
203
Table 8.1: ARMPS-HWM Suggested Minimum Stability Factors
Overall SF Conditions
2.0 Applicable to all conditions
Web pillar SF Conditions
1.6 When the panel width (excluding the barrier) exceeds approximately 200 ft
(60 m)
1.3 When the panel width (excluding the barrier) is less than approximately 200
ft (60 m)
Barrier pillar SF Conditions
2.0 When the barrier’s width-to-height ratio < 4.0
1.5 When the barrier’s width-to-height ratio ≥ 4.0
coal pillar collapses concluded that pillars with w/h in excess of 4.0 were highly unlikely to
collapse. They suggested that such squat pillars need only maintain an SF of approximately
1.5. They also suggested that slender pillars, which might be subject to collapse, should
employ a more conservative SF of about 2.0.
4. Check the overall SF. Once the web and barrier pillars have been sized, the overall SF for the
entire pillar system is calculated automatically. The overall SF should exceed 2.0.
Table 8.1 provides suggested SF for highwall mining, based on NIOSH research.
8.2 Pillar Load Bearing Capacity

In ARMPS-HWM, the pillar strengths are converted to pillar load-bearing capacity in tons/ft of
pillar (tonnes/m) by multiplying by the pillar width.
The Mark-Bieniawski Pillar Strength Formula

The strength of an individual pillar (SP) is determined using the rectangular pillar strength formula
(the Mark-Bieniawski formula) that considers the effect of pillar length:
( )
w w2
Sp = S1 0.64 + 0.54 − 0.18 (8.1)
h hl
where:
S1 = the in situ coal strength (lb/in2 ) assumed 900 psi or 6.2 MPa;
l = the pillar length (ft);
204
For highwall mining pillars (both webs and barriers), the pillar length is infinite, and the equa-
tion becomes: ( )
w
Sp = S1 0.64 + 0.54 (8.2)
h
In ARMPS-HWM, the pillar strengths are converted to pillar load-bearing capacity in tons/ft
of pillar (tonnes/m) by multiplying by the pillar width.
The strength of rectangular pillars can be significantly greater than square pillars, due to the
greater confinement generated within them. The Mark-Bieniawski formula was derived from anal-
yses of the pillar stress distributions implied by empirical pillar strength formulas. The formula is
equivalent to the original Bieniawski formula when pillars are square. A complete discussion of
the Mark-Bieniawski formula is included in Mark and Chase (1997).
Pillar Loads
The loadings applied to the web pillars during highwall mining are “development loads,” which are
determined using the “tributary area” theory. They increase as the depth of cover or the extraction
ratio increases. Barrier pillars are subjected to both development loads and abutment loads. The
abutment loads arise if the web pillars fail and transfer some of their load to the barriers. Abutment
loads are determined by the depth of cover, the distance to the next adjacent barrier pillar, and the
abutment angles. All the loads in ARMPS-HWM are calculated in tons/ft of pillar (tonnes/m).
Stability Factors
Stability factors (SF) are obtained by dividing the total load-bearing capacity of the pillars by the
total load applied to them. ARMPS-HWM calculates three stability factors:
• Overall SF is calculated by dividing the total load bearing capacity of all the web pillars plus
the barrier pillar by the tributary area load.
• Web pillar SF is calculated by dividing the load bearing capacity of a web pillar by the trib-
utary load applied to it.
• Barrier pillar SF is calculated by dividing the load bearing capacity of the barrier pillar by
the load applied to it, assuming that the web pillars have failed. The load includes the weight
of the rock directly above the pillar plus two side abutment loads (see Abutment Angle)
Highwall Mining through Old Auger Holes

Many highwall miners are re-working highwalls that were previously auger mined. Review of
MSHA highwall mining ground control plans indicates that at least 20% of the highwall mining
operations expect to encounter old auger holes somewhere on a property (Zipf and Bhatt, 2004).
From a ground control standpoint, the critical issue is the strength of a highwall mining web pillar
that contains a row of auger holes. As mentioned earlier, maintaining stability of web pillars is
crucial for maintaining stability of the highwall above the active mining operation. Conventional
coal pillar strength formulas do not apply directly to this situation.
205
Table 8.2: Auger Hole Geometry and Highwall Miner Web Pillar Strength
Auger hole Auger hole Auger web Auger web Auger % ex- Highwall
diameter (m) ctr-to-ctr width (m) width to hole traction miner web
spacing (m) diameter ratio pillar strength
(MPa)
0.6 1.0 0.4 0.66 60 3.30
0.7 1.0 0.3 0.43 70 2.75
0.8 1.0 0.2 0.25 80 2.00
To address this issue, NIOSH researchers used numerical models to estimate the strength of
highwall mining web pillars containing pre-existing auger holes (Zipf, 2005). Three auger hole
configurations are considered, namely, 0.6-, 0.7- and 0.8-m-diameter holes, all on 1 m centers. The
last configuration follows the common rule of thumb in auger mining that recommends an auger
web width of 1/4 the auger hole diameter.
Table 8.2 summarizes the auger hole geometries considered and the computed strength of high-
wall mining web pillars containing auger holes. By the Mark-Bieniawski formula, the strength of
a solid highwall mining web pillar with a W/H ratio of 3 is about 14 MPa (2034 psi). These cal-
culations for a range of practical auger mining geometries indicate that the strength of a highwall
mining web pillar containing auger holes is 25% to as little as 15% of the solid web pillar strength.
The numerical calculations also indicated that the strength of a highwall mining web pillar
containing auger holes is independent of its W/H ratio. This observation is to be expected for
closely spaced auger holes where the strength of the auger hole webs determines the strength of
the overall highwall mining web pillar. In most auger mining, the auger web pillars are usually
closely spaced and somewhere within the range considered in Table 8.2. If the auger holes are
widely spaced with a ratio between auger-web-width and auger-hole-diameter that is much greater
than 1, the presence of the auger holes may not affect the highwall mining web pillar as much. In
that case, the web pillar strength will increase as its W/H ratio increases.
Based on these reduced highwall miner web pillar strengths that are independent of W/H ratio,
required web pillar width is computed assuming a safety factor of 1.3. The analyses use the simple
tributary area method to calculate pillar stress, and the pillar strength is as given in Table 8.2. In
most practical situations, the horizontal depth of auger holes is less than 61 m (200 ft) where the
depth of cover rarely exceeds 46 m (150 ft).
Close Proximity Multiple Split Highwall Mining

Many highwall mining operations recover multiple seams in very close proximity to one another.
In the eastern U.S., this situation arises frequently when a thick seam splits into thinner seams.
In western U.S. mines, certain very thick seams can exceed the working height of the highwall
miner, and a multiple seam mining approach may be utilized (Ross et al., 1999). Multiple seam
mining becomes most problematic when the interburden thickness between seams decreases to
less than about one highwall miner hole width (4 m or 12 ft). While firm data on the number
of highwall mining operations engaged in such multiple split mining is not available, anecdotal
evidence suggests that 20 to 40% of the highwall mining operations will encounter such mining
206
conditions somewhere on a property.
Close proximity multiple split highwall mining appears to have caused several extensive high-
wall failures of the type that may pose a ground control danger to the working crews. Catastrophic
collapse (or domino failure) of the web pillars can occur that can result in extensive highwall failure.
When web pillars are not stacked, they will load the interburden beam and induce tensile failure
in its lower outer fibers. Using simple beam theory, Zipf (2005) showed that the maximum allow-
able web pillar load depends on the tensile strength of the rock óTrock in the lower outer fibers of
the beam. For a typical geometry the approximate strength of the pillar-beam system is less than
the tensile strength of the rock by a factor of 2 to 4! The compressive strength of a typical highwall
mining web pillar is on the order of 8 MPa (1160 psi). The tensile strength of rock may be on the
order of 2 MPa (290 psi). According to this simplistic analysis, the strength of a pillar-beam system
is on the order of 1 MPa (145 psi), and is therefore much less than the typical web pillar strength.
Thus in close proximity multiple split mining conditions, strong countermeasures are required to
prevent this failure mechanism from occurring and inducing a possible highwall failure.
The obvious solution to prevent this failure mechanism from occurring is to carefully stack
upper and lower seam web and barrier pillars. Attaining proper stacking is simple at the start of
a hole, but there is no guarantee that stacking will be maintained deep within the holes. Improper
stacking appears to have figured prominently in both web pillar collapses and highwall failures.
While maintaining proper stacking of web pillars along the entire hole depth is difficult to
achieve, maintaining proper stacking of barrier pillars is more practical owing to their greater width.
In conjunction with carefully aligned barrier pillars, limiting the number of highwall miner holes
to about 5 will also lessen the possibility of web pillar collapse and highwall failure in these close
proximity multiple seam highwall mining situations.
Analysis of MSHA Highwall Mining Ground Control Plans

MSHA recognizes the ground-control-related safety concerns associated with highwall mining and
has required each portable auger or highwall mining operation to develop and follow “an appropri-
ate highwall ground control plan, which addresses the web spacing and other measures necessary
to safely conduct the high rates of recovery.” (MSHA 2003) Various MSHA Coal Mine Safety and
Health Districts provided NIOSH-PRL researchers with 40 highwall mining ground control plans.
Most of the plans (80%) came from the central Appalachians in Kentucky and West Virginia, and
most (again 80%) were dated 2002 through 2004. As expected, about half the plans specified use
of a Superior Highwall Miner and the other half planned to use an Addcar system. The number of
plans from MSHA is somewhat lower than the number of highwall miners in operation as estimated
in Table 1; however, this minor shortfall does not detract from our conclusions.
From these 40 plans, 51 distinct cases were compiled from which to evaluate highwall mining
designs. In three-quarters of the planned highwall mining, maximum extraction thickness is be-
tween 0.9 to 1.8 m (3 to 6 ft). Relatively few highwall miners (less than 12%) have planned mining
heights greater than 2.1 m (7 ft). Most of these thicker seam operations are in the western U.S.
in MSHA District 9. In most operations (about 82%), maximum depth of cover is less than 91 m
(300 ft). The rest have a planned maximum depth of cover in the range 91 to 152 m (300 to 500 ft).
At this time none appears to be operating under more than 152 m (500 ft) of cover, although this
could change soon.
207
Maximum extraction thickness and maximum depth of cover are the main inputs for geotech-
nical design of web pillar width. In about 15% of the plans examined, the ARMPS program (Van-
dergrift et al. 2004) was the analysis method. Over 25% used another form of a tributary area
method for analysis. Past experience was the basis for many designs, but unfortunately, the analy-
sis method could not be identified in most of the highwall mining ground control plans examined.
The minimum web width specified in the plans ranges from 0.9 to 2.1 m (3 to 7 ft) in over 82% of
the cases. More important for stability is the width-to-height (W/H) ratio of these web pillars. The
W/H ratio is in the 1 to 1.25 range for about 50% of the cases, while it is between 0.5 and 1 in 25%
and more than 1.25 in the remaining 25% of cases. In general, keeping the web pillar W/H ratio
above 1 is desirable to maintain better web pillar integrity. Designs with W/H ratio less than 0.5
were not encountered.
Finally, the web pillar stability factor estimates that appear in ground control plans use the
tributary area method to calculate pillar stress and the Mark-Bieniawski formula (Mark and Chase,
1997) to calculate strength of a strip pillar assuming coal strength of 6.2 MPa (900 psi). In 45% of
the cases, it appears that stability factor exceeds 1.6; while in 31%, the stability factor appeared to
range from 1.3 to 1.6. Thus, in over three-quarters of the cases examined, a satisfactory web pillar
stability factor most likely exists. However, in a few circumstances (about 8%), stability factor
may be in the 1 to 1.3 range, while in another 8% stability factor was apparently slightly less than
1. These stability factor estimates from the ground control plans are estimates only, and judgment
of individual plans is not implied.
Most barriers shown in plans appear to range in width from 3 to 7.6 m (10 to 25 ft), but in
almost half the cases a firm dimension on barrier pillar width was not specified. In most cases,
the reasoning behind the barrier pillar width was unknown. Experience-based design rules were
employed in some cases. For example, about 15% of the plans sized barrier pillars as 1 web-pillar-
width plus 1 hole-width, while another 15% used 2 web-pillar-widths plus 1 hole-width. In about
10% of the cases, barrier pillar widths were designed using tributary area method with a stability
factor of one and the assumption that all web pillars in a panel have failed.
Regarding the W/H ratio of highwall mining barrier pillars, there was no information in about
one-third of the cases considered. However, when data was available, the W/H ratio was 3 or more
in about two-thirds of the cases and less than 3 in the remaining third. For stability reasons, a barrier
pillar with a W/H ratio above 3 has sound geomechanics-based advantages (Zipf 1999).
Finally, when information is available, it appears that about 37% of the plans specify no more
than 20 holes between barrier pillars; 44% specify 10 holes, and 15% require as few as 5 holes
between barrier pillars.
8.3 Implementation
Figure 8.1 shows the input form for entering mine plan information for calculating the pillar Sta-
bility Factors.
208
Figure 8.1: Example Q0: ARMPSHWM: Plot of mine plan
209
210
Chapter 9
The CMMR Module
9.1 Overview
1
To help quantify the engineering properties of mine roof, the Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR) was
proposed (Molinda and Mark, 1994). The CMRR weighs the geotechnical factors that determine
roof competence, and combines them into a single rating on a scale from 0 to 100. The CMRR
integrated 20 years of research on geologic hazards in mining with worldwide experience with rock
mass classification systems. In developing the CMRR, field data were collected from nearly 100
mines in every major U.S. coalfield. Cost−sharing cooperative research agreements were signed
with the Cyprus, Ziegler, and Peabody coal companies to support the research.
The CMRR can be calculated from underground exposures like roof falls and overcasts (Moli-
nda and Mark, 1994), or from exploratory drill core (Mark and Molinda, 1996). In either case, the
main parameters that are measured are:
• The uniaxial compressive strength of the intact rock;
• The spacing and persistence of discontinuities like bedding planes and slickensides;
• The cohesion and roughness of the discontinuities, and;
• The presence of groundwater and the moisture sensitivity of the rock.
Simple index tests and observations are used to rate each of these parameters. In the case of
drill core, Point Load tests (PLT) are used to estimate the compressive strength and the cohesion.
The CMRR is obtained by summing the ratings for the individual parameters.
The CMRR makes three significant contributions:
• It focuses on the specific engineering characteristics of coal measure rock;
• It applies to all U.S. coalfields, and allows meaningful comparison even where lithologies
are quite different, and;
• It provides a methodology for geotechnical data collection.

1
information in this Chapter is based on the CMRR help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
211
Roof falls per 3 km
Roof falls (ft)

Intersection span (m)
Figure 9.1: CMRR and intersection span
The CMRR has found numerous applications in ground control design. A study conducted at
44 longwall mines found that tailgate performance was largely determined by the CMRR and the
ALPS pillar stability factor (Mark and Chase, 1994). Significant correlations between the CMRR
and both entry width and the intensity of roof support were also found. Another study determined
that yielding pillar gate entry designs have only been successful when the CMRR was greater than
50 and the pillars width−to−height ratio was less than 5 (DeMarco, 1994).
Data has also been presented that relate the incidence of roof falls to the CMRR and intersection
span (Figure 9.1). These were based on observations at five underground mines (Mark et al., 1994).
The CMRR has been incorporated into guidelines for multiple seam mine design (Luo et al., 1997),
hazard analysis and mapping (Wuest et al., 1996), tailgate support selection (Harwood et al., 1996),
and feasibility studies (Beerkircher, 1994). The Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA)
has used the CMRR in fatal accident investigations, and at least three major coal companies have
recently taken steps to integrate the CMRR into their exploration programs.
Figures show input parameters required for estimating the Coal Mine Roof Rating.
9.2 Implementation
There are two different approaches to calculate the Coal Mine Roof Rating. The first utilizes under-
ground information and the second utilizes drillcore information. Figures 9.2 to 9.5 show the data
required for when using underground information while Figures 9.6 to 9.8 show the data required
for when using drillcore information. Figure 9.9 shows a cross-section of the roof area to be bolted
based on the unit information for the latter case.
212
Figure 9.2: CMRR main parameter form (underground information selected)
Figure 9.3: CMRR unit definition
213
Figure 9.4: CMRR unit characteristics
Figure 9.5: CMRR adjustments
214
Figure 9.6: CMRR main parameter form (drillhole information selected)
Figure 9.7: CMRR unit definition
215
Figure 9.8: CMRR unit characteristics
Figure 9.9: CMRR plot of immediate roof with roofbolt
216
Chapter 10
The ARBS Module
1
Despite more than half a century of experience with roof bolting in the U.S., no design method has
received wide acceptance. To begin to improve this situation, the National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH) conducted a statistical study of roof bolt performance at a number of
mines throughout the U.S. Case histories were collected from 37 mines with a variety of roof bolt
types and patterns in a wide range of geologic environments. Performance was measured in terms
of the number of roof falls that occurred per 10,000 ft of drivage. The study found that roof falls
are rare when the roof is strong and the stress is low, even with light roof bolting patterns.
ARBS was developed for the more difficult conditions, where the roof is weaker and/or the
stress is higher. It starts with the most important factors that determine the performance of a roof
bolt system, which are the roof quality (measured by the Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR)), the
depth of cover (which correlates with stress), and the intersection span. ARBS suggests design
values for the intersection span, the bolt length, and the bolt capacity and pattern. Each of the
elements in the design technique is supported by extensive case history data.
It should also be noted that ARBS is based on the risk of roof falls in intersections. In some
circumstances, it may be possible to reduce the level of support between intersections. On the other
hand, the case histories were all from areas that were unaffected by retreat mining. Where elevated
stresses are expected, greater bolting densities may be needed.
The field data also indicated that in very weak roof, it may be difficult to eliminate roof falls
using typical U.S. roof bolt patterns. When the CMRR was less than 40 at shallow cover, and less
than 45-50 at deeper cover, high roof fall rates could be encountered even with relatively high roof
bolt densities. Faced with these conditions, special mining plans or routine supplemental support
might have to be considered.
10.1 Case Histories

To help develop scientific guidelines for selecting roof bolt systems, NIOSH conducted a statistical
study of roof fall rates at 37 U.S. mines. The study evaluated five different roof bolt variables:
Bolt length, tension, grout length, capacity and pattern. Intersection spans and the CMRR were
also measured. Stress levels could not be measured directly, but the depth of cover was used as a
surrogate. Nearly 100 case histories were collected, in which the outcome variable was the number
1
information in this chapter is based on the ARBS help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
217
of MSHA-reportable roof falls that occurred per 10,000 ft of drivage. The case histories were
divided into three roof fall rate categories. Areas that were affected by longwall mining, multiple
seam interactions, or major faults were excluded, as were roof falls that took place more than 18
months after development. Details of the data collection procedures and the case history data base
have been published elsewhere (Molinda et al., 2000).
10.2 Roof Bolt Reinforcement Mechanisms

The principle objective of roof bolting is to help the rock mass support itself. Some researchers
have ascribed different support mechanisms to different types of roof bolts. For example, mechan-
ical bolts were originally thought to work in suspension, while resin bolts primarily built beams
(Gerdeen et al., 1979). Others have described the beam-building mechanism of tensioned bolts,
and the frictional support of fully grouted bolts (Peng, 1998).
It seems, however, that the reinforcement mode is actually dictated to the bolts by the ground,
rather than the other way around. Four mechanisms can be identified, depending on the geology
and the stress regime:
Skin Control: In strong, massive roof that is essentially self-supporting, cracks, joints, crossbeds,
or slickensides can create occasional hazardous loose rock at the skin of the opening. In this
environment, the function of the bolts is to prevent local rock falls, not to prevent a major
collapse. A pattern of relatively light, short roof bolts is usually sufficient. Skin control is
also an important secondary function of roof bolts in weaker ground.
Suspension: In many mines, a stronger unit that is largely self-supporting overlies a weak immedi-
ate roof layer. In these circumstances, roof bolts act to suspend the weaker layer. Experience
has shown that roof bolts are extremely efficient in the suspension mode (Conway, 1948;
Damberger et al., 1980; Mark et al., 1994b), though suspension becomes more difficult if the
weak layer is more than 1 m (3 ft) thick. The CMRR somewhat quantifies this effect through
the Strong Bed Adjustment (Molinda and Mark, 1994). The traditional dead-weight loading
design approach is generally appropriate for suspension applications (Mark, 2000).
Beam Building: Where no self-supporting bed is within reach, the bolts must tie the roof together
to create a beam. They act by maintaining friction on bedding planes, keying together blocks
of fractured rock, and controlling the dilation of failed roof layers (Peng, 1998; Gale et al.,
1992). In general, roof bolts are much less efficient in beam building than in suspension, and
higher densities of support are required. However, it is these applications (and those in the
next category) that have been most troublesome for design.
Supplemental Support: Where the roof is extremely weak or the stress extremely high, roof bolts
may not be able to prevent roof failure from progressing beyond a reasonable anchorage
horizon. In these cases, cable bolts, cable trusses, or standing support may be necessary to
carry the dead-weight load of the broken roof, and the roof bolts act primarily to prevent
unraveling of the immediate roof (Scott, 1992).
218
10.3 Roof Fall Rate Categories
The case histories were divided into three categories:
• High Rate-Failures (more than 1.5 roof falls per 10,000 ft of drivage)
• Intermediate Rate (the rate is between 0.4 and 1.5 falls per 10,000 ft)
• Zero/Low Rate (the rate is less than 0.4 falls per 10,000 ft)
A figure shows the roof fall rates vs CMRR. It is clear that mines with weaker roof were much
more likely to encounter roof falls. When the CMRR was less than 50, 29 cases fell in the High
Rate category, while there were just 16 Zero/Low Rate cases. When the CMRR was 50 or greater,
the proportions were more than reversed, with Zero Rate cases outnumbering High Rate cases by
6-to-1.
Another figure plots CMRR vs the depth of cover. A line separates the data into two groups:
CMRR = 21.6 + 11.5 × log10 H (10.1)
Above the line is where the Skin Control/Suspension roof bolt reinforcement mechanism predom-
inates, where roof falls are rare. ARBS was derived from the 71 cases that fell below the line, in
the Beam Building/Supplemental Support regime.
10.4 Depth of Cover

The transition between suspension and beam building depends heavily on the level of stress. The
same roof bed that is self-supporting in a low stress environment may require substantially more
reinforcement when subjected to higher stresses.
Worldwide research over the past 20 years has shown that the horizontal stress is usually two or
three times larger than the vertical stress. In addition, the horizontal stress attacks the roof directly,
while the pillars carry most of the vertical stress.
In U.S. coal mines, horizontal stresses are rarely measured underground. However, a com-
prehensive data base collected by Mark and Mucho (1994) shows a strong correlation between
increasing depth and horizontal stress in the eastern U.S. Two regression equations are shown, one
linear and one logarithmic:
σH = 1.23H + 1306 (10.2)
σH = 2250 × log10 H − 4075 (10.3)
where:
σH = the in situ horizontal stress (psi);
H = the depth of cover (ft).
They both predict very similar values for the range of depths in the case histories. However, the
logarithmic equation is preferred because other research suggests that the horizontal stress gradient
tends to decrease at greater depths (Bigby et al., 1992). In the western U.S., the horizontal stress is
generally about equal to the vertical, but it is highly variable.
219
10.5 Intersection Span
After the CMRR and the depth of cover, the roof span is the next most important factor affecting
roof stability. In coal mines, the greatest spans are encountered in intersections. Approximately
70% of all roof falls occur in intersections, though they account for just 20-25% of the total drivage
(Molinda et al., 1997). Clearly, roof falls are much more likely in wider spans. Any successful roof
bolt design methodology must consider the span effect.
The figure plots the CMRR vs the intersection spans (reported as the average of the sum-of-
the-diagonals). The successful group includes both the Zero and the Low roof fall rate categories.
The best equation separating the successful from the High Rate failures is also shown as:
IsG = 20 + 0.26 × CMRR (10.4)
where IsG = the Suggested Intersection Span (average of the sum-of-the-diagonals, ft).
Surprisingly, the equation was not improved when either the depth of cover or the extraction
thickness were included.
10.6 Bolt Length

Bolt length was confirmed as a critical parameter in an analysis that used paired data from individual
mines (Molinda et al., 2000). From the large data set, 13 pairs of case histories were extracted where
two different lengths of roof bolts were used at the same mine. For a pair to be selected, the roof
bolt lengths had to differ by at least one ft, and at least one of the roof fall rates had to be greater than
zero. The average reduction in the roof fall rate was 65%. The greater effectiveness of the longer
bolts was statistically significant at the 98% confidence level. Four of the pairs mixed shorter, pre-
tensioned bolts with longer, fully-grouted bolts. In three of these pairs, the longer bolts had the
lower roof fall rate.
Building upon these results and other theoretical considerations, an equation was developed to
guide the selection of the proper bolt length (LB):
[ ]1.5
Is 100 − CMRR
LB = log10 H (10.5)
6.7 100
where Is = the actual intersection span (average of the sum-of-the-diagonals, ft).
The equation incorporates the major factors that affect entry stability, the span, the stress level,
and the roof quality. The roof quality term [(100 − CMRR/100]1.5 is based on the relationship
originally proposed by Unal (1983), but it has been adjusted to magnify the effect of the weak roof.
A comparison of the bolt lengths predicted by the design equation and the actual bolt lengths
in the case histories shows that for the successful cases, the mean bolt length was very close to
the equation’s prediction. In the unsuccessful cases, on the other hand, the mean bolt length was
8 inches too short. Moreover, of the 13 cases when the actual bolt length was shorter by 1.5 ft
or more than the length recommended by the bolt length equation, 77% were failures. These data
further confirm the importance of proper bolt length in preventing ground falls.
It should be noted, however, that good anchorage is necessary to ensure that the entire length
of a fully grouted bolt is working. In weak rock, the anchorage factor of a typical 13-ton capacity
220
No. 6 rebar bolt may be less than 0.5 tons per grouted inch (Peng, 1998), meaning that the upper
26 inches will pull out before that portion of the bolt achieves its yield load. In other words, a 6-ft
bolt with a low anchorage factor might provide less support than a 5-ft bolt with a good anchorage
factor. Smooth holes, a large annulus, and/or poor resin quality can also reduce the anchorage factor
and the effective bolt length. If the anchorage is questionable, short encapsulation pull tests should
be used to identify the problem and make adjustments (Mark, 2000; Karabin and Debevic, 1976).
10.7 Capacity and Pattern

The intensity of support provided by a roof bolt system is determined by:
• The load-bearing capacity of the individual bolts;
• The density of the bolt pattern, and;
• The length of the bolts.
The capacity of the roof bolt is normally determined by the diameter and the grade of the steel.
One obvious advantage of stronger bolts is that they can carry more broken rock. They can also
produce more confinement in the rock and accept higher pre-tension loads. The capacity of a bolt
can also depend on the anchorage, however, as noted above.
The density of a roof bolt pattern depends on the number of bolts per row and the spacing
between rows. In the U.S., support density does not vary much. With the advent of dual-head
roof bolting machines, four bolts per row have become the near universal standard. Bolt spacing is
limited by law to 5 ft, but is seldom less than 4 ft. With entries varying in width from about 15 to
20 ft, bolt densities range from one bolt per 15 to 25 ft2 .
The ARBS intensity factor combines all these variables into a single parameter.
10.8 The ARBS Intensity Factor

The ARBS value measures the bolt intensity by including the factors that relate to capacity and
pattern:
Lb × N b × C
ARBS = (10.6)
Sb × W e
where:
Lb = the length of the bolt (ft),
C = the bolt capacity,
N b = the number of bolts per row,
Sb = the spacing between rows of bolts (ft),
W e = the entry width (ft).
The case histories show that the necessary ARBS increases as the CMRR decreases. The pre-
diction becomes even better if the depth of cover is included in the equation:
ARBSG = 5.7 × log10 H − 0.35 × CMRR + 6.5 (10.7)
221
where ARBSG is the suggested value for the given CMRR, and depth of cover, H.
The final design equation also includes the intersection span, as discussed in Verification.
10.9 Verification
A plot shows the performance of the ARBS design methodology against the entire data set. All of
the 71 case histories are plotted. The two axes are:
• The difference between the suggested ARBSG and the actual ARBS intensity factor in the
case history, and;
• The difference between the suggested Intersection Span IsG and the actual Intersection Span
Is.
The lower right-hand quadrant of the graph contains 19 cases in which the equations predict that
both the span was too large and the bolt intensity was too low. Of these, 16 were in fact failures,
and only one was a success.
The upper left-hand quadrant contains 18 cases in which the equations predict that both the span
and the bolt intensity were adequate. Of these, 9 were successes and 4 were failures. Therefore,
for these two groups of cases, the design equations predicted the actual outcome 83% of the time.
For the case histories in the other two quadrants, one of the parameters was within the guidelines,
while the other was not. It seems reasonable that if the actual span were less than the suggested
span, then it might be possible to reduce the required ARBS. Similarly, if the span was larger than
recommended, a higher ARBS might compensate for it.
The discriminant equation shown on the graph reflects an adjustment to the suggested ARBS
as follows:
ARBSGadj = ARBSG − 0.3 × (IsG − Is) (10.8)
The adjusted equation correctly predicted 76% of the case histories. Only 6 successes were mis-
classified, and all but one of these was very near the line. Of the 8 mis-classified failures, 5 also
fell close to the line. The 3 further away represent mines that installed high densities of support
and still had many roof falls. They serve as reminders that roof bolt design remains an imperfect
science.
10.10 Implementation
Figure 10.1 shows the parameters for designing one support system while Figure 10.2 shows the
parameters when designing two support systems. Figure 10.3 shows the parameters required for
cost calculations.
222
Figure 10.1: ARBS Design of one support system
Figure 10.2: ARBS Design of two support systems
223
Figure 10.3: ARBS Cost calculations for the support systems
224
Chapter 11
The AHSM Module
11.1 Overview of Horizontal Stress

1
The purpose of ground control is to create a stable rock structure that can withstand all the stresses
that nature applies to it. Traditionally, miners have been most concerned with stress caused by the
weight of the rock itself. The pillars, however, carry most of the vertical gravity load from the
overburden, leaving only the weight of the immediate roof to be carried by the supports.
In the early 1970’s, researchers began to actually measure stresses underground. They made a
surprising discovery in nearly every case, the horizontal stress was greater than the vertical stress,
often several times greater. Although this unexpected finding caused quite a bit of head scratching,
it did explain many things that were commonly observed underground, including cutter roof and
long running roof falls.
The mystery was finally solved by the theory of plate tectonics (sometimes called “continen-
tal drift”). Plate tectonics explains that the earth’s crust is segmented into enormous rigid plates.
Earthquakes, volcanism, and mountain-building are caused when the plates collide with one an-
other, generating tremendous forces that are transmitted thousands of miles through the earth’s
crust.
Geophysicists have created a World Stress Map based on their current understanding of plate
tectonics. After studying all the available stress measurement data, the U.S. Bureau of Mines (now
NIOSH) confirmed the relevance of the World Stress Map to U.S. coal mines. Some of the most
significant conclusions were are:
• The maximum stress direction in the eastern U.S. is usually ENE;
• The maximum stress direction in the western U.S. is usually NNW in Utah but variable else-
where;
• The horizontal-to-vertical stress ratio in the eastern U.S. is usually 2-3 (the horizontal stresses
are 2-3 times as great as the vertical stresses);
• The horizontal-to-vertical stress ratio in the western U.S. is generally about 1.0, though some
western mines have encountered very high stresses, and
1
information in this chapter is based on the AHSM help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
225
• In general, horizontal stress increases with depth.
It is now widely accepted that horizontal stress (σH is nearly always present underground. The
only likely exceptions are some small hilltop drift mines. Studies have also shown that:
• Weak rocks, particularly those containing many weak bedding planes or laminations, are
more likely to be damaged by horizontal stress than strong, massive rocks, and;
• Stream valleys can concentrate horizontal stresses, and also re-direct them.
11.2 Examples of Effects Underground

Now that we aware of how widespread horizontal stress is, it is easier to see its effects. Here are
three recent examples that illustrate the types of problems that can be encountered in different stages
of mining:
Development Example: A small drift mine in western Virginia was advancing into a new, deeper
portion of their reserve. Large chunks of roof began to fall on continuous miners, forcing cut
lengths to be reduced. These roof “pots” were up to three feet thick. Roof cutters also devel-
oped along the rib and through the intersections. The problems were most often experienced
in the belt entry, which was normally kept about one break ahead of the other entries.
Outby Roof Falls Example: A Pennsylvania room-and-pillar mine was driving panels to the north.
Conditions in the faces were excellent and the roof looked perfect. Several breaks outby,
however, roof falls occurred with little warning. Once initiated, usually in an intersection,
the falls could extend for more than 1000 ft. The roof falls generally ran down an entry, and
could not be stopped by cribbing. Several panels were abandoned prematurely.
Longwall Example: At a longwall mine in southern West Virginia, gate entries were developed
beneath a stream valley in an easterly direction. Many large roof pots fell out during de-
velopment, particularly in the crosscuts and intersections. The longwall had retreated only
100 ft when a major roof fall occurred on the headgate. It was cleaned up, but 200 ft later
the stageloader was again trapped by broken roof. To regain ground control, the belt was
removed, the floor was shot, and the roof supported with cable bolts for a distance of 200 ft.
11.3 Basic Principles

Drivage Direction: Entries driven perpendicular to σH are more likely to suffer damage than those
driven parallel to it.
Stress Shadowing: Horizontal stress cannot pass through broken or collapsed roof, so roof falls
and gob areas create zones of both stress relief and stress concentration.
The second principle has several applications. It explains why one entry may be heavily dam-
aged, while its neighbor is perfectly intact. It also explains why a roof fall can begin to run, and
why it can be so hard to stop. And it explains the longwall horizontal stress concentrations that can
be so troublesome.
226
11.4 Mine Design
Mine design is the first line of defense against horizontal stress. Some basic mine design principles
are listed below:
• Try to maximize the drivage parallel to σH , and minimize the drivage perpendicular to it. A
Stress Design Diagram can be helpful in laying out main entries, panel entries, and crosscuts.
• Orient longwall panels to avoid longwall horizontal stress concentrations. A Longwall Hor-
izontal Stress Concentration Diagram can be used to determine the degree of stress relief or
concentration to be expected.
• In room-and-pillar mining, try to develop panels within the stress shadows of previously
mined gob areas. Advance-and-relieve mining, where a gob zone is created during develop-
ment, can be another option.
11.5 Mine Development

Another group of techniques can be used during development to minimize horizontal stress prob-
lems. The basic principle is to minimize the damage inflicted on critical entries, so that they are
more likely to remain standing over the long-term. The techniques include:
• Advancing the least critical entry first.
• Turning crosscuts away from the maximum horizontal stress, rather than into it.
• Minimizing entry widths and intersection spans, particularly in critical entries.
• Minimizing cut lengths and the time between cutting and roof bolting.
• In some cases, leaving top coal can help.
11.6 Roof Bolting

Even the best design and mining practice is often not enough to control severe horizontal stress,
however. Roof support is the still the main control technique. Unfortunately, no magic bullet roof
support has been found that works every time. To improve the effectiveness of roof bolts, two basic
concepts have found to be most important:
• Longer is better, because long bolts are more likely to anchor above the zone that has been
broken by the horizontal stress. Longer bolts are particularly effective in narrow entries, and
where the rock becomes sandier and stronger higher up.
• Stronger is better, because strong bolts can carry more broken rock, and they can withstand
more horizontal shear loading. Stronger bolts are made from larger diameter and higher
grade steel. It is critical, however, that the anchorage capacity of any bolt be greater than its
breaking strength.
227
Some studies have also found that it can be effective to install bolts with high levels of tension,
or to use a denser bolt patterns.
11.7 Supplemental Support

Supplemental support is the last line of defense. In general, supplemental supports do not prevent
the roof from failing. Instead, they work to control the rock that has already been broken.
Roof-to-floor standing supports, particularly the modern engineered wood cribs and posts, can
be effective supplemental supports. Standing supports are usually inconvenient in development
entries and longwall headgates, however, where horizontal stress most often strikes. For these
applications, cable trusses and cable bolts have become the most popular supplemental supports.
Cable bolts have the advantage of being stiffer than trusses, meaning that they will resist the
movement of the roof sooner. Roof bolts are even stiffer, so cable bolts are generally more compat-
ible with them. Cable bolts also use more of their strength to resist vertical loads than do trusses,
and they can obtain better contact in uneven roof. Cable bolts greatest drawbacks are that they
must be long enough to obtain solid anchorage above the broken rock, and they can be sheared by
horizontal roof movements. Skin support, such as heavy steel mats, should also be used to prevent
the roof from unraveling between the cable bolts.
Cable trusses anchor over the solid coal, so their anchorage is more likely to remain intact. They
can also withstand downward roof movements in excess of 1 ft. For these reasons, they can survive
in high deformation environments where other supports would fail. Their greatest drawbacks are
that even tensioned cable trusses provide little support until large roof movements have already
occurred, and their vertical load carrying capability is reduced because they are installed on an
angle.
11.8 Common Misconceptions about Horizontal Stress

• It is unusual for horizontal stress to exceed the vertical stress:
Years ago, it was thought that the normal horizontal stress was about one third the vertical
stress. We now know that there is no normal horizontal stress, it depends entirely on factors
like the current state of plate tectonics, rock stiffness, and surface topography.
• I don’t have any horizontal stress at my mine:
Few mines are free of horizontal stress. If you have strong, massive roof, however, you may
not see any effects from horizontal stress.
• All my roof control problems are caused by horizontal stress:
Roof control problems are generally caused by a combination of factors, including weak roof,
wide spans, pillars that are too small, and/or inadequate roof support. While horizontal stress
may be the most significant problem at some mines, it is seldom the only one.
• Horizontal stress only acts in one direction:
Rock underground is stressed in all directions, not just horizontal and vertical. Every entry is
subjected to some degree of horizontal stress, but those perpendicular to σH see the highest
level.
228
• Pillar design can help me control horizontal stress:
Unfortunately, pillar design is seldom much help. Larger pillars can handle more vertical
loads, but have little effect on horizontal ones. Small yield pillars have been used to control
horizontal stress in very deep salt mines where the ground is highly deformable, but they
would have to be very thin (5-10 ft) to have any affect on horizontal stress in a coal mine. In
any case, many horizontal stress problems occur right at the face, before the ground knows
what size pillar is coming anyway.
• The direction of horizontal stress can be determined by studying the regional pattern of faults
and folds:
This may or may not be true. Where faults are currently active, as in the western US, they are
responding to the current state of plate tectonics. Where geologic features were caused by
ancient stress fields, as is generally the case in the eastern US, any relationship to the current
state of stress is probably coincidental.
11.9 Stress Measurements

A number of techniques are available to measure ground stress. With overcoring methods, a hole
is drilled into the roof, a sensitive measuring device is installed, and then a second, larger hole
is drilled around the first one. The overcore relieves the stress, allowing the rock to relax. By
measuring the expansion of the rock, the original stress field can be reconstructed. Some over-
coring techniques can define the complete three-dimensional state of stress, while others provide
information just about the horizontal stresses.
Overcoring has traditionally been conducted underground. A new Australian technology has
been developed for wireline overcoring as part of a normal exploration core drilling operation.
Hydrofracturing methods use only a single hole. A section of the hole is isolated with packers,
and then pressurized with fluid until the rock fractures. Measurements of the fracture pressure,
subsequent re-opening pressures, and the orientation of the fracture are used to define the horizontal
stressfield.
Another new Australian downhole technology employs borehole breakout analysis of acoustic
scanner images to determine the orientation of σH . The stress magnitudes can also be estimated by
determining the mechanical properties of the strata where breakout occurs.
A simple alternative is underground stress mapping, which uses features such as pots, cutters,
shifts in bolt holes, etc. Stress mapping does not provide a numerical value for the stress level, but
it usually provides information on the direction of σH . By rating the intensity of the stress features,
it also indicates whether the magnitude of the stress exceeds the strength of the roof rock.
11.10 Signs of Horizontal Stress

How many of the following signs of horizontal stress have you observed?
On development, do you see that roof cutters and pots are more frequent:
• When you drive in one particular direction?
• On one side of the entry?
229
• In one particular entry or entries?
• When you turn a crosscut in one particular direction?
• When you are mining beneath a stream valley?
• When you are mining under deeper cover?
When you have outby roof falls, do they:
• Tend to be more than an intersection in length?
• Tend to run (grow) over time?
• Preferentially occur in one direction?
• Seldom occur in two adjacent entries?
• Occur more often beneath stream valleys?
• Occur more often under deeper cover?
In your longwall panels, are roof problems more likely to occur:
• On the first panel of a group than in subsequent panels?
• In the headgate than the tailgate?
• In a repeating pattern, for example, near every intersection?
• Beneath stream valleys?
11.11 Stress Design Diagram

The Stress Design Diagram is a mine planning tool to help lay out development entries. The first
thing the user does is specify the Azimuth of the Maximum Horizontal Stress. Next, the user
specifies the entry and crosscut orientations (azimuths). Angled crosscuts may be used, and the
angles may be different for the right- and left-hand crosscuts.
The Diagram then shows the stress condition for the entries and crosscuts. Drivage within
30 degrees of the maximum horizontal stress is anticipated to have the best conditions. Drivages
whose angle exceeds 60 degrees are expected to have the most difficult conditions. Moderate stress
conditions are in the intermediate range, between 30 and 60 degrees (Figure 11.1).
From a stress control perspective, the optimum design generally places the entries in the best
conditions, and then uses angled crosscuts to avoid putting crosscuts in the most difficult zones
230
Figure 11.1: AHSM Stress design diagram
11.12 Longwall Stress Concentration Diagram

The Longwall Stress Concentration Diagram helps predict the stress conditions in a longwall head-
gate (or tailgate of a first panel). Mark et al. (1998) originally derived it from three-dimensional
finite-element modeling conducted by Daniel Su of Consol Research.
To use the Longwall Stress Concentration Diagram, one must first determine the angle f that
the headgate makes with σH (Figure 11.2). The angle f is defined as follows:
• when the headgate is parallel with σH , then f = 0o or 180o .
• when the headgate is perpendicular to σH , then f = 180o .
• when the headgate is in a stress concentration, then 0o < f < 90o .
• when the headgate is in a stress shadow, then 90o < f < 180o .
231
Figure 11.2: AHSM Parameters required for the concentration diagram
Dr. Su’s modeling indicated that:
• headgate conditions are best when f=160o (i.e., when the headgate is almost parallel with σH ,
and in stress shadow), and;
• headgate conditions are worst when f=70o (i.e., when the headgate is almost perpendicular
to σH , and in a stress concentration).
These general trends were confirmed by the case histories documented by Mark et al. (1998).
A typical Stress Concentration Diagram is shown in Figure 11.3.
AHSM automatically calculates the angle f by comparing the azimuth of the headgate to the
direction of σH , considering the direction of panel retreat and the panel sequence. It then reports
(Figure 11.4):
• whether the headgate is in a stress concentration or a stress shadow;
• the f angle, and;
• the degree of stress concentration, where the maximum is 100% and the minimum is 0.
232
Figure 11.3: AHSM Stress concentration diagram
233
Figure 11.4: AHSM Azimuth of headgate and direction of σH
234
Chapter 12
The AMSS Module
12.1 Overview of Multiple Seam Interactions

1
Multiple seam interactions are a major ground control hazard in many US underground coal mines.
The two most common types of interactions are:
• Undermining, where stress concentrations caused by previous full extraction in an overlying

seam is the primary concern, and;
• Overmining, where previous full extraction in an underlying seam can result in stress con-
centrations and rock damage from subsidence.
The goal of AMSS is to help identify the location and likely severity of these interactions.
Mine planners can use this information to adjust the roof support, pillar design, or mine layout to
minimize the hazard.
To develop AMSS, NIOSH employed empirical methods. Through a program of mine visits
for data collection, NIOSH assembled the largest data base of multiple seam case histories ever.
At each operation, both successful and unsuccessful case histories were collected. These data were
analyzed with the multivariate statistical technique of logistic regression. The study also employed
Lam2D to estimate the multiple seam stress, ALPS and ARMPS to determine pillar stability factors,
and the CMRR to measure roof quality.
Several of the findings of the NIOSH study confirm the conventional wisdom about multiple
seam for interactions. Overmining was found to be much more difficult than undermining, and
isolated remnant pillars caused more problems than gob-solid boundaries. By using AMSS, it is
now possible to quantify these effects in terms of the equivalent thickness of interburden needed to
compensate for them.
The NIOSH study also found that pillar design is a critical component of multiple seam mine
planning. Many of the failed cases in the data base involved pillars whose Multiple Seam Pillar
Stability Factors appeared inadequate. Weaker roof was also found to significantly increase the
risk of multiple seam interactions. Some parameters in the data base that were not found to be
statistically significant included the interburden competence, the time lag between mining the two
1
information in this chapter is based on the AMSS help file compiled by Dr. Chris Mark of NIOSH
235
seams, the lower coal bed to interburden thickness ratio, and the angle between the active mining
and the remnant structure.
The most important output from AMSS is a design equation that predicts the critical thickness of
the interburden required to minimize the likelihood of a multiple seam interaction. This equation
has been incorporated into a step-by-step AMSS design procedure that allows mine planners to
evaluate each potential interaction and take steps to reduce the risk of ground control failure. Such
measures could include installing cable bolts or other supplemental support, increasing the pillar
size, or avoiding the structure entirely.
12.2 AMSS Step by Step Design Procedure

AMSS can be used to evaluate the potential for multiple seam interactions, and provide guidance for
pillar sizing, supplemental support, and other aspects of mine design. The suggested step-by-step
process, is:
1. Identify critical remnant structures on the maps of mining in seams above and below the
target seam. Every remnant structure that may be crossed by active mine workings should
be evaluated.
2. For each potential remnant structure crossing, determine these AMSS input parameters using
the maps and core logs:
• Depth of cover to the target seam;

• Interburden thickness;
• Seam heights (both seams)
• Age of the older workings;
• CMRR for the roof of the target seam.
3. Check that the parameters of the case being considered fall within the limits of the AMSS
data base. If the roof of the active seam is very weak (CMRR<45) or the stress is very
high (>5000 psi) then AMSS should be used with caution. The same is true if the case
involves overmining and the lower coalbed thickness to interburden ratio is less than 10. If
the interburden thickness is less than 30 ft in either undermining or overmining, the potential
for an ultra-close interaction should be the primary consideration.
4. Determine whether the remnant structure is a gob-solid boundary or an isolated remnant

pillar. A longwall chain pillar system should be modeled as a single isolated remnant pillar.
5. Enter the AMSS parameters on the first input page of the program. These parameters include:
• Whether the active mining is longwall or room and pillar;

• Whether the case is undermining or overmining;
• The interburden thickness;
• The type of remnant structure;
236
• The active seam CMRR;
• The extraction thickness of the previously mined seam;
• The width of gob areas, and;
• The width of the isolated remnant pillar (if present).
6. Enter the mining parameters for the active seam into the ARMPS or ALPS module for the
proposed section in the target seam.
7. AMSS will automatically conduct a LAM2D analysis of the remnant structure crossing to
determine the multiple seam stress applied to the critical pillar in the target seam. AMSS
will also determine the total vertical stress using equation.
8. Check that the pillar design is adequate for the multiple seam loads. AMSS will determine
the ARMPS or ALPS multiple seam pillar stability factor (SFMS) for the active seam, and
compare it to the recommended ARMPS or ALPS SF. If the calculated SFMS is lower than
the recommended value, AMSS will print a “warning” that the pillar size should be increased.
9. AMSS will calculate the critical interburden (INTcrit) and the maximum allowable total verti-
cal stress (TVSallow) using the design equations. If the actual interburden exceeds the critical
interburden thickness, a serious interaction is unlikely. Similarly, if the actual total vertical
stress is less than the allowable stress, a serious interaction is unlikely. Both the INTcrit and
the TVSallow are determined for two cases, with and without supplemental support.
10. AMSS compares the actual interburden with the INTcrit values determined by AMSS design
equations. Three predicted outcomes are possible:
• GREEN: If INTcrit is significantly less than the actual interburden without supplemental
support, a major multiple seam interaction can be considered unlikely.
• YELLOW: If the actual interburden is less than INTcrit without supplemental support,
but greater than INTcrit with supplemental support, adding a pattern of cable bolts or
other equivalent supplemental support could greatly reduce the probability of a major
interaction.
• RED: If INTcrit even with supplemental support is greater than the actual interburden
thickness, a major interaction should be considered likely, and it may be desirable to
avoid the area entirely.
If desired, the pillar design in the target seam can be adjusted before running the program
again. Changing the pillar size changes the value of the TVS, which can reduce it below the
TVSallow (reducing the TVS also reduces the INTcrit.). Finally, if the INTcrit falls within
the “Yellow” range, it might be desirable to conduct a more detailed analysis using LaModel
3D.
11. If the INTcrit is falls within case (b) above, a more detailed analysis can be conducted using
LaModel 3D.
237
Chapter 13
The Graphing Options
13.1 Basic Graph Formatting Parameters

The parameters included in the Graph Options window appear in the graph menus of all modules
(e.g., the profile function method, the influence function method, the pillar analysis module, the
graphing module, the ALPS module, the ARMPS module, etc.).
These are explained in detail below (see also Figure 13.1).
1. Graph Title: The Graph Title is a text string placed over the graph.
2. X-Axis Title: The X-Axis Title is a text string placed below the X-Axis of the graph.
3. Y-Axis Title: The Y-Axis Title is a text string placed to the left of the Y-Axis of the graph.
Note that programs that generate parametric graphs such as the pillar stability evaluation
programs, allow for more than one Y-Axis title configuration.
4. Grid Style: Four grid styles are available; horizontal lines, vertical lines, horizontal and ver-
tical lines, no grid lines.
5. Graph Style: Three graph styles are available; lines, symbols, lines and symbols. When a
graph style containing symbols is selected, the user can set the size of the symbol through
the scroll bar provided.
6. Maximum number of curves: The user can specify the maximum number of curves that can
be overlaid on the graph. When this number is exceeded (in the Append Curve mode) the
program will instruct the user to clear the graph before proceeding. Note that not all programs
support this option. For example the Pillar stability module allows a fixed number of curves,
one for each pillar stability formulation.
7. Curve Legend: This option enables or disables the legend box in the graph. When this option
is enabled, the user can set the legend for each curve in the text box provided. This text box
is not enabled when the Curve Legend option is disabled.
8. Default Parameter Options: There are two default parameter options: a) to set the default
parameters (e.g., graph title, X-Axis title, etc.) every time the Graph Options window is
238
invoked, and b) to set the format parameters to those used in the previous graphing session.
These values are saved in the *.INI file of the calling program (e.g., PROF.EXE, PILL.EXE,
etc).
13.2 Advanced Graph Formatting Parameters

When the graph toolbar is enabled (Figure 3.10), the user has access to powerful graphics functions
as provided by the Graphics Server module (version 5.50).
The buttons enabled in the graph tool bar are follows:
• Data
• Titles
• Axis
• Fonts
Figure 13.1: Basic graph options
239
• Markers
• Background
• System
• Help
• About
An example of using these advanced options is given below. In this example, the user is
prompted to change the attributes of certain features of a graph.
Changing Line Attributes

To accomplish this, click on the Markers button (the ninth button from the left, with a green X on
it). Then follow these steps:
• To change the color of individual lines do the following:
1. Move to the box with the line graphs and use the little arrow to select a line.
2. Move the cursor to the Color box and click on the down arrow, scroll down and select
the desired color for the first line. Repeat for other lines as necessary.
3. Move to the bottom and click on the Apply Now button. At this point the color for the
selected lines has changed.
4. Experiment with changing the color for other lines as well.
• To change the appearance of the line other than color, do the following.
1. In the line box click on Thick and click on the scroll button. The second line down is
a thin line. Click on different line values to determine which is the best for the current
presentation. Repeat this selection for each line set. Note that it is possible to make a
distinction between lines by using different line widths.
2. Optionally, select a different line pattern by clicking on the Pattern box and selecting a
different line pattern. Once again this may be done for each line set.
Changing Tick Marks

To accomplish this, click on the Axis button (the sixth button from the left). Then do the following:
• In the Tick Mark box click on minor.
• In the Apply to Axis box click on Y Primary or X to apply the tick marks to the graph.
• Click on Apply Now to modify the graph.
Note that the user can define the spacing of the secondary ticks. Spacing of primary ticks is
automatically adjusted by the Graphics Server object.
240
Printing the Graph
To accomplish this, click on the Systems button (the fourth button from the right). Then do the
following:
• Under printing click on Color (for color plots).
• Click on Print to send the graph directly to the default Windows printer.
Changing the Background

To accomplish this, click on the Background button (the fifth button from the right). In this menu
the user can select different colors for different parts of the graph. Optionally, select the position
of the different parts of the graph.
Changing the Fonts

To accomplish this, click on the Fonts button (the eighth button from the left). In this menu the
user can select different typeface types, as well as character size for each of the different parts of
the graph.
Notes
• The graph template provided by the Graphics Server Object is a function that allows the user
to save a custom set of settings, e.g., color, fonts, etc., and recall that template every time that
is needed. To accomplish this, make all necessary formatting changes to a graph, and then
click on the System button. Enter a name in the Graph Template File name text box and click
on Save. To restore settings saved in a graph template, create the graph, click on the System
button, enter the file name of the graph template in the appropriate box and click on Load.
Further Instruction on the Graphics Server Object

Click on the Help(?) button of the graph toolbar and follow the prompts.
13.3 Exporting and Importing Data

13.3.1 Exporting Data
Most graph forms offer the option to export the current curve(s)to ASCII format (Figure 13.2). The
data is then saved in a “*.DAT” file in two columns. The first column corresponds to the X-axis
value and the second column corresponds to the Y-axis value for each point in the graph. If multiple
curves are saved, two columns are created for each curve in sequence, e.g., columns three and four
correspond to the second curve, etc.
Similarly, most graph forms offer the option to export the current curve(s) into Microsoft Excel
(Figure 13.2). For each curve, the data is again exported in two columns, the first is the X-axis
241
value and the second is the Y-axis value. In order for this option to work, Microsoft Excel should
be installed in the computer running SDPS.
13.3.2 Importing Data

Most graphs offer the option to import (and overlay on the current graph) a single curve in ASCII
format. This is very useful when comparing data from previous runs, measured data, etc. The
program expects to find data in two columns. The first column should correspond to the X-axis
value and the second column should correspond to the Y-axis value for each point in the graph.
Data exported to ASCII via the export functions described above, can be subsequently imported
using the import ASCII data functions. Currently there is no option to import curves from Microsoft
Excel.
13.4 The Graphing Module

The graphing module is a stand-alone SDPS program that can can create two- and three-dimensional
images of the calculated deformation indices and either display them on the screen or print them
to a Windows device. The main source of input to this program are files created by the solution
modules of the influence function method.
The program can handle two types of files:
• grid files (SDPS grid, Surfer grid and Carlson Software grid files)
• XYZ files
The points represented by a grid file are the points defined at the cross-section of horizontal and
vertical grid lines within the grid boundaries. Thus, grid files contain the following information:
• the minimum and maximum extent in the X-direction
• the minimum and maximum extent in the Y-direction
• the step size in the X- and Y-directions
Figure 13.2: Typical exporting and importing options
242
• the number of grid lines in the X- and Y-directions
• the value for the Z-parameter, e.g., values for a particular deformation index, the elevation,
etc. for all points defined by the grid.
Notes
• Grid files do not contain the X- and Y-coordinates for each point, since these values can be
generated based on the above data.
• The graphing module can not directly load individual files for plotting. Files are loaded
indirectly utilizing project information generated by the Influence Function Method.
13.4.1 Two-Dimensional Images: Cross-sectional Plots

Cross-sectional plots generated from grid files can be defined along any (horizontal or vertical) grid
line at any intercept. Depending on the orientation of the cross-section, the X-Axis of the graph
will represent either the X- or the Y-Axis of the grid. The Y-Axis of the graph will always be the
Z-parameter for the corresponding points. The user has the option to view cross-sections created
at different intercept values either on the X- or Y-direction.
When data are available in an XYZ file, which may or may not be defined on a regular grid,
the program can only create one cross-sectional plot, which is termed a directional cross-section.
This plot includes all points in the file taken in the sequence read from the file, i.e., from first to
last. The file specified for the profile should only contain either two or three columns of data. If
the file contains two columns of data, the program assumes that the first is the X- and the second
is the Y-coordinate of the points to be plotted on the cross-sectional plot. These points are plotted
directly without any scaling. If the file contains three columns of data, the program assumes that it
is an XYZ file. In this case the user has three options:
• to use an X-projection (i.e., use the X- and Z-columns)
• to use a Y-projection (i.e., use the Y- and Z-columns)
• to use an Axial projection, in which case the origin of the X-Axis is set to zero (0)and the
distance between the points is the actual horizontal (radial) distance.
Notes
The long-term risk analysis frame becomes visible only if the user has performed a long-term risk
analysis. Then the user can select the appropriate analysis step to display.
13.4.2 Two-Dimensional Images: Vector Plots

Vector plots can be created only for those indices where a direction of a horizontal vector represent-
ing this index is available. For example vector plots can be plotted for the horizontal displacements,
for the principal horizontal strains, for the principal horizontal curvatures as well as for the slopes.
243
Figure 13.3 presents the vector plot options, while Figure 13.4 shows an example of a vector
plot of maximum horizontal displacement.
Notes
The long-term risk analysis frame becomes visible only if the user has performed the long-term
risk analysis. Then the user can select the appropriate analysis step to display.
13.4.3 Contour Plots

This function allows the generation of contours by internal calls to Surfer, a program commercially
available by Golden Software. If Surfer is not installed this function will fail with an error message
(Figure 13.5). Note that in 64 bit systems Surfer should be installed as a 32 bit application.
Contours can be generated using two options:
• Using a Surfer grid file generated directly as a result of the calculations
• Using data in the form of XYZ points. In this case Surfer first generates the needed grid files
(using default parameters) and then generates the requested contours.
The user can specify which deformation indices should be used for contour generation. Avail-
able options are (Figure 13.6):
• Subsidence
Figure 13.3: Vector plot options
244
• Slope (Maximum)
• Horizontal Displacement (Maximum)
• Curvature (Maximum)
• Horizontal Strain (Maximum)
Figure 13.4: Vector plot of maximum horizontal displacement
Figure 13.5: Invoking the contouring functions
245
• Ground Strain
In order to use the Advanced Index Selection option, the corresponding advanced option should
be enabled from the Utilities-Options menu function. The user then can specify a specific defor-
mation index to be contoured. Use of this option is only recommended for advanced users, as in
many cases components (partial values) of ground deformations are contoured.
In addition, the user can specify a number of predefined options when contouring that will help
produce a number of output plots in a few clicks of the mouse. For more detailed plot options the
user may apply Surfer functions directly.
• Contour based on Damage Thresholds: When this option is enabled, the program will instruct
Surfer to produce a single contour line at the default damage threshold for each deformation
index. The user should ensure that contours can be generated for the specified values.
• Specify Damage Thresholds: When this option is enabled, the user can override the default
damage threshold values for the indices to be plotted. The user should ensure that contours
can be generated for the specified values.
• Apply Fill Pattern: When this option is enabled, Surfer will apply a fill pattern to the contour
plot. More intense colors (e.g., red) correspond to the areas over the threshold limits, while
low intensity colors (e.g., green) correspond to the areas below the threshold limits. This
option is active only for plots employing damage threshold values.
Figure 13.6: Contour plot generation options
246
• Dense Contours: When this option is enabled, Surfer will generate a dense contour plot. This
option is not active for plots employing damage threshold values.
• Plot Mine Plan: When this option is enabled, Surfer will overlay a plot of the mine plan on
the contour plot.
• Plot Larger Labels: When this option is enabled, Surfer will increase the size of the labels
on the contour lines.
• Maximize Surfer Window: When this option is enabled, the Surfer window will be maximized
when the plot is generated.
• Long-Term Risk Analysis Options: This frame becomes visible only if the user has performed
the long-term risk analysis. Then the user can select the appropriate analysis step to display.
Figure 13.7 shows an example contour plot for subsidence on slopping terrain over a longwall
panel.
Notes
• When multiple indices are selected, multiple contour plots are generated and overlain. Plot
options discussed below apply to all contour plots.
• Surfer 8 or higher should be installed in the computer running SDPS.

For more details see: http://www.goldensoftware.com/
Figure 13.7: Subsidence contours over longwall panel
247
13.4.4 Three-Dimensional Images
The program can also create three-dimensional graphs. These graphs can only be generated if
deformations have been calculated on a grid. In the case of XYZ prediction points, external gridding
applications such as Surfer or Carlson Software can be used to grid the prediction points, prior to
calculations (Figure 13.8). An example of a 3-D representation of subsidence due to underground
mining is shown in Figure 4.35 on page 70.
Notes
The long-term risk analysis frame becomes visible only if the user has performed the long-term
risk analysis. Then the user can select the appropriate analysis step to display.
Figure 13.8: Three dimensional graph options
248
Chapter 14
References and Bibliography
References are grouped per subject, e.g., subsidence, pillar design, etc. In this respect, some refer-
ences may be repeated (i.e., listed in two or more categories). Also note that not all references are
cross-referenced in the text.
14.1 Subsidence References

1. Agioutantis, Z. and M. Karmis (2013), “Addressing the effect of sloping terrain on ground
movements due to underground mining”, Proceedings, Symposium on Environmental Con-
siderations in Energy Production, SME, April 14-18, 2013, Charleston, West Virginia, pp.
308-318.
2. Agioutantis, Z. and M. Karmis (2013), “Recent developments on surface ground strain cal-
culations due to underground mining in Appalachia”, Proceedings, 32nd International Con-
ference on Ground Control in Mining, July 2013, Morgantown, West Virginia, pp. 214-219.
3. Agioutantis, Z. M. Karmis, and L. Kirby (2013), “Application of subsidence prediction

methodologies for sizing barrier pillars for stream protection in Appalachia”, Proceedings,
Symposium on Environmental Considerations in Energy Production, SME, April 14-18,
2013, Charleston, West Virginia, pp. 319-335.
4. Agioutantis, Z. and M. Karmis (1988), “Developing improved methods of predicting surface

displacements due to underground mining through the integration of empirical indices into
numerical modeling”, Mining Science and Geotechnology, 7, pp. 133-148.
5. Agioutantis, Z. and M. Karmis (2002), “SDPS for Windows: an application for subsidence
prediction, optimum mine design and environmental control”, Proceedings, 7th Symposium
on Environmental Issues and Waste Management in Energy and Mineral Production, October
7-10, Cagliari, Italy.
6. Agioutantis, Z., M. Karmis and A. Jarosz (1988), “Prediction of surface subsidence and strain
in the Appalachian coalfields using numerical methods”, Proceedings, 7th Conference on
Ground Control in Mining, West Virginia University, Morgantown, West Virginia, August
3-5, pp. 95-100.
249
7. Allgaier, F.K. (1982), “Surface subsidence over longwall panels in the western United States,
monitoring program and preliminary results at the Deer Creek Mine, Utah”, USBM, IC 8896.
8. Allgaier, F.K. (1988), “Surface subsidence over longwall panels in the western United States
- final results at the Deer Creek Mine, Utah”, USBM, IC 9194.
9. Bhattacharya, S. and M.M. Singh (1985), “Development of subsidence damage criteria”,

Contract No. J5120121, OSMRE, U.S. Department of the Interior, 195 p.
10. Boone, S. (1996), “Ground-Movement-Related Building Damage”, Journal of Geotechnical

Engineering, November, pp. 886-896.
11. Bruhn, R.W., W.S. McCann, R.C. Speck and R.E. Gray (1982), “Damage to structures above
underground coal mines in the northern Appalachian coalfield”, 1st International Conference
on Stability in Underground Mining, Vancouver, Canada, pp. 1022-1042.
12. Budryk, W. and S. Knothe (1953), “Einfluss des Untertageabbaus auf die Erdoberflache vom
Gesichtpunkt der Sicherung der Objekte”, Bergakademie, 5, 59-62 (in German).
13. Conroy, P.J. and J.H. Gyarmaty (1982, “Planning subsidence monitoring programs over long-
wall panels”, Proceedings, State-of-the-Art in Ground Control in Longwall Mining and Min-
ing Subsidence, edited by Chugh, Y., pp. 225-233.
14. Fejes, A.J. (1986), “Surface subsidence over longwall panels in the Western United States,
monitoring program and final Results at the Price River Coal Co. No. 3 Mine, Utah”, USBM,
IC 9099.
15. Geddes, J. and D. Cooper (1962), “Structures in areas of mining subsidence”, The Structural
Engineer, pp. 79-93.
16. Gentry D.W. and J.F. Jr. Abel (1977), “Rock Mass Response To Mining Longwall Panel 4N,
York Canyon Mine”, Mining Engineering, August, pp. 273-280.
17. Hustrulid, W.A. (1976), “A review of Coal Pillar Strength Formulas”, Rock Mechanics 8,
pp. 115-145, Springer-Verlag.
18. Jarosz, A., M. Karmis and A. Sroka (1990), “Subsidence development with time - experi-
ences from longwall operations in the Appalachian coalfield”, International Journal of Min-
ing and Geological Engineering, Volume 8, Number 3, October, pp. 261-273.
19. Karmis, M. and Z. Agioutantis (2004), “A risk analysis subsidence approach for the design of
coal refuse impoundments overlying mine workings”, Proceedings, 8th International Sym-
posium on Environmental Issues and Waste Management, in Energy and Mineral Production
(SWEMP), May 17-20, 2004, Antalya, Turkey, pp. 205-210.
20. Karmis, M., A. Jarosz and Z. Agioutantis (1988), “An Integrated Surface Movement Mon-
itoring System for Undermined Areas”, Proceedings, VII International Congress on Mine
Surveying, Volume X, Leningrad, USSR, June 28-July 2, pp. 42-48.
250
21. Karmis, M., A. Jarosz and Z. Agioutantis (1989), “Predicting Subsidence with a Computer”,
Coal, Vol 26, No. 12, December, pp. 54-61.
22. Karmis, M., A. Jarosz, P. Schilizzi and Z. Agioutantis (1987), “Surface Deformation Char-
acteristics above Undermined Areas: Experiences from the Eastern United States”, Civil
Engineering Transactions, Vol CE29, No 2, The Institution of Engineers, Australia, April,
pp. 106-114.
23. Karmis, M., C. Haycocks and Z. Agioutantis (1992), “The prediction of ground movements
caused by mining”, Proceedings, 3rd Subsidence Workshop Due to Underground Mining,
Morgantown, West Virginia, June 1-4, pp. 1-9.
24. Karmis, M., J. Mastoris and Z. Agioutantis (1994), “Potential of the ’Damage Angle’ concept
for assessing surface impacts of underground mining”, Transactions, Society for Mining,
Metallurgy and Exploration, Inc., Vol. 296, pp. 1883-1886.
25. Karmis, M., Z. Agioutantis and A. Jarosz (1990), “Recent developments in the application of
the influence function method for ground movement predictions in the US”, Mining Science
and Geotechnology, Vol. 10, pp. 233-245.
26. Karmis, M., Z. Agioutantis and A. Jarosz (1990), “Subsidence prediction techniques in the
United States: A state-of-the-art review”, Mineral Resources Engineering, Vol. 3, No 3, pp.
197-210.
27. Karmis, M., Z. Agioutantis and K. Andrews (2008), “Enhancing mine subsidence prediction
and control methodologies”, Proceedings, 27th International Conference on Ground Control
in Mining, July 29-31, Morgantown, WV, pp. 131-136.
28. Knothe, S., (1953), “Rate of Advance and Ground Deformation”, Bergakademie, Vol. 5, No.
l2, pp. 513-518 (in German).
29. Knothe, S., (1957), “Observations of surface movements under influence of mining and their
theoretical interpretation”, Proceedings European Congress on Ground Movement, Univer-
sity of Leeds, Leeds, UK, Apr., pp. 210–218.
30. Luo, Y., S. Peng and B. Miller (2003), “Influences of longwall subsidence on a guyed steel
Tower - A Case Study”, 22nd International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Mor-
gantown, WV, pp. 360-366.
31. Marino, G.G. (1986), “Interactions between buildings and subsidence movements”, Proceed-
ings, 2nd Subsidence Workshop Due to Underground Mining, Morgantown, WV, pp. 163-
180.
32. National Coal Board (NCB) (1975), Subsidence Engineers’ Handbook.
33. Newman, D., Z. Agioutantis and M. Karmis (2001), “SDPS for Windows: An integrated
approach to ground deformation prediction”, 20th Conference on Ground Control in Mining,
Morgantown, West Virginia, August 7-9 2001, pp. 157-162.
251
34. O’Rourke T.D. and S.M. Turner (1979), “Longwall subsidence patterns: a review of ob-
served movements, controlling parameters, and empirical relationships”, Cornell University
Geotechnical Eng. Report to USBM, November.
35. O’Rourke T.D. and S.M. Turner (1981), “Empirical methods for estimating subsidence in US
coal fields”, Proceedings, 22nd US Symposium on Rock Mechanics, June 29 - July 2, 1981,
Cambridge, MA.
36. Singh, M. (1992), “Mine Subsidence”, SME Mining Engineering Handbook, SME Inc., Lit-
tleton, Colorado, vol. 1, pp. 938-971.
37. Triplett, T., G. Lin, W. Kane and R. Bennett (1992), “Prediction of coal mine subsidence and
implications for structural damage”, 3rd Subsidence Workshop Due to Underground Mining,
pp. 76-82.
38. VPI&SU, (1987), “Prediction of ground movements due to underground mining in the east-
ern United States coalfields”, Final Report, Office of Surface Mining, Reclamation and En-
forcement, U.S. Department of Interior, Grant No. J5140137, Volume I, 205 p., Volume II,
112 p.
14.2 Pillar Design References

1. Bieniawski, Z.T. (1992), “A Method Revisited: Coal Pillar Strength Formula Based on Field
Investigations”, Proceedings, Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and Design, USBM IC
9315, 1992, pp. 158-165.
2. Mark, C. (1990), “Pillar Design Methods for Longwall Mining”, USBM IC 9247, 53 p.
3. Peng, S.S. (1986), “Coal Mine Ground Control”, 2nd edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York,
pp. 237-264.
14.3 ALPS References

1. Colwell M., R. Frith and C. Mark (1999), “Calibration of the Analysis of Longwall Pillar
Stability (ALPS) for Australian Conditions”, Proceedings, 18th International Conference on
Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, pp. 282-290.
2. Mark C. (1990), “Pillar Design Methods for Longwall Mining”, USBM IC 9247, 53 p.
3. Mark C. (1992), “Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability (ALPS)–An Update”, Proceedings,

Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and Design, USBM IC 9315, pp. 238-249.
4. Mark C. (1999), “Empirical Methods for Coal Pillar Design”, Proceedings, 2nd International
Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and Design, Vail, CO, NIOSH IC 9448, pp. 145-154.
252
5. Mark C. and T.M. Barton (1997), “Pillar Design and Coal Strength”, Proceedings, New Tech-
nology for Ground Control in Retreat Mining, NIOSH Technology Transfer Seminar, NIOSH
IC 9446, pp. 49-59.
6. Mark C. and F.E. Chase (1997), “Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability”, Proceedings,
New Technology for Ground Control in Retreat Mining, NIOSH Technology Transfer Sem-
inar, NIOSH IC 9446, pp. 17-34.
7. Mark C. and G.M. Molinda (1996), “Rating Coal Mine Roof Strength from Exploratory Drill
Core”, Proceedings, 15th International Conference on Ground Control, Golden, CO, pp. 415-
428.
8. Mark C., F.E. Chase and G.M. Molinda (1994), “Design of Longwall Gate Entry Systems
Using Roof Classification”, New Technology for Longwall Ground Control, USBM, SP 94-
01, pp. 5-17.
9. Molinda G.M. and C. Mark (1994), “The Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR): A Practical Guide
for Rock Mass Classification in Coal Mines”, USBM, IC 9387, 83 p.
14.4 ARMPS References

1. Mark, C. (1992), “Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability: An Update”, Proceedings of the
2. Chase, F.E., R.K. Zipf and C. Mark (1994), “The Massive Collapse of Coal Pillars - Case His-
tories from the United States”, Proceedings, 13th Conference on Ground Control in Mining,
Morgantown, WV, pp. 69-80.
3. Mark, C., F.E. Chase and A. Campoli (1995), “Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability”,
Proceedings, 14th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV,
pp. 63-71.
4. Mark, C. and T.M. Barton (1996), “The Uniaxial Compressive Strength of Coal: Should it
be Used to Design Pillars?”, Proceedings, 15th International Conference on Ground Control,
Golden, CO, 18 p.
5. Mark, C. (1990), “Pillar Design Methods for Longwall Mining”, USBM IC 9247, 53 p.
6. Mark, C. and A.T. Iannacchione (1992), “Coal Pillar Mechanics: Theoretical Models and
Field Measurements Compared”, Proceedings, Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and De-
sign, USBM IC 9315, Santa Fe, NM, pp. 78-93.
14.5 AMSS References

1. Colwell, M., R. Frith and C. Mark (1999), “Calibration of the Analysis of Longwall Pillar
Stability (ALPS) for Australian Conditions”, Proceedings, 18th International Conference on
253
2. Colwell, M. and C. Mark (2005), “Analysis and Design of Rib Support (ADRS)– A rib sup-
port design methodology for Australian collieries”, Proceedings, 24th International Confer-
ence on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, pp. 12-22.
3. Chase, F.E., C. Mark and K.A. Heasley (2002), “Deep Cover Pillar Extraction in the US”,
Proceedings, 21st International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV,
pp. 68-80.
4. Ellenberger, J., F.E. Chase and C. Mark (2003), “Case Histories of Multiple Seam Coal Min-
ing to Advance Mine Design”, Proceedings, 22nd International Conference on Ground Con-
trol in Mining, Morgantown, WV, pp. 59-64.
5. Hosmer, D.W. and S. Lemeshow (2000), “Applied Logistic Regression”, Wiley, NY, 375 p.
6. Heasley, K.A. and Z. Agioutantis (2001), “LAMODEL - a boundary element program for
coal mine design”, Proceedings, 10th International Conference on Computer Methods and
Advances in Geomechanics, University of Arizona, Jan. 7-12, pp. 1679-1682.
7. Heasley, K. and O. Akinkugbe (2004), “A simple program for estimating multiple-seam in-
teractions”, SME Annual Meeting, Denver, CO, Feb. 23-25, Preprint No. 04-137.
8. Kendorski, F.S. (1993), “Effect of high-extraction coal mining on surface and ground waters”,
August 3-5, pp. 412-425.
9. Kendorski, F.S. (2006), “Effect of full-extraction underground mining on ground and sur-
face waters a 25-year retrospective”, Proceedings, 25th International Conference on Ground
Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, Aug. 1-3, pp. 425-429.
10. Mark, C. (1992), “Analysis of Longwall Pillar Stability (ALPS)–An Update”, Proceedings,
11. Mark, C. (1999), “Empirical methods for coal pillar design”, Proceedings, 2nd International
Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and Design, Vail, CO, NIOSH IC 9448, pp.145-154.
12. Mark, C. and T.M. Barton (1997), “Pillar design and coal strength”, Proceedings, New Tech-
nology for Ground Control in Retreat Mining, NIOSH Technology Transfer Seminar, NIOSH
IC 9446, pp. 49-59.
13. Mark, C. and F.E. Chase (1997), “Analysis of Retreat Mining Pillar Stability”, Proceedings,
New Technology for Ground Control in Retreat Mining, NIOSH Technology Transfer Sem-
inar, NIOSH IC 9446, pp. 17-34.
14. Mark, C., F.E. Chase and G.M. Molinda (1994), “Design of longwall gate entry systems using
roof classification”, Proceedings, New Technology for Longwall Ground Control, USBM
Technology Transfer Seminar, USBM SP 94-01, pp. 5-18.
15. Mark, C., L. McWilliams, D. Pappas and J. Rusnak (2004), “Spatial trends in rock strength
- Can they be determined from boreholes?”, Proceedings, 23rd International Conference on
254
16. Mark, C., G.M. Molinda and D.R. Dolinar (2001), “Analysis of Roof Bolt Systems”, Pro-
ceedings, 20th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV,
pp. 218-225.
17. Peng, S.S. and H.S. Chiang (1984), Longwall mining, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
18. Rusnak, J. and C. Mark (2000), “Using the Point Load Test to determine the uniaxial compres-
sive strength of coal measure rock”, Proceedings, 19th International Conference on Ground
Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, pp. 362-371.
19. Singh, M.M. and F.S. Kendorski (1981), “Strata disturbance prediction for mining beneath
surface water and waste impoundments”, Proceedings, 1st Conference on Ground Control in
Mining, Morgantown, WV, July 27-29, pp. 76-89.
20. StataCorp, L.P. (2005), “Stata Statistical Software, Release 9”, College Station, TX.
21. Stemple, D.T. (1956), “A study of problems encountered with multiple seam mining in the
eastern US.”, Bull. VA. Poly. Inst., 49(5):65.
14.6 AHSM References

1. Mark C. and T.P. Mucho (1994), “Longwall Mine Design for Control of Horizontal Stress”,
Proceedings, New Technology for Longwall Ground Control, USBM Technology Transfer
Seminar, USBM SP 94-01, pp. 53-76.
2. Mark C., T.P. Mucho and D. Dolinar (1998), “Horizontal Stress and Longwall Headgate
Ground Control”, Mining Engineering, January, pp. 61-68.
14.7 ARBS References

1. Bigby, D.N., J.W. Cassie, and A.R. Ledger (1992), “Absolute stress and stress change mea-
surements in British Coal Measures”, Proceedings of the ISRM Symposium (Eurock 1992),
British Geotechnical Society, pp. 390-395.
2. Conway, C.C. (1948), “Roof support with suspension rods”, Min. Cong. Jour., June, pp. 32-
37.
3. Damberger, H.H., W.J. Nelson and H.F. Krausse (1980), “Effect of geology on roof stability
in room-and-pillar mines in the Herrin (No. 6) Coal of Illinois”, Proceedings, 1st Conference
on Ground Control Problems in the Illinois Coal Basin, Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois
University at Carbondale, pp. 14-32.
4. Gale, W.J., M.W. Fabjanczyk and R.J. Guy (1992), “Optimization of reinforcement design
of coal mine roadways”, Proceedings, 11th International Conference on Ground Control in
Mining, Wollongong, New South Wales, Australia: University of Wollongong, pp. 272-279.
255
5. Gerdeen, J.C., V.W. Snyder, G.L. Viegelahn and J. Parker (1979), “Design criteria for roof
bolting plans using fully grouted non-tensioned bolts to reinforce bedded mine roof”, US
Department of the Interior, USBM, OFR 46-80, Vols. III-IV.
6. Karabin, G.J. and W.L. Debevec (1976), “Comparative evaluation of conventional and resin
bolting system”, MESA, IR 1033.
7. Mark, C. and T.P. Mucho (1994), “Longwall mine design for control of horizontal stress”,
8. Mark, C. (2000), “Design of Roof Bolt Systems”, Proceedings, New Technology for Coal
Mine Roof Support, NIOSH Open Industry Briefing, Mark, C., D.R. Dolinar and R. Tuch-
man, eds., NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 111-132.
9. Mark, C., G.M. Molinda, A.P. Schissler and W.J. Wuest (1994), “Evaluating roof control
in underground coal mines with the coal mine roof rating”, Proceedings, 13th International
Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, University of West Virginia,
pp. 252-260.
10. Mazzoni, R.A., G.J. Karabin, and J.A. Cybukski (1996), “A trouble-shooting guide for roof
support systems”, US Department of Labor, Mine Safety and Health Administration, IR 1237,
101 pp.
11. Molinda, G.M. and C. Mark (1994), “Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR): A Practical rock
mass rating for coal mines”, US Department of the Interior, USBM, Pittsburgh, PA, IC 9387.
12. Molinda, G.M., C. Mark, E.R. Bauer, D.R. Babich and D.M. Pappas (1998), “Factors influ-
encing intersection stability in US Coal mines”, Proceedings, 17th International Conference
on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, University of West Virginia, pp. 267-275.
13. Molinda, G.M., C. Mark and D.R. Dolinar (2000), “Assessing coal mine roof stability through
roof fall analysis”, Proceedings, New Technology for Coal Mine Roof Support, NIOSH Open
Industry Briefing, Mark, C., D.R. Dolinar and R. Tuchman, eds., NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 53-72.
14. Pappas D.M., E.R. Bauer and C. Mark (2000), “Roof and rib fall accidents and statistics: A
recent profile”, Proceedings, New Technology for Coal Mine Roof Support, NIOSH Open
Industry Briefing, NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 3-22.
15. Peng, S.S. (1998), “Roof bolting adds stability to weak strata”, Coal Age Magazine, Decem-
ber, pp. 32-38.
16. Scott, J.J. (1992), “Roof bolting in mining-USA”, Proceedings, Norsk JordogFjellteknisk
Forbuns, Oslo, Norway, November 27, 13 pp.
17. Unal, E. (1984), “Empirical approach to calculate rock loads in coal mine roadways”, Pro-
University of West Virginia, pp. 232-246.
256
14.8 CMRR References
1. Barczak, T.M. (2000), “Optimizing secondary roof support with the NIOSH support tech-
nology optimization program (STOP)”, Proceedings, New Technology for Coal Mine Roof
Support, Mark, C., D.R. Dolinar and R. Tuchman, eds., NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 151-164.
2. Barton, N.R., R. Lien and J. Lunde (1974), “Engineering classification of rock masses for
the design of tunnel support rock mechanics”, vol. 6, pp. 189-236.
3. Beerkircher, M.D. (1994), “Monterey Coal Company’s longwall project”, Proceedings, IL

Mining Institute, Collinsville, IL, pp. 85-93.
4. Bieniawski, Z.T. (1989), “Engineering rock mass classifications”, Wiley, New York, 251 p.
5. Bieniawski, Z.T. (1973), “Engineering classification of jointed rock masses”, Transactions

of the South African Institution of Civil Engineers, vol. 15, No. 12, pp. 335-344.
6. Bieniawski, Z.T. (1988), “Rock mass classification as a design aid in tunnelling”, Tunnels
and Tunnelling, pp. 19-23.
7. Buddery, P.S. and D.C. Oldroyd, (1992), “Development of a roof and floor classification
applicable to collieries”, Paper 35, Proceedings, Eurock ’92 Conference (Thomas Telford,
London, pub.), pp. 197-202.
8. Butcher, R.J. (2001), “Application of the coal mine roof rating system in South African col-
lieries”, Proceedings, 20th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, (Peng
S.§. and C. Mark, eds) Morgantown, WV, pp. 317-321.
9. Colwell, M., R. Frith and C. Mark (1999), “Calibration of the analysis of longwall pillar
stability (ALPS) for Australian conditions”, Proceedings, 18th International Conference on
10. Damberger, H.H., W.J. Nelson and H.F. Krausse (1980), “Effect of geology on roof stability
in room-and-pillar mines in the Herrin (no. 6) coal of Illinois”, Proceedings, 1st Conference
Ground Control Problems in the Illinois Coal Basin, Univ. of Southern Illinois, Carbondale,
IL, pp. 14-32.
11. Deere D.U. and R.P. Miller (1996), “Engineering classification and index properties for intact
rock”, Technical Report No. AFWL-TR-65-116, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Dec.
12. DeMarco M.J. (1984), “Yielding pillar gateroad design considerations for longwall mining”,
13. Ealy, D.L., R.D. Mazurak and E.L. Langrand (1979), “A geological approach for predicting
unstable roof and floor conditions in advance of mining”, Mining Congress Journal, pp. 7-23.
257
14. Ferm, J.C., R.A. Melton, G.D. Cummins, F. Mather, L. McKenna, C. Muir and G.E. Norris
(1978), “A study of roof falls in underground mines on the Pocahontas #3 seam southern West
Virginia and southwestern Virginia”, USBM Contract H0230028, Department of Geology
University of South Carolina.
15. Ferm, J.C. and G.C. Smith (1981), “A guide to cored rocks in the Pittsburgh basin”, Dept. of
Geology, University of KY, Lexington, and the Univ. of SC, Columbia, 109 p.
16. Forgeron, S., C. Mark and D.J. Forrester, (2001), “Standardization of geological and geome-
chanical assessment at underground coal mines in Canada”, CIM Bulletin, pp. 83-90.
17. Hoek, E. (1977), “Rock mechanics laboratory testing in the context of a consulting engineer-
ing organization”, Intl. J. Rock Mech. and Mng. Sci., vol. 22, pp. 93-101.
18. Grau, R.H. III and E.R. Bauer (1997), “Ground control worker safety during extended cut
mining”, Proceedings, 16th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Mor-
gantown, WV, pp. 283-288.
19. Harwood, C., M. Karmis, C. Haycocks and J. Luo (1996), “Optimizing secondary tailgate
support selection”, Proceedings, 15th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining,
Golden, CO, pp. 469-476.
20. Hoelle, J. (2003), “Analysis of unsupported roof spans for highwall mining at Moura coal
mine”, Proceedings, COAL 2003, 4th Australasian Coal Operators Conference, Wollongong,
Australia, pp. 50-62.
21. Hylbert, D.K. (1978), “The classification, evaluation, and projection of coal mine roof rocks”,
Mining Engineering, vol. 30, no. 12, pp. 1667-1676.
22. International Society for Rock Mechanics (ISRM) Commission on Testing Methods (1985),
“Suggested method for determining point load strength (revised version)”, Intl. J. Rock Mech.
Min. Sci. and Geomech. Abstr. 22, pp. 51-60.
23. International Society for Rock Mechanics (ISRM) (1982), “Suggested methods for rock char-
acterization, testing, and monitoring”, Pergamon Press, London, 1982.
24. Kane, W.F. (1985), “Geologic and geotechnical controls on the stability of coal mine entries”,
Ph.D. thesis, Virginia Polytechnic Institute, Blacksburg, VA, 303 p.
25. Karabin, G.J. and M.A. Evanto (1999), “Experience with the boundary element method of
numerical modeling to resolve complex ground control problems”, Proceedings, 2nd Inter-
national Workshop on Coal Pillar Mechanics and Design, NIOSH, IC 9448, pp. 89-114.
26. Karmis, M. and W. Kane (1984), “An analysis of the geomechanical factors influencing coal
mine roof stability in Appalachia”, 2nd International Conference on Stability in Underground
Mining, Lexington, KY, pp. 311-328.
27. Kester, W.M. and Y.P. Chugh (1980), “Premining investigations and their use in planning
ground control in the Illinois coal basin”, Proceedings, 1st Conference Ground Control Prob-
lems in the Illinois Coal Basin, pp. 33-43.
258
28. Lattila, J.W., J.J. van Wijk, E. Wevell and D. Neal (2002), “Evaluation of the impact splitting
technique used for predicting geotechnical conditions in underground coal mines”, Proceed-
ings, SANIRE 2002 Symposium, South African National Institute of Rock Engineering, 11 p.
29. Mark, C. (1999a), “Application of the coal mine roof rating (CMRR) to extended cuts”,
Mining Engineering, pp. 52-56.
30. Mark, C. (1999b), “Ground control in South African coal mines - A US perspective”, Pro-
pp. 186-193.
31. Mark, C. and T.M. Barczak (2000), “Fundamentals of Coal Mine Roof Support”, Proceed-
ings, New Technology for Coal Mine Roof Support, NIOSH Open Industry Briefing, Mark,
C., D.R. Dolinar and R. Tuchman, eds., NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 23-42.
32. Mark, C., F.E. Chase and G.M. Molinda (1994), “Design of longwall gate entry systems using
roof classification”, Proceedings, New Technology for Longwall Ground Control, USBM
Technology Transfer Seminar, USBM SP 94-01, pp. 5-18.
33. Mark, C., G.M. Molinda and D.R. Dolinar (2001), “Analysis of roof bolt systems (ARBS)”,
pp. 218-225.
34. Mark, C., G.M. Molinda, A.P. Schissler and W.J. Wuest (1994), “Evaluating roof control in
underground coal mines using the coal mine roof rating”, Proceedings, 13th Conference on
35. Mark, C. and G.M. Molinda (1996), “Rating coal mine roof strength from exploratory drill
core”, Proceedings, 15th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgan-
town, WV, pp. 415-428.
36. Mark, C. and T.P. Mucho (1994), “Longwall mine design for control of horizontal stress”,
37. Marshall, S. (1984), “Composite geologic and linear mapping for defining safe, high produc-
tivity mining in the Appalachian coal fields”, 15th Annual Institute of Coal Mining, Health,
Safety, and Research, Blacksburg, VA, 10 p.
38. Martin, E.M., F. Carr and G. Hendon (1988), “Strata control advances at Jim Walter Re-
sources”, Proceedings, 7th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgan-
town, WV, pp. 66-75.
39. Milici, R.C., T.M. Gathright, B.W. Miller and M.R. Gwin (1982), “Geologic factors related to
coal mine roof falls in Wise County, Virginia”, Appalachian Regional Commission Contract
No. CO-7232-80-I-302-0206, 103 p.
40. Moebs, N.N. and J.C. Ferm (1982), “The relation of geology to mine roof conditions in the
Pocahontas No.3 coalbed”, USBM IC 8864, 8 p.
259
41. Moebs, N.N. and R.M. Stateham (1985), “The diagnosis and reduction of mine roof failure”,
Coal Mining.
42. Molinda, G.M. and C. Mark (1994), “Coal Mine Roof Rating (CMRR): A practical rock
mass classification for coal mines”, US Department of the Interior, USBM, Pittsburgh, PA,
RI 9387, 83 p.
43. Molinda, G.M. and C. Mark (1996), “Testing the Strength of Coal Mine Roof Rocks”, USBM
IC 9444, 36 p.
44. Molinda, G.M. (2003), “Geologic hazards and roof stability in coal mines”, NIOSH IC 9466,
33 p.
45. Molinda, G.M., C. Mark and D.R. Dolinar (2000) “Assessing coal mine roof stability through
roof fall analysis”, Proceedings, New Technology for Coal Mine Roof Support, NIOSH Open
Industry Briefing, Mark, C., D.R. Dolinar and R. Tuchman, eds., NIOSH IC 9453, pp. 53-72.
46. Newman, D.A. and Z.T. Bieniawski (1986), “Modified version of the geomechanics classi-
fication for entry design in underground coal mines”, Transactions, Society of Mining Engi-
neering AIME, vol. 280, pp. 2134-2138.
47. Oyler, D.C., R. Frith, D.R. Dolinar and C. Mark (1998), “International experience with long-
wall mining into pre-driven rooms”, Proceedings, 17th International Conference on Ground
48. Pappas D. and C. Mark (1993), “Load-Deformation Properties of Coal Mine Gob Materials”,
USBM, RI 9458, 39 p.
49. Priest, S.D. and J.A. Hudson (1976), “Discontinuity spacings in rock”, International Journal
of Rock Mechanics and Mining Sciences, Vol 13, pp. 135-148.
50. Rusnak, J. and C. Mark (2000), “Using the point load test to determine the uniaxial compres-
sive strength of coal measure rock”, Proceedings, 19th International Conference on Ground
51. Schaffer, J.F. (1985), “Roof fall prediction at an Illinois underground mine”, Proceedings,
2nd Conference on Ground Control Problems in the Illinois Coal Basin, Southern Illinois
University, pp. 55-63.
52. Sickler, R.A. (1986), “Engineering classification of shales”, Proceedings, 5th International
Conference on Ground Control in Mining, Morgantown, WV, June, pp. 221-233.
53. Sinha, A. and V. Venkateswarlu (1986), “Geomechanics classification for support selection in
Indian coal mines - case studies”, Proceedings, 5th International Congress of the International
Association of Engineering Geology, Vol. 1, 1986, pp. 159-164.
54. Stingelin, R.W., J.R. Kern and S.L. Morgan (1979), “Premining identification of hazards
associated with coal mine roof measures”, USBM Contract #JO177038, HRB-Singer, Inc.
State College, PA, 216 p.
260
55. Van der Merwe, J.N. (2001), “In situ investigation into the causes of falls of roof in South
African collieries”, Proceedings, 20th International Conference on Ground Control in Mining
(Peng, S.S. and C. Mark, eds), Morgantown, WV, pp. 105-118.
56. Venkateswarlu, V., A.K. Ghose and N.M. Raju (1989), “Rock-mass classification for design
of roof supports - a statistical evaluation of parameters”, Mining Science and Technology, 8,
Elsevier Science Publishers B.V., Amsterdam - Printed in the Netherlands, pp. 97-107.
57. Williamson, D.A. (1984), “Unified rock classification system”, Bulletin of the Association
of Engineering Geologists, Vol. 21, No. 3, pp. 345-354.
58. Wuest, W., M.J. DeMarco and C. Mark (1996), “Review of applications of the coal mine
roof rating (CMRR) for ground control planning and operations”, Mining Engineering, pp.
49-55.
59. Zhou, Y., C. Haycocks and W. Wu (1988), “Geomechanics classifications for multiple seam
mining”, SME Annual Meeting, January 25-28, Phoenix, AR, 10 p.
261
262
Appendix A
Program Reference
This section includes a detailed reference for the menu options for each program module.
A.1 The Profile Function Module

A.1.1 The File Menu
Use the File menu option to access various file management operations such as:
Create New Files

Use the New option to erase the existing data set or project (if any) from memory and create a
new (blank) data set or project. All related entries are set to their initial values. The program will
prompt whether to save the current data set to disk. When a data set is saved on the disk, it becomes
a project file. The term file is used to define either a data set in memory or data on the disk.
However, if data are not saved, the project file will only contain the previous version of data
and/or results.
Open Existing Files

Use the Open option to load a file (data set) from the disk into program memory. Steps to follow:
• Select the Open option from the File menu. The program displays a listing of the available
files in the current data directory.
• Optionally, select a different drive or directory using the mouse or the cursor control keys.
• Select or enter a filename. If the file extension is omitted, the default extension will be
appended.
• If the current data set is not saved, the program will prompt the user whether to save changes
or not before discarding the current data set.
263
Save Files
Use the Save option to save an existing project file (data set) to the drive or directory from which
it was originally loaded. Any changes that were made, since the last time the file was saved, will
be saved on the disk. The filename stays the same and the file remains in memory. Execute the
following steps:
• Select the Save option from the File menu.
• If the file has never been saved before, the program will automatically execute the Save As
option, which prompts for a filename before saving it (see below).
Save Files As
Use the Save As option to save a file and give it a new name. Use Save when a name has already
been selected. Execute the following steps:
• Select the Save As option from the File menu. The program displays a listing of the available
• Optionally, select a different drive or directory.
• Select or enter a filename.
• If the file exists, the program will prompt whether to overwrite the existing file.
Print Files
Use the Print option to print the current data set (project file) from program memory to the printer.
Execute the following steps:
• Select the Print option from the File menu. The program displays a preview of the output on
the screen.
• Optionally, select to copy the output to the clipboard or to send the output to the printer
(Print).
• When printing, select any available windows printer to complete printing.
This operation does not send any control characters to the printer. All output is ASCII text. All
printed text will appear in the default printer font. The default values for paper margins are:
• left margin = 1 inch
• top margin = 1 inch
• bottom margin = 1 inch
264
Browse Text Files
Use the Browse option to view a text (ASCII) file in a specified directory. Note the following:
• Both an internal or an external browser can be used to browse such files. No editing is allowed
during browsing using the internal browser.
• Use the pattern field to specify a file pattern (e.g., *.txt). The file window will be reset to
conform to the specified pattern. The default pattern is *.*.
• More than one patterns can be applied using “;” as delimiter (e.g., *.txt;*.dxf).
• Use the Set Font command button to specify the type and size of font for the displayed text
in the internal browser. These settings are saved in the module.INI file.
• Use the cursor control keys to move within the browse window.
• If an external ASCII viewer is used (e.g., NOTEPAD.EXE) as specified in the Utilities-

Settings form, the maximum file size to browse is set by the limits of the external browser.
• The internal browser has a limit of approximately 25000 characters.
Exit the Program

Use the Exit option when ready to exit this program and return to the operating system or the
invoking program. The program will prompt to save the current file to disk, if not already saved.
A.1.2 The Edit Menu

Use the Edit menu option to access various data input, data editing operations and data graphing
operations such as:
Project Description
This is an arbitrary 300 character description of the model being generated. It is suggested to make
this a fairly detailed description of the specifics of the input file. This text may be a single line of
characters or may contain carriage return characters. The user can also set the type of units that
will be used in the current project. The program is designed to use two different sets of units: ft
and m.
Project Parameters
The profile function method uses data that describe mine geometry and overburden characteristics
to generate a profile of surface subsidence due to underground mining. The formulation assumes
uniform excavation conditions and calculates subsidence for each half-panel. The following pa-
rameters are necessary for the calculations:
• Subsidence Parameters: These options include:
265
– The panel type: A longwall or a room-and-pillar mining system can be selected. If a
longwall system is selected, the extraction ratio input field is disabled and the extraction
ratio is internally assumed 100%.
– The panel width: The least panel dimension should be specified as panel width.
– The panel depth (depth of cover or overburden depth): The depth of cover to the top of
the seam should be specified.
– The extraction thickness (seam height, mining height): The term extraction thickness
reflects the total thickness mined, not just the seam thickness.
– The extraction ratio: This parameter can only be specified for room-and-pillar panels.
The lower limit currently accepted is 75%.
– The percent hardrock in the overburden (%HR): This parameter can be determined by
calculating the % of competent strata in the overburden (e.g., limestone, sandstone beds,
etc.)
– The surface point spacing: The spacing of the surface points (in length units) should
be entered. This option may be selected if calculated values need to be compared to
measured subsidence values.
– Auto surface point spacing: If this option is enabled, the spacing of the surface points
will be automatically calculated.
– The prediction mode: This parameter specifies the type of prediction equation to be
used. The conservative equation gives an envelop line, while the average equation
gives a prediction which is based on the statistical average of the database.
– The definition of zero subsidence: These parameters are used to define the point to be
considered as point of zero subsidence. This can be defined either as a percentage of
the maximum subsidence value or as a fixed value (ft or m). The angle of draw may be
calculated based on these values.
• Output options: These options include:
– Results mode: This option allows the user to select whether to the results in the form
of graph (Display Graph) or in the form of a table (Display Table). The default Results
Mode may be set through the Profile Function Program Options.
– Graph mode: This option is enabled only when the Display Graph option is selected
and allows the user to select whether the graph will display only one curve at a time
(Single Curve) or the graph engine will allow overlaying of profiles (Append Curve) up
to the maximum number specified in the graph options form. The default graph mode
may be set through the Profile Function Program Options.
– Show angles from rib: This option is enabled only when the Display Table option is
selected and allows the user to select whether the angles from the rib to each surface
point on the surface will be calculated. This is an indirect way to calculate the angle of
draw, where the user makes the choice of the cutoff (zero subsidence) point.
– Plot angle of draw: This option is enabled only when the Display Graph option is
selected; it allows the user to select whether the angle of draw corresponding to each
266
subsidence curve will be plotted on the graph. Note that this option is automatically
disabled when one or more curves are already plotted. In other words, the user can not
select or deselect this option in the middle of a graphing session. To enable the option,
either clear the current graph or close the graph window and recreate the last graph.
A.1.3 Graphing the Results

The options presented below apply to more than one modules of the SDPS suite.
Graph options
The user can set the basic graph formatting parameters such as:
• The graph title: The graph title is a text string placed over the graph.
• The graph X-Axis title: The X-Axis title is a text string placed below the X-Axis of the graph.
• The graph Y-Axis title: The Y-Axis title is a text string placed to the left of the Y-Axis of the
graph.
• The graph style: Three graph styles are available: lines, symbols, lines and symbols.
• The grid style: Four grid styles are available: Horizontal lines, vertical lines, horizontal and
vertical lines, no grid lines.
• The maximum number of curves: The user can specify the maximum number of curves that
can be overlaid on the graph. When this number is exceeded (in the Append Curve mode)
the program will instruct the user to clear the graph before proceeding.
• The curve legend: This option enables or disables the legend box in the graph. When this
option is enabled, the combination of a scroll box and a text box allows the user to modify
the default legend titles for all graphs on the screen.
• Symbol size: With this scroll box, the user can set the size of the symbols used by the graph
object. The scroll box is enabled only for a graph type of symbols or lines and symbols.
• Options: There are two default parameter options: a) to set the default parameters (e.g.,
graph title, X-Axis title, etc.) every time the graph options form is invoked, and b) to set the
format parameters to used in the previous graphing session. These values are saved in the
corresponding module.INI file.
Display Graph
This form is used to display a graph generated by the calling program. The menu options available
are:
• File-Export to Excel: This option saves the data in the graph in a space or tab delimited file.
This option is not available in all modules.
267
• File-Print: This option prints the graph to the default printer.
• File-Exit: This option clears the graph and closes the graph form.
• Edit-Copy: This option copies the current graph object to the clipboard for use in other ap-
plications.
• Options-Point ID: This allows the user to click on a point a curve on the graph and the
coordinates of this point will be displayed in the appropriate boxes.
• Options-Basic Options: This option loads the graph options form which includes basic graph
formatting options.
Notes
• Command buttons available on some forms are specific to each module and are usually self
explanatory.
• Graphics support is provided by ComponentOne Graphics, which is an independent graph
control not included in the Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 package.
A.1.4 The Utilities Menu

Use the Utilities menu option to access various program options such as:
Settings
This form is used to define a number of default parameters and settings for the program (applies to
more than one modules):
• Default units
– The user can set the default units (English or metric) to be used in each new project file.
This setting can be adjusted for each project through the Project description form. This
setting is saved in the module.INI file.
• Data file options
– Default file extension for data files: This setting is the default 3-letter extension used
in the Open and Save dialog boxes in the File Menu. This setting is saved in the mod-
ule.INI file.
– Path: This setting is the default path used in the Open and Save dialog boxes in the File
Menu. This setting is saved in the module.INI file.
• Miscellaneous Options
– Show disclaimer at start-up: This parameter controls whether the disclaimer message
will be displayed when loading the program. This setting is saved in the module.INI
file.
268
– Maximize main menu at start-up: This parameter controls whether the main menu win-
dow will be maximized when loading the program. This setting is saved in the mod-
ule.INI file.
– Keep recent file List: This parameter controls whether the program will keep up to four
(4) recently accessed data files (opened or saved) as menu items in the File Menu. This
setting is saved in the module.INI file.
– Reminder of annual updates: This parameter controls whether the program will prompt
the user to check for an update a year or more after the current version has been issued.
This setting is saved in the module.INI file.
– Display command history Window: This parameter controls whether the program will
display recently executed commands (and their resulting actions). This setting is saved
in the module.INI file.
– Enable toolbar: This parameter controls whether the main menu toolbar will be enabled
when viewing the main menu. This setting is saved in the module.INI file.
– Font type and size in command history window: This button sets the type and size of
font used in the command history window. This setting is enabled only if the Display
Command History Window option is enabled. This setting is saved in the module.INI
file.
– Short names in file list: This parameter controls whether short or full (i.e., including the
filepath) filenames will be displayed in the last filename list.
– Load last input file: This parameter controls whether the last edited project file will be
automatically loaded when the program starts.
– Copy example files: This parameter controls whether copies of the example files avail-
able in the installation directory will be copied over to the personal directory (home
directory) of each user when the program starts.
• External Viewer: The user can set the application name of an external ASCII viewer for
viewing reports and other ASCII files generated by the program. The default viewer is set to
the NOTEPAD.EXE program supplied with the windows operating system. Note that prior to
Windows2000, NOTEPAD.EXE could only edit / display files up to 64K. Alternate viewers
include the Ultraedit editor, the Textpad or the Notepad++ editor. This setting is saved in the
module.INI file.
Options
This form is used to define a number of default parameters and options pertaining specifically to
the Profile Function Method Module. Each module has different options. For the Profile Function
Module, these options include:
• General
– Load the input form Input Screen on File Open: This option will load the main parameter
input screen when the user selects File - Open (filename) or File - New.
269
– Print Module Version Information: Use this option to enable printing the current version
information for the module on all output generated by this program.
– Warn user when input data outside usual range: When this option is enabled, warning
messages will be issued if input data are outside usual range. This option does not affect
data that exceed absolute limits.
– Do not Ask if Microsoft Office is Installed: If this option is not enabled, every time
the user tries to export the data to Microsoft Excel, the program will issue a warning
message.
• Default settings
– Default “Zero” Subsidence Mode: The user can select either Percent of Smax or Value.
Each new project will default to this option, although the user may change it.
– Default Values for “Zero” Subsidence: The values of “zero” subsidence should be en-
tered either as a percentage or as value for both English and metric units. Each new
project will default to these values, although the user may change it.
– Default Results Mode: This option will set the default results mode in the main param-
eter input screen (display graph or display table)
– Default Graph Mode: This option will set the default graph mode in the main parameter
input screen (append curve or single curve)
– Show Angles from the Rib: This option will set the default option for displaying (or not)
angles from the rib when results are shown in table form.
– Plot Angles of Draw: This option will set the default option for plotting an angle of
draw when graphing the calculated profile.
• Advanced
– Create a file association: Use this option to associate the current extension for a project
file, e.g., .PRF with the Profile Function Program. This feature is not invoked during
installation, since it may interfere with other extension associations.
Unit Conversions
This utility can be used to convert between English and metric units for five types of units (applies
to more than one modules):
• Length: Conversion between feet, inches, meters and centimeters is supported.
• Load: Conversion between lbsF (pounds force), tonsF (tonnes force), kN (kiloNewtons), MN
(MegaNewtons) and kips (kilopounds) is supported.
• Pressure: Conversion between psi (pounds per square inch), ksi (kilopounds per square inch),
psf (pounds per square foot), Pa (Pascals) and MPa (MegaPascals) is supported. 1
1
1 Pa = 1 Newton per square meter
270
• Stress (Pressure) Gradient: Conversion between psi/ft (psi per foot), psi/in (psi per inch),
MPa/m (MegaPascal per meter) and Pa/m (Pascal per meter) is supported.
• Load Gradient: Conversion between lbs/ft (pounds per foot), lbs/in (pounds per inch), kN/m
(kiloNewton per meter) and MN/m (MegaNewton per meter) is supported.
File Conversions
This utility can be used to convert a loaded project file between English and metric units (applies
to more than one modules).
Other Menu Options

1. Clear History Window (applies to more than one modules): This option clears the history
(activity) window.
2. Close/Restore History Window (applies to more than one modules): This option closes or
restores the history (activity) window according to the current window status.
3. Copy History Window (applies to more than one modules): This option copies the contents of
the history window to the clipboard. You can then paste them to any text handling program
for further processing.
271
A.2 The Influence Function Module
A.2.1 The File Menu
Create New Files

Use the New option to load a blank data set into program memory. Creating a new project loads
resets the default values for the type of mine plan, prediction points, units and overburden infor-
mation. Creating a new mine plan, resets the default values for the mine plan. Similarly, creating a
new set of prediction points, resets the defaults values for the set. This function has three options:
• Create New Project Files

• Create New Mine Plan Files
• Create New Prediction Point Files
Open Existing Files

Use the open option to load a file (data set) from the disk into program memory. Opening a project
loads the mine plan, prediction point and overburden information from a single file. Opening a
mine plan loads just the mine plan geometry from a file. Similarly, opening the prediction points,
opens just the prediction point geometry from a file. These last two features are very useful when
creating sets of project files based on similar mine plans, but with different surface topography,
or when using the same surface topography to create project files with different mine plans. The
Surface Grid file option is used when scattered surface points are selected, but a surface grid should
be used for slope factor or ground strain calculations. This function has four options:
• Open Project Files

• Open Mine Plan Files
• Open Prediction Point Files
• Open Surface Grid Files
The steps below detail the usage of this option:

• Select the Open option from the File menu. The program displays a listing of the available
• Optionally, select a different drive or directory using the mouse or the cursor control keys.
• Select or enter a filename. If the file extension is omitted, the default extension will be
appended.
• If the current data set is not saved, the program will prompt whether to save changes or not
before discarding the current data set.
272
Save Files and Save Files As
Use the Save option to save an existing file (data set) to the drive or directory from which it was
originally loaded. Any changes that were made, since the last time the file was saved, will be saved
on the disk. The filename stays the same and the file remains in memory. Saving a project saves
the mine plan, prediction point and overburden information in a single file. Saving a mine plan
saves just the mine plan geometry in a file. Similarly, saving the prediction points, saves just the
prediction point geometry in a file. These last two features are very useful when creating sets of
project files based on similar mine plans but with different surface topography, or when using the
same surface topography to create project files with different mine plans. This function has four
options:
• Save Project Files
• Save Mine Plan Files
• Save Prediction Point Files
• Save Surface Grid Files
Additional information for this option is provided below:
• Use the Save As option to save an existing file (data set) under a new filename specification.
• If the file has never been saved using the Save option automatically displays the Save As
dialogue box, which prompts for a filename before saving it.
Import Data
Use the File - Import option to import either an SDPS project created by SDPS version 4.x software
or import SDPS components (e.g., mine plans and sets of prediction points) from other sources,
mainly AutoCAD files. The import form (for SDPS components) has the following options:
• Import a mine plan from an AutoCAD DXF files: Note that importing will always result in a
polygonal mine plan. The user should specify the following:
– The layer names of active and hidden (not-active) entities. Default layer names are
PANELS for extraction panels and PILLARS for pillars.
– The type of the extracted area (longwall, high extraction room-and-pillar or low extrac-
tion room-and-pillar).
– Whether to import elevations from the AutoCAD file or to use an average elevation as
specified in the import form.
– The subsidence parameters (subsidence factor or percent hardrock) associated with ev-
ery point in each imported parcel.
– Whether to apply a scale factor to the coordinates imported from the AutoCAD file.
– The thickness for every point in each imported parcel.
273
– Whether to append the data to the existing set or start a new set.
• Import prediction points from an AutoCAD DXF file: The user should specify the following:
– The layer names of active and hidden (not-active) entities. The default layer name is
POINTS.
– Whether to import elevations from the AutoCAD file or to use an average elevation as
specified in the import form.
– Whether to apply a scale factor to the coordinates imported from the AutoCAD file.
– Whether to append the data to the existing set or start a new set.
• Import prediction points from an XYZ (ASCII) file: The XYZ points option will import an
XYZ ASCII data file as a scattered surface point set.
– The data can be either space-delimited or comma-delimited.

– The program will preview the data file and try to determine the number of header (text
lines), if any, as well as the number of columns in the data set.
• Import a set of prediction points from a Surfer grid file (ASCII): The Grid from Surfer option
will import a grid of surface points.
– The Surfer grid file should be in a DOS format and saved in ASCII. Surfer provides the
option to convert a binary grid file to an ASCII grid file.
– No options are needed for this function.
– All information will be retrieved from the grid file header.
• Import a set of prediction points from a Carlson Software grid file: The grid from Carlson
Software option will import a grid of surface points.
– No options are needed for this function. All information will be retrieved from the grid
file header.
• Import points and/or panels and/or pillars directly from AutoCAD 2000 DWG files: This
selection invokes a new form with the following options:
– Import points from contours: The user should specify the following:
* The file name of the AutoCAD file (DWG file) that holds the data. The program
will read the file and import the layer names.
* The layer names of the CONTOURS as they can be selected from the combo box.
* The entity type for the contour lines. Here only two options are supported: LW-
POLYLINE and 3DPOLYLINE.
* Whether to append the data to the existing set or start a new set.
– Import mine plan: The user should specify the following:
* The file name of the AutoCAD file (DWG file) that holds the data. The program
will read the file and import the layer names.
274
* The layer names of the PANELS and the PILLARS as they can be selected from
the combo boxes.
* The entity type for the contour lines. Here only two options are supported: LW-
POLYLINE and 3DPOLYLINE.
* The subsidence factor associated with every point in each imported parcel.
* The thickness for every point in each imported parcel.
* Whether to append the data to the existing set or start a new set.
– The routine for reading directly from AutoCAD 2000 (or higher) was originally de-
signed by Steven J. Schafrik.
– If all input data is digitized to a single AutoCAD file (in different layers), the whole
project can be imported in two steps. One step for the mine plan and one step for the
prediction points.
– Surface topography contour lines can be imported as prediction points only through
direct interaction with AutoCAD 2000 or higher.
– When importing data in a new project, the program will automatically switch the mine
plan type and/or the prediction point type to one needed for the import. If, however,
data are imported into an existing project, this process will have to be done manually
by the user.
– Lite versions of AutoCAD do not support automation and, therefore, can not be inter-
faced with SDPS in this manner. In such cases, a DXF file can be used for importing
data.
Export Data
Use the File - Export option to export either a whole SDPS project to AutoCAD DXF format or to
export SDPS components to XYZ format. The export form has three options:
• Export the current project to AutoCAD DXF format
• Export the current mine plan to XYZ point format
• Export the current surface points to XYZ point format
• In the case of AutoCAD output, the program will create a DXF file with the mine geome-
try information as well as the surface topography data saved in separate layers. Note that
subsidence information as well as point ID information is lost during this process.
• In the case of XYZ output all data is converted to XYZ coordinates and stored to files. Ad-
ditional information such as point IDs and subsidence data are preserved.
275
Print Files
Use the Print option to print an existing file (data set) to any windows printer. This function prints
the data as its currently in the computer memory. The file prints in the default printer font with a
left margin of 1 inch and a top margin of 1 inch. Execute the following steps:
• Select the Print option from the File menu. The program displays a preview of the output on
the screen.
• Optionally, select to copy output to the clipboard or to send print output to the printer.
• In the latter case, select any available windows printer to complete printing.
This function has four options:
• Print Project Files
• Print Mine Plan Files
• Print Prediction Point Files
• Print Surface Grid Files
Browse Text Files

Use the Browse option to view a text (ASCII) file in a specified directory. Details are provided
below:
• Both an internal or an external browser can be used to browse such files. No editing is allowed
during browsing using the internal browser.
• Use the pattern field to specify a file pattern (e.g., *.txt). The file window will be reset to
conform to the specified pattern. The default pattern is *.*.
• More than one patterns can be applied using “;” as delimiter (e.g., *.txt;*.dxf).
• Use the Set Font command button to specify the type and size of font for the displayed text
in the internal browser. These settings are saved in the module.INI file.
• Use the cursor control keys to move within the browse window.
• If an external ASCII viewer is used (e.g., NOTEPAD.EXE) as specified in the Utilities-

Settings form, the maximum file size to browse is set by the limits of the external browser.
• The internal browser has a limit of approximately 25000 characters.
Exit the Program

Use the Exit option when ready to exit this program and return to the original environment. The
program will prompt to save the current file to disk, if not already saved.
276
A.2.2 The Edit Menu
The influence function formulation supports several different types of excavation geometry and
prediction point layouts. Data that describe excavation geometry are referred to as mine plan data,
while data that describe the points on the surface (or any other elevation), where deformation indices
will be calculated, are referred to as prediction point data.
Mine plan data can be specified as:
• a sequence of closed polygonal lines (polygonal mine plans)
• rectangular entities parallel to the coordinate system (rectangular mine plans)
Prediction point data can be represented by:
• scattered points
• points on a grid oriented parallel to the coordinate system
operations such as:
Project Description
This is an arbitrary 300 character description of the model being generated. It is a recommended
to enter a fairly detailed description of the specifics of the input file. This text may be a single line
of characters or may contain carriage return characters. The user can also set the type of units that
and m. When creating a project file, the user will have to specify the type of mine plan and the type
of prediction point data that will be used. The following combinations may be selected:
• Polygonal Mine plan, Scattered Points
• Polygonal Mine plan, Points on Grid
• Rectangular Mine plan, Scattered Points
• Rectangular Mine plan, Points on Grid
Mine Plan Data - Polygonal Mine Plans

In this input form, the user can specify or modify the geometry and characteristics of Polygonal
Mine Plans. A mine plan may consist of one or more parcels (panels or pillars). Each parcel is con-
structed of points which should be entered in a counter-clockwise direction. Required parameters
for each point include:
277
• the extraction thickness at each point as well as the supercritical subsidence factor at that
point (see tables),
• the parcel type, i.e., either panel or pillar,
• the parcel status, i.e., active or not active (an inactive parcel will not be displayed in the View
option and will not participate in any of the calculations)
• the long-term pillar failure risk factor associated with each pillar; this parameter applies only
to pillars and is only used during the long-term risk analysis,
• the percent of the original pillar height that corresponds to the remnant pillar height; this
parameter applies only to pillars and is only used during the long-term risk analysis.
Optionally the user can enable the Edge Effect Management tab and specify the following pa-
rameters:
• average edge effect offset (same value to all parcel sides)
• manual edge effect (different value for each parcel side may be specified)
• no edge effect
Additional information on the user interface for polygonal mine plans:

• The information for a specific point or parcel can be accessed and/or modified by using either
the sliding pointers or by entering the serial number of the parcel or point in the Record
Management frame of the form.
• A new parcel (or new point within a parcel) may be created or an existing parcel (or point)
may be deleted. The new parcel will be appended at the end of the parcel sequence (append
mode). The location of any parcel in the parcel database does not affect its contribution to
surface deformations. A parcel should contain a minimum of three points.
• If the Auto Subs. Factor check box is enabled, the program will automatically calculate the
subsidence factor for the parcel depending on the value of the R&P check box.
• The View All command button will display a graph of the currently defined mine plan as well
as the currently defined prediction points (if any). The View command button will display a
graph (map) of the currently defined mine plan.
• The Table command button will load all points in the database in a spreadsheet type of table.
This is considered an advanced editing feature and can be disabled or enabled through the
options form.
• The Table command button should be used by experienced users only, since changes may
inadvertently affect a range of points.
• The Copy Image command button creates a screen shot of the form and stores it in the clip-
board. The image can be pasted in any Windows application.
278
Mine Plan Data - Rectangular Mine Plans
In this input form, the user can specify or modify the geometry and characteristics of Rectangular
Mine Plans. A mine plan may consist of one or more parcels (panels or pillars). Each parcel is
represented by a rectangle which is defined by the coordinates of the four boundary lines. Required
parameters for each point include:
• the parcel reference code which can be any alphanumeric string,
• the coordinates of the west, east, south and north,
• the parcel elevation,
• the extraction thickness and the supercritical subsidence factor for that parcel (see tables),
• the parcel type, i.e., either panel or pillar,
• the parcel status, i.e., active or not active (an inactive parcel will not be displayed in the View
• the long-term pillar failure risk factor associated with each pillar; this parameter applies only
to pillars and is only used during the long-term risk analysis,
• the percent of the original pillar height that corresponds to the remnant pillar height; this
parameter applies only to pillars and is only used during the long-term risk analysis.
Optionally the user can enable the Edge Effect Management tab and specify the following pa-
rameters:
• do not adjust (parcel geometry is not adjusted for edge effect)
• manual adjust (parcel geometry can be manually adjusted by entering modified values)
• automatic adjust (parcel geometry can automatically adjusted based on empirical relation-
ships)
Optionally the user can enable the dynamic options tab (the Enable Dynamic Analysis checkbox
in the Advanced Options tab of the Options menu should be checked first) and specify the following
parameters:
• the direction of mining,
• the number of increments,
• the mining rate (days per increment will automatically be calculated).
Additional information on the user interface for polygonal mine plans:

• The information for a specific parcel can be accessed and/or modified by using either the
sliding pointer or by entering the serial number of the parcel in the Record Management
frame of the form.
279
• A new parcel may be created or an existing parcel may be deleted. The new parcel may be
appended at the end of the parcel sequence (append mode) or inserted at the current position
(insert mode). The location of any parcel in the parcel database does not affect its contribution
to surface deformations.
• If the Automatic Adjust option is selected, the program will automatically calculate the subsi-
dence factor for the parcel depending on the value of the R&P Panel check box. In this case,
the subsidence factor field is disabled and can not be edited directly. A warning message will
appear when changes to the subsidence factor are to be made.
• Also, the edge effect offset applied to the ribs of the parcel may be considered. This can be
implemented in detail through the Edge Effect Management tab.
• The View All command button will display a graph (map) of the currently defined mine plan
as well as the currently defined prediction points (if any). The View command button will
display a graph (map) of the currently defined mine plan. The currently displayed parcel will
be displayed in red on the map. The user may step through the parcels and visually check the
location of each parcel.
• The Table command button will load all parcels in the database in a spreadsheet type of table.
options form.
inadvertently affect a range of parcels.
• The insert/append option button determines the location of a new parcel within the database.
Insert locates the new parcel before the current parcel, while append adds the parcel at the
end of the list.
Additional information on the Edge Effect Management for the Rectangular Mine Plans:
• Input includes the state of the rib (yielding or solid) for each of the four ribs around the panel,
the type of subsidence estimate and the panel depth and percent hardrock in the overburden.
• The updated coordinates of the panel boundaries can be edited to be further adjusted.
• If the current parcel is a pillar, this form will be displayed, but no input values can be entered.
Prediction point data - Scattered Surface Points

In this input form, the user can specify or modify the geometry of Scattered Surface Points. A
scattered point set may consist of any number of points that are randomly located on the surface.
If such points can be specified as part of a grid, the Grid Points option should be used. Required
parameters for each point include:
280
• the point status, i.e., active or not active (an inactive point will not be displayed in the View
Additional information on the user interface for scattered surface points:
• The user can display/modify any point by using either the sliding pointers or by entering the
serial number of the point in the Record Management frame of the form.
• The user may create a new point or delete an existing point.
• The insert/append option determines the location of a new point within the database. Insert
locates the new point before the current point, while append adds the point at the end of the
list.
• The View All command button will display a graph (map) of the currently defined prediction
points as well as the currently defined mine plan (if any). The View command button will
just display the currently defined set of prediction points.
• The Table command button will load all points in the database in a spreadsheet type of table.
options form.
Prediction point data - Grid Points

In this input form, the user can specify or modify the geometry of Grid Points. A grid point set may
consist of any number of points in a window. This window is defined by minima and maxima in the
X- and Y- directions as well as the cell size in each direction. The user has two options regarding
grid elevations.
• to consider a flat surface and specify a uniform elevation for all points, and
• to consider each point on an individual basis and specify individual point elevations.
Additional information on the user interface for grid points:
• The grid can only be oriented parallel to the current coordinate system. If the grid needs to
be oriented at an angle to the current coordinate system, the grid points should be generated
by a different tool and imported as scattered points into the Influence Function module.
281
• For individual data points, the individual point elevations database should be initialized
using the Initialize command button and then the individual point elevations can be en-
tered/modified using the Table command button. The Table command button will load all
points in the database in a spreadsheet type of table. This is considered an advanced editing
feature and can be disabled or enabled through the options form. In this form, the user can
not disable any point or group of points (see Spreadsheet Data Editing below).
• The Reset command button can be used to return to the uniform elevation status. The Gen-
erate command button can be used to access the generate elevations form where elevations
can be generated for any plane in 3-D space.
• The View All command button will display a graph of the currently defined prediction points
as well as the currently defined mine plan (if any). The View command button will display a
graph (map) of the currently defined set of prediction points.
• Generate Grid Elevations: In this input form, the user can specify the necessary geometric
data (i.e., the coordinates of a base point and the plane direction and dip of the plane through
that point) for calculating grid point elevations. The Generate command button should be
used to complete the calculations and store all calculated elevations in the point data base.
– Calculations do not affect the coordinates of the grid points.
– Data entered in this form are preserved and stored as part of the prediction point infor-
mation.
– The user may use the Table button of the Grid Points form to further edit generated
values.
Estimate the Edge Effect Offset

This form can be used to determine the optimum edge effect offset value for use in the specific
project. The edge effect offset is a function of the width-to-depth ratio for each panel and can be
estimated in this form. To calculate the edge effect offset, enter the panel width and overburden
depth in the form and click on the Calculate command button.
Spreadsheet Data Editing

This grid editor allows the user to edit tabulated data in a spreadsheet manner. The grid editor
allows functions such as zooming, cut and paste, as well as option regarding input (multiple or
single cell input, etc.). The user will be prompted to confirm saving any changes before returning
to the calling form (i.e., definition of a polygonal or rectangular mine plan or of scattered or grid
points). This is considered an advanced editing feature. Grid editing options can be set through
the Grid Options menu item and include:
282
• Select Options: The user can select to mark cells (free), rows or columns.
• Fill Options: The user can select to fill a single cell or range of cells.
• Merge Options: The grid tool can automatically merge columns or rows of equal values so
that the user can easily visualize grouped entries. Allowed settings are no merge, free merge,
restrict row, restrict column.
• Insert Options: When inserting a row or column, the new column can be blank or a copy of
the current row or column.
• Paste Options: The user can select to paste the selected range or the clipped range (if the
selected area is different than the clipped area).
• Initial Zoom Setting: The initial zoom setting affects the size of the characters in the spread-
sheet (grid) editor.
• Grid Lines: The user can enable or disable the appearance of grid lines.
• Full View: The user can force the grid editor to occupy the whole computer screen.
• Maximize Grid Window: The user can eliminate the controls toolbar from the grid editor to
allow for more editing space.
• Show Cell Coordinates: The user can enable display of cell coordinates (Coordinate 1,1 is at
the top left corner).
A.2.3 The Calculate Menu

Use the Calculate menu option to access various data output options and to invoke the solution and
calibration routines:
Calculate Deformations
This form is used to define a number of output options for use by the solution module of the Influ-
ence Function Method Program. These options include:
• File Prefix Code: The user should specify up to a 6 character code which will be used as
a prefix to the resulting deformation files (if any). For example, if the prefix is test then
the subsidence file for scattered points will be testSU.DAT. The default prefix is the first 6
characters of the filename.
• Output Path: The user can specify the output path for the result files (e.g., deformation files
and/or report file). The default path is the current path.
• Deformation Indices: The user can specify which deformation indices should be calculated
for each project. Available options are:
– Calculate Subsidence
283
– Calculate Slope
– Calculate Horizontal Displacement
– Calculate Curvature
– Calculate Horizontal Strain
– Calculate Ground Strain
– Calculate Axial Strain (for scattered data sets only, and when in sequence; the program
does not check for the correct point sequence)
• Reports and Additional Output: The can generate more output files by enabling one or more
of the following options:
– Generate Report File: This option will generate a report file (ASCII) which can be
either printed or imported into any word-processing package.
– Generate Deformation Files: This option will generate individual deformation files to
be used for graphing through the Graphing Module.
– Generate Grid Elevation File: This option will generate a grid will all elevation data
used in the calculations. This option is only valid for prediction points on the grid. The
resulting file can be used in the graphing module to plot elevation cross-sections.
• Output Format: The user can specify whether output should be in a grid format (i.e., Surfer
or SDPS or Carlson Software) or as XYZ files. Note that the grid option is only available
when prediction points are initially specified on a grid. Additionally, it should be noted that
the Surfer grid option refers to the Surfer DOS version.
• XYZ Format Options: If XYZ Data is selected in the Output Format options, the user can
select whether to include a header in the XYZ files as well as the number of decimals printed
for each point in the XYZ file.
• Report Options: If a report is selected, the options to include the input data and/or paginate
the report can be selected.
• Check Panel Orientation: When this option is enabled, the program will check the orientation
of the panels (for polygonal panels only). This option may be disabled after a mine plan is
checked thoroughly, in order to speed up calculations.
• Calculate: This command button is used to invoke the solution module. When calculations
are completed in the solution module, control returns to the main program.
Note that all of the above information is saved in the project file.
Calibration for Subsidence

This function allows the user to select the range of the parameters used in the calibration analysis
of the problem. Calibration can only be performed on polygonal panels with scattered prediction
284
points. Also, the measured subsidence value should be entered in the appropriate field of the pre-
diction point set. To use this option, the appropriate advanced option should be enabled under
Utilities/Options. Once input to this form is modified, the project is automatically saved before
commencing calculations. Parameters needed include:
• Minimum, maximum and step value for the tangent of the influence angle: The solution pro-
cedure will iterate from the minimum to the maximum value using the step value provided
and will determine which option generates the least total error between the measured and
predicted (calculated) values.
• Minimum, maximum and step value for the supercritical subsidence factor for each point in
the file: The solution procedure will iterate from the minimum to the maximum value using
the step provided and will determine which option generates the least total error between the
measured and predicted (calculated) values.
• Subsidence factor options: The user can select how the program will handle modification of
the subsidence factor during its iterative process.
• Check panel orientation: When this option is enabled, the program will check the orientation
• Minimum, maximum and step factor for the edge effect offset for each side of the polygonal
mine plans: The solution procedure will iterate from the minimum to the maximum value us-
ing the step provided and will determine which option generates the least total error between
the measured and predicted (calculated) values.
The Calculate button is used to invoke the solution module with the option to perform para-
metric analysis in the range specified previously. When calculations are completed in the solution
module, control returns to the main program.
Calibration for Strain

This function allows the user to select the range of the parameters used in the calibration anal-
ysis of the problem. Calibration can only be performed on polygonal panels with scattered pre-
diction points. Also, the measured strain value should be entered in the appropriate field of the
prediction point set. To use this option, the appropriate advanced option should be enabled under
commencing calculations. Parameters needed include:
• Minimum, maximum and step factor for the tangent of the influence angle: The solution
procedure with iterate from the minimum to the maximum value using the step provided
and will determine which option generates the least total error between the measured and
predicted (calculated) values.
• Minimum, maximum and step factor for the supercritical subsidence factor for each point in
the file: The solution procedure will iterate from the minimum to the maximum value using
the step provided and will determine which option generates the least total error between the
measured and predicted (calculated) values.
285
• Subsidence Factor options: The user can select how the program will handle modification
of the subsidence factor during its iterative process.
• Check Panel Orientation: When this option is enabled, the program will check the orientation
• Minimum, maximum and step factor for the edge effect offset for each side of the polygonal
mine plans: The solution procedure will iterate from the minimum to the maximum value us-
ing the step provided and will determine which option generates the least total error between
the measured and predicted (calculated) values.
• Minimum, maximum and step factor for the strain coefficient: The solution procedure will
iterate from the minimum to the maximum value using the step provided and will determine
which option generates the least total error between the measured and predicted (calculated)
values.
The Calculate button is used to invoke the solution module with the option to perform para-
metric analysis in the range specified previously. When calculations are completed in the solution
module, control returns to the main program.
Development of Deformations
This function allows the user to select the range of the parameters used in the dynamic analysis
of the problem. Currently dynamic analysis can only be performed on rectangular panels with
any type of points. To use this option, the appropriate advanced option should be enabled under
commencing calculations.
Long-Term Risk Analysis

This function allows the user to create scenarios associated with potential failure of pillars in room-
and-pillar sections and their effects on the surface. To use this option, the appropriate advanced
option should be enabled under Utilities/Options. Also pillar failure risk factors and remnant pillar
heights should be assigned to each pillar to be included in this analysis. Once input to this form is
modified, the project is automatically saved before commencing calculations.

Utility menu operations are similar to those presented in section A.1.4. The options menu item is
explained below:
Options
the Influence Function Module. These options include:
286
• Filename Extensions and Paths
– Filename Extensions: The default file extensions used in the influence function program
can be set in the corresponding entries in this frame. These extensions are used when
individual mine plan or prediction point files are specified.
– Default Output Path: The default output path for the files generated by the calculations
is specified.
– Default Calibration Path: The default output path for the files generated by the cali-
bration calculations is specified.
• Project Options
– Default Mine Plan Type: Use this option to specify the default mine plan type for a new
project.
– Default Surface Points Type: Use this option to specify the default type of surface points
for a new project.
– Default Parameter Mode: Use this option to specify the default type of subsidence
parameters: Custom or Regional.
– Default Overburden/Rockmass Parameters: Use this option to specify the default val-
ues for the tangent of the influence angle, the strain coefficient and the percent hardrock.
• Advanced Options: Enable or disable these options to enable or disable the corresponding
advanced features of the program. Currently such features include:
– Update Project ID when Saving As: Use this option to enable modifying the ProjectID
in the output options form when saving using the SaveAs function.
– Enable Spreadsheet-like Data Editing: Use this option to enable table or spreadsheet
editing of data files (where appropriate).
– Enable Advance Vertex Editing: Use this option to enable editing of vertices for the
Polygonal Mine Plans.
– Enable Auto Elevation Update in Rect. Panels:
– Enable Individual Influence Angles per Panel: Use this option to enable the use of
panel-specific influence values. This option should be used with caution, since panels
in the same area usually have similar characteristics.
– Enable Input of Measured Dynamic Deformations: Use this option to allow definition of
points with known dynamic (development) characteristics to be plotted on development
curves.
– Enable Subsidence/Strain Calibration: Use this option to enable the calibration option
of the Influence Function Method.
– Enable Rectangular Panel Dynamic Analysis: Use this option to enable the dynamic
analysis feature for rectangular panels; note that dynamic analysis is not available for
polygonal parcels.
287
– Enable Long Term Risk Analysis Calculations: Use this option to enable the long term
risk analysis calculations; appropriate input fields and output options will be enabled.
– Enable Angle of Draw Calculations: Use this option to enable calculations of the angle
of draw to selected surface points.
– Enable Function for Reversing Profile: Use this option to enable a command button and
respective function in the prediction points dialog that allows reversing the sequence of
prediction points; this is useful for uniform plotting of monitoring profiles.
– Enable Input of Surface Grid for Terrain Influence:
– Enable Alternate Grid Editing in Table View: Use this option to enable presentation of
the topo grid in an X-Y editor where the elevation value is in the respective cell; this
will appear instead of the usual X-Y-Z prediction point editor in Table View.
– Default Graph Index for Dynamic Analysis: Use this option to select the default graph
index to be displayed when graphing the results from a dynamic analysis.
– View Points as Circles: Use this option to specify that surface points will be displayed
as small circles whenever the View All or View commands are selected from the Mine
Plan or Surface Points editors.
file, e.g., .PRJ with the Influence Function Program. This feature is not invoked during
• Miscellaneous Options
– User External Viewer to Display Results: Use this option to enable viewing of result
files using an external ASCII viewer.
– Print Module Version Information: Use this option to enable printing the module current
version information on all output generated by this program.
– Print Short Project Name: Use this option to print just the filename (not the filepath)
when generating output information from the current project.
– Solution Resolution: This parameter applies to the solution procedure for the polygonal
mine plans. A higher value provides more accuracy but takes more time. The default
value is 50.
– Warning / Confirmation Messages: These options control a number of confirmation
and/or warning messages that are displayed by the program.
– Disclaimers: These options enable a number of disclaimer messages in the program.
• Panel Options
– Default Polygonal Panel Options: These options set the default environment for polyg-
onal mine plan editing.
– Default Rectangular Panel Options: These options set the default environment for rect-
angular mine plan editing.
288
– Polygonal Panel Warning Options: These options enable a number of warning mes-
sages during editing of mine plan panels.
• Export Data Options
– Format: This option specifies whether a free or fixed number format should be used for
exported XYZ data.
– Delimiter: This option specifies the delimiter to be used for exported XYZ data.
– Fixed Format Options:: These options specify the decimal and non decimal characters
for exported XYZ data.
• CAD Options
– CAD Options: Users should specify the AutoCAD version installed on their system.
• Plot Options
– Scarce Number Points Skip: This option specifies how many points to skip when plot-
ting dense layouts of prediction points.
– Keep Highlight on Viewed Panels: Use this option to specify that current panels should
always be highlighted when plotted.
– Plot Edge Effect for All Panels: Use this option to enable plotting of defined edge effect
offsets on all plotted panels and not just the current one. Plotting of panels where the
edge effect offset is not defined will not be affected.
– Plot Surface Point ID: Use this option to enable plotting the point ID instead of the
current sequence number of each point. Sequence numbers are useful when plotting
monitoring lines.
289
A.3 The Pillar Stability Module
A.3.1 The File Menu
File menu operations are similar to those presented in section A.1.1.
A.3.2 The Edit Menu

operations such as:
Project Description
This is an arbitrary 300 character description of the model being generated. It is a recommended to
enter a fairly detailed description of the specifics of the input file. This text may be a single line of
and m.
Pillar Stability Parameters

The following parameters are necessary for the calculations:
• Pillar geometry data, which includes:
– the average unit weight of the overburden

– the average overburden depth
– the pillar width
– the pillar length
– the pillar height
– the opening width
– the average extraction ratio
• Pillar strength data, which includes:
– the in situ uniaxial compressive strength of coal (or laboratory values or the coal strength
factor)
– the in situ uniaxial compressive strength of coal is the most appropriate value to enter
here. If the above value is not readily known, it can be calculated using two methods:
(a) by using the laboratory value for the uniaxial compressive strength of coal and the
sample specimen size and (b) by using the coal strength factor for the particular seam.
• Pillar Sizing. The user can utilize pillar design formulae for pillar sizing calculations.
Additional information is provided below:
290
• The program will automatically select the least of the pillar dimensions for the strength cal-
culations.
• The program will automatically calculate and display on the input form the extraction ratio
as calculated from the tributary area of the pillar (when all appropriate pillar dimensions are
entered). The value used for calculations, however, is the average extraction ratio entered by
the user.
• Results: Use this option to obtain quickly results in text mode. The same option is available
under the Output menu.
Protection Area Parameters

Use this option to enter surface structure data for a new case study, or to edit data for a case study
loaded from disk. The data will be used to calculate the dimensions of the protection area at seam
level. Also, the total area of coal in the protection area underneath the structure is calculated.
Required input includes:
• the average overburden depth,
• structure dimensions,
• the minimum and maximum angle of protection (measured from the vertical),
• the horizontal structure dimension adjustment, and
• the maximum extraction ratio for the proposed protection area.
A.3.3 The Output Menu

Use the Output menu option to access various output options such as:
Safety Factors
• Standard Geometry:
– Use this option to obtain the Safety Factors for standard mine geometry and for all pillar
stability formulations
• Result Window:
– The user may navigate through the result window by clicking on the Previous Page or
Next Page buttons.
– Each and all of these output pages may be printed to any Windows printer.
– Each and all of these output pages may be copied to the Windows clipboard for use in
other applications.
• Advanced Geometry:
291
– Use this option to obtain the Safety Factors for advance mine geometry and for all pillar
stability formulations. Note that parametric graphs are not created for this option, since
pillar sizes may be different in the same layout.
Protection Area
Use this option to calculate the protection area at seam level for given surface structure dimensions
and dimension adjustments. Results are shown through the Result Window (See above).
Graph
Use this option to generate a series of parametric graphs, such as SF vs height, SF vs Pillar Width,
SF vs Pillar Height, etc.
Pillar Stability Graph Options

The user can set the basic graph formatting parameters such as:
• The graph title: The graph title is a text string placed over the graph. The default graph title
is: Pillar Stability Analysis.
• The graph X-Axis titles: The X-Axis titles selection includes four text fields, one for each
type of parametric graph that can be specified. These four fields correspond to the X-Axis
titles of the following graph types:
– SF vs. Pillar Width
– SF vs. Pillar Length
– SF vs. Pillar Height
– SF vs. Overburden Depth
– SF vs. Extraction Ratio
– Sizing Custom Graph (this helps size pillars using different formulations)
The default text strings for each one of these cases (placed below the X-Axis of each graph)
are:
– Pillar Width (units)
– Pillar Height (units)
– Overburden Depth (units)
– Extraction Ratio (%)
Note that only then title pertaining to the currently selected graph can be edited.
• The graph Y-Axis title: The Y-Axis title is a text string placed to the left of the Y-Axis of the
graph. The default Y-Axis title is Safety Factor.
• The remaining options are explained in section A.1.2.
292
explained below:
Options
the Pillar Stability Analysis Module:
• General
– Edit menu Options: This option controls whether the main (or advanced) parameter in-
put screen will automatically be displayed when the user selects File - Open (filename)
or File - New. The user can select one of the following options: a) Do Not Load In-
put Form on File Open, b) Load the Standard Input Form on File Open c) Load the
Advanced Input Form on File Open.
– Plot Entry Dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of entry dimensioning when
the mine plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
– Plot Crosscut Dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of crosscut dimensioning
when the mine plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
– View Project File in Child Window: When this option is enabled, the View command
button in the pillar parameter screen will launch a child window with the plan view plot
of the mine works. Otherwise, a plot will be generated in the small window on the pillar
parameter form.
– Share Geometry Data in all formulations: If this option is enabled, common geometry
data (e.g., overburden depth, extraction thickness, etc.) are shared between the active
formulations (e.g., pillar stability, protection area, etc.) in the module.
– Share Strength Data in all formulations: If this option is enabled, common strength
data (e.g., pillar strength, etc.), are shared between the active formulations (e.g., pillar
stability, protection area, etc.) in the module.
– Print Module Version Information: This option will enable printing of a module header
when a print function is executed.
message.
• Default Settings
– Calculate Depth of Pillar Crushing: This option will enable the calculation of the depth
for pillar crushing which will be reported in the tabulated output of the pillar stability
module.
– Protection Angle: This value will be the default setting for the minimum protection
angle in the protection angle input parameter form. The maximum protection angle is
set 20 degrees more than the minimum.
293
– Protection Angle Step: This value will be the default setting for the protection angle
step in the protection angle input parameter form.
– Minimum value for Parametric Analysis (%): This percentile value determines the
lower limit of the X-Axis in all parametric graphs.
– Maximum value for Parametric Analysis (%): This percentile value determines the up-
per limit of the X-Axis in all parametric graphs.
file, e.g., .PAD with the Pillar Stability Analysis Program. This feature is not invoked
during installation, since it may interfere with other extension associations.
– Pillar Size Calculations:
• Unit Settings
– Strength/Stress: The user can select the type of strength units (if English units are se-
lected) that will be displayed in the output screen.
– Load/Load Gradient: The user can select the type of strength gradient units (if English
units are selected) that will be displayed in the output screen.
294
A.4 The ALPS Module
A.4.1 The File Menu
A.4.2 The Edit Menu

operations such as:
Project Description
and m.
Project Parameters
• Parameters of Forward Model:

– Entry Height: The mining height or extraction thickness (in feet or meters).
– Depth of Cover: The depth of cover or overburden thickness over the pillar system (in
feet or meters). In regions of sharp topographic variation, it may be too conservative to
use the maximum cover if it is only present over a small portion of the panel, but the
average depth might underestimate the load over the deeper sections. Some engineering
judgement should be exercised, but in general an appropriate value of the depth of cover
for ALPS is a high average expressed as: H = (Havg + Hmax)/2
– Panel Width: The width of the longwall panel (or face length) (in feet or meters).
– Entry Width: The width of the entries. Crosscuts are assumed to be the same width as
the entries (in feet or meters).
– Crosscut Spacing: The center-to-center crosscut spacing. Crosscuts are assumed to be
driven perpendicular to the entries (in feet or meters).
– Number of Entries: The number of entries to be modeled.
– Entry Spacings: The center-to-center spacings (in feet or meters).
– In situ Coal Strength: The in situ coal strength (in psi or MPa). The default value is
900 psi or 6.2 MPa.
– Abutment Angle: The abutment angle in degrees. The default value is 21 degrees.
– Unit Weight of the Overburden: The unit weight of the overburden (in pcf or kN/m3 ).
The default value is 162 pcf or 25.47 kN/m3
295
Users generally will not need to adjust the abutment angle, which determines the magnitude
of the abutment loads, and the in situ coal strength, which is used in the calculation of the
pillar load-bearing capacity. The research that went into the development of ALPS indicated
that these two variables should be set at 21 degrees and 900 psi, respectively (Mark, 1992).
In particular, research has found that there is no correlation between the performance of
longwall pillars and the uniaxial compressive strength of coal specimens (Mark and Barton,
1996; Mark 1999).
• Parameters of Reverse Model:
– User and Suggested Safety factors: The user may enter a set of stability factors to be
used in the calculation of pillar widths for each pillar configuration of the sizing mode.
Alternatively, the user may specify CMRR values, and the program will display sug-
gested stability factors for pillar sizing.
– CMRR: The CMRR value is used for calculating the suggested stability factors. If the
Use CMRR suggested factors check box is enabled, the solution routines will ignore
the user stability factors and utilize the CMRR suggested factors. The formulas used to
suggest the SF are defined in the Coal Mine Roof Rating section.
– Pillar Configuration: Sizing can be accomplished using three pillar configuration op-
tions:
* Equal Sized Pillars
* Yield-Abutment Pillars
* Yield-Abutment-Yield Pillars
* Yield Pillar Width
When Yield-Abutment Pillars or Yield-Abutment-Yield Pillars are specified, the user should
enter the yield pillar width. The yield pillar width is solid coal, not center-to-center!

Stability Factors
The results of the calculations will be shown in each of the results windows. Within a Result
Window note that:
• The user may navigate through the result window by clicking on the Previous Page or Next
Page buttons.
• Each and all of these output pages may be printed to any Windows printer.
• Each and all of these output pages may be copied to the Windows clipboard for use in other
applications.
More specifically, output is available for:
296
• Standard Geometry:
– Use this option to obtain the ALPS stability factors for both the ALPS (Classic) and
ALPS (Revised) formulations under standard geometry conditions (crosscuts are at 90
degrees to the entries). The ALPS (Classic) calculates the unit strength of the pillars us-
ing Bieniawski’s empirical pillar strength formula, while ALPS (Revised) calculates the
unit strength of the pillars using Bieniawski’s revised empirical pillar strength formula.
• Advanced Geometry:
– Use this option to obtain the ALPS stability factors for both the ALPS (Classic) and
ALPS (Revised) formulations under advanced geometry conditions (crosscuts are at
less than 90 degrees to the entries). The ALPS (Classic) calculates the unit strength of
the pillars using Bieniawski’s empirical pillar strength formula, while ALPS (Revised)
calculates the unit strength of the pillars using Bieniawski’s revised empirical pillar
strength formula. See Result Window above.
Size Pillars
Use this option to size the pillars (see also parameters of the reverse model)
Graph [ALPS Classic]

Use this option to generate a series of parametric graphs, such as SF vs height, SF vs Depth of
Cover, SF vs Panel Width, etc., for the ALPS (Classic) formulation.
Graph [ALPS (R)]

Use this option to generate a series of parametric graphs, such as SF vs height, SF vs Depth of
Cover, SF vs Panel Width, etc., for the ALPS (Revised) formulation.

explained below:
Options
the ALPS Module. These options include:
• Edit Options
– Load the input form on program start: When this option is enabled, the main parameter
input form will be automatically loaded when the program is started.
297
– Load the input form on file open / file new: When this option is enabled, the main
parameter input form will be automatically loaded when the user selects File - Open
(filename) or File - New.
parameter form.
– Issue Warning When Discarding Changes in Input Form(s):
– Print Module Version Information: This option will enable printing of a module header
– Print Plot Reminders in Output:
file, e.g., .ALP with the ALPS Program. This feature is not invoked during installation,
since it may interfere with other extension associations.
• View/Plot Options
– Plot Entry Spacing Dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of entry dimension-
ing when the mine plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
– Plot Crosscut Spacing Dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of crosscut di-
mensioning when the mine plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
• Output Options
– Output units (Pressure/Strength): The user can select the type of strength units (if En-
glish units are selected) that will be displayed in the ALPS output screen.
– Output units (Load Gradient): The user can select the type of strength gradient units (if
English units are selected) that will be displayed in the ALPS output screen.
message.
298
A.5 The ARMPS Module
A.5.1 The File Menu
A.5.2 The Edit Menu

operations such as:
Project Description
and m.
Project Parameters
• Entry height: The mining height or extraction thickness (in feet or meters).
• Depth of cover: The depth of cover or overburden thickness over the pillar system (in feet
or meters). In regions of sharp topographic variation it may be too conservative to use the
maximum cover if it is only present over a small portion of the panel, but the average depth
might underestimate the load over the deeper sections. Some engineering judgement should
be exercised, but in general an appropriate value of the depth of cover for ALPS is a high
average expressed as: H = (Havg + Hmax)/2
• Crosscut Angle: The angle between the longitudinal axis of an entry and the crosscut direction
(degrees), where 90 is perpendicular to the entry.
• Entry Width: The width of the entries. Crosscuts are assumed to be the same width as the
entries (in feet or meters).
• Crosscut Spacing: The center-to-center crosscut spacing. Crosscuts are assumed to be driven
perpendicular to the entries (in feet or meters).
• Number of entries: The number of entries to be modeled.
• Entry spacings: The center-to-center spacings (in feet or meters).
• In situ coal strength: The in situ coal strength (in psi or MPa). The default value is 900 psi
or 6.2 MPa.
299
• Unit weight of the overburden: The unit weight of the overburden (in pcf or kN/m3 ). The
default value is 162 pcf or 25.47 kN/m3 .
• Breadth of AMZ: The breadth of the Active Mining Zone (in feet or meters).
• Type of loading condition: There are 5 types of loading conditions that can be modeled:
Development Load, One Active Retreat Section, Active Retreat Section and One Side Gob,
Active Retreat Section and Two Sides Gob, and Bleeder. Each option may require a number
of parameters such as the Abutment Angle (typically 21 degrees), the extend of the active
gob, the width of the barrier pillar on each side and the depth of slab cut in barrier pillar on
each side.
Users generally will not need to adjust the breadth of the AMZ zone, since it can be automati-
cally calculated.

Stability Factors
The results of the calculations will be shown in the Result Window. Note that:
• The user may navigate through the result window by clicking on the Previous page or Next
page buttons.
applications.
Graph
Use this option to generate a series of parametric graphs, such as SF vs Entry Height, SF vs Depth
of Cover, SF vs Crosscut Angle, SF vs Crosscut Spacing, SFBAR vs First Barrier Pillar width.

explained below:
Options
the ARMPS Module. These options include:
• Edit options
300
– View project file in child window: When this option is enabled, the View command
parameter form.
• Print / plot Options
– Print module version information: This option will enable printing of a module header
– Plot entry dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of entry dimensioning when
the mine plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
– Plot crosscut dimensioning: This option will enable plotting of crosscut dimensioning
– Plot extend of gob: This option will enable plotting of the extend of gob when the mine
plan input data or results are plotted on the screen.
• Output Options
– Output units (strength): The user can select the type of strength units (if English units
are selected) that will be displayed in the ARMPS output screen.
– Output units (strength gradient): The user can select the type of strength gradient units
(if English units are selected) that will be displayed in the ARMPS output screen.
– Minimum value for parametric analysis (%): This percentile value determines the lower
limit of the X-Axis in all parametric graphs.
– Maximum value for parametric analysis (%): This percentile value determines the up-
301
A.6 The ARMPS-HWM Module
A.6.1 The File Menu
A.6.2 The Edit Menu

operations such as:
Project Description
and m.
Project Parameters
• Extraction height: The mining height or extraction thickness (in feet or meters).
• Depth of cover: The depth of cover or overburden thickness over the pillar system (in feet or
meters).
• Hole width: The width of the hole (in feet or meters).
• Web thickness: The thickness of the web left between holes (in feet or meters).
• Barrier pillar width: The width of the barrier pillar left between hole sections (in feet or
meters).
• Number of holes: The number of holes between two barrier pillars (between 2 and 20 holes).
• In situ coal strength: The in situ coal strength (in psi or MPa). The default value is 900 psi
or 6.2 MPa.
• Unit weight of the overburden: The unit weight of the overburden (in pcf or kN/m3 ). The
default value is 162 pcf or 25.47 kN/m3 .
• Abutment angle: The abutment angle in degrees. The default value is 21 degrees.

302
Stability Factors
The results of the calculations will be shown in the Result Window. Note that:
• The user may navigate through the result window by clicking on the Previous page or Next
page buttons.
applications.
Graph
Use this option to generate a series of parametric graphs, such as SF vs Entry Height, SF vs Depth
of Cover, SF vs Hole Width.

explained below:
Options
the ARMPS-HWM Module. These options include:
• Edit / Print Options
– Print plot reminders in output: This option will enable printing of reminders (for plot-
ting results) in the output file.
– Abutment angle: Set the default abutment angle when creating new projects. The user
may change this value in each project.
– Stability factor for webs: Set the default stability factor for webs when creating new
projects. The user may change this value in each project.
– Stability factor for barriers: Set the default stability factor for barriers when creating
new projects. The user may change this value in each project.
303
• View / Plot Options
parameter form.
– Plot entry spacing dimensions: This option will enable plotting of entry dimensioning
• Output Options
– Output Units (Strength): The user can select the type of strength units (if English units
are selected) that will be displayed in the ARMPS-HWM output screen - either psi or
psf.
– Output Units (load and load gradient): The user can select the type of strength gradient
units (if English units are selected) that will be displayed in the ARMPS-HWM output
screen (lbs, lbs/ft, tons, tons/ft).
– Minimum value for Parametric Analysis (%): This percentile value determines the
lower limit of the X-Axis in all parametric graphs.
– Maximum value for Parametric Analysis (%): This percentile value determines the up-
message.
304
A.7 The CMRR Module
A.7.1 The File Menu
A.7.2 The Edit Menu

operations such as:
Project Description
and m.
Project Parameters
• Information Type at Current Location: The user should select either “Underground informa-
tion” or “Drillhole information”. For both options the units comprising the roof should be
defined. Unit characteristics vary, however, depending on the selected option.
• Unit Thickness: The thickness of each unit should be entered. Units are entered from the
roof line and upwards.
• Depth to top of Unit: The distance from the surface to the top of each unit.
• Rock type: A rock type may be identified either using a Ferm code or using a formation from
a custom library within CMRR.
For each unit characterized using drillhole information, the following should be entered:
• The uniaxial compressive strength (UCS) of the unit, either as an average number or as series
of test results.
• The point load index (Is50) of the unit, either as an average number or as series of test results.
• The moisture sensitivity index.
• The fracture intensity either as fracture spacing (mm) or an RQD number
• Contact information between the current and the upper unit.
For each unit characterized using underground information, the following should be entered:
305
• The strength Index.
• The number of discontinuities.
• Discontinuity data for three sets including (cohesion, roughness, spacing, persistence)
• The moisture sensitivity index.
• Contact information between the current and the upper unit.

explained below:
Options
the CMRR Module. These options include:
• Edit Menu
– Default information type: The user can select the default information type for a new
project, i.e., Underground Information or Drillhole Information.
– Auto calculate CMRR upon changes in the editor: When this option is enabled, the
program will calculate CMRR immediately.
– Auto calculate CMRR upon entering the editor: When this option is enabled, the pro-
gram will re-calculate CMRR when entering the editor. Saved values from a previous
session will not be preserved.
– Switch to unit rating tab when file is loaded: When this option is enabled, the program
will switch to the unit rating tab when entering the editor.
– Show color codes in the custom rock library: When this option is enabled, the program
will show the color codes in the custom rock library.
– Default values: The user can enter the default bolt length in m and ft, the default RQD
value for unit evaluation and the default value for the initial depth of cover in ft and m.
Also, the default ground water adjustment option can be set.
• General
– Round off unit ratings and CMRR to integer values: When this option is enabled, all
unit ratings and the CMRR value will be rounded to the nearest integer value.
306
– Plot options: The user can select to plot the ground water adjusted CMRR values or the
CMRR values without adjustment.
– Moisture adjustment deductions: The user can select to deduct the so-called “large de-
ductions” or the “small deductions” due to moisture.
• Export Options
– Export options for numeric data: The user can select the delimiter for the numeric data
(comma, space, tab).
– Export options for numeric data: The user can select the type of quoting for exported
string values (double quotes, single quotes, no quotes).
– Export data options: The user can set a number of export data options.
• AutoCAD
– The user can select the AutoCAD version installed. This option should be set, before
exporting data to AutoCAD drawing files.
307
A.8 The Graph Module
A.8.1 The File Menu
• Open Project: Use the Open Project option to load a solved influence function project file.
The default extension for these project files is *.GFI and not *.PRJ which is the default
extension for influence function project files. A project file provides information regarding
the deformation indices calculated by the influence function and the file specifications for
each deformation index file.
• Load Graph: Use the Load Graph option to load a saved graph file (see the Save Graph
option below). This option is useful when reviewing a graph saved through one of the graph
forms.
• Browse Text Files: See discussion in section A.1.1.
• Exit the Program: See discussion in section A.1.1.
A.8.2 The 2-D Menu

Use the 2-D menu option to access the two-dimensional plotting options:
• The Cross-sectional Plots: The user can select the index to be plotted as well as the formatting
parameters for this index. The basic formatting parameters are as follows:
– The graph title: The graph title is a text string placed over the graph.
– The graph X-Axis title: The X-Axis title is a text string placed below the X-Axis of the
graph.
– The graph Y-Axis title: The Y-Axis title is a text string placed to the left of the Y-Axis
of the graph.
– The grid style: Four grid styles are available: Horizontal lines, vertical lines, horizontal
and vertical lines, no grid lines.
– The graph style: Three graph styles are available: lines, symbols, lines and symbols.
– The maximum number of curves: The user can specify the maximum number of curves
that can be overlaid on the graph. When this number is exceeded the user will be
prompted to clear the graph before proceeding.
– The curve legend: This option enables or disables the legend box in the graph.
– The symbol size: With this scroll box, the user can set the size of the symbols used by
the graph object. The scroll box is enabled only for a graph type of symbols or lines
and symbols.
308
– The default parameter options: There are two default parameter options: a) to set the
default parameters (e.g., graph title, X-Axis title, etc.) every time the graph options
form is invoked, and b) to set the format parameters to used in the previous graphing
session. These values are saved in the corresponding module.INI file. Note that when
the default parameter set is enabled, changes to the form components are disabled.
Depending on the type of surface points available in the current project, there are two types
of cross-sections that can be created:
– Cross-sections plotted from a grid file. In this case, multiple cross-sections can be
overlaid and the user should select the orientation and intercept of the cross-section.
– Cross-sections plotted from a set of scattered points. In this case, cross-sections can be
defined as X-projections, Y-projections or Axial projections.
• The Vector Plots: In this form the user can select the index to be plotted as well as the for-
matting parameters for this index. The basic formatting parameters are as follows:
– The graph title: The graph title is a text string placed over the graph.
– The default parameter options: There are two default parameter options: a) to set the
default parameters (e.g., graph title, X-Axis title, etc.) every time the graph options
form is invoked, and b) to set the format parameters to used in the previous graphing
session. These values are saved in the corresponding module.INI file. Note that when
the default parameter set is enabled, changes to the form components are disabled.
A.8.3 The 3-D Menu

Use the 3-D menu option to access the three-dimensional plotting options. The user can select
the index to be plotted as well as the formatting parameters for this index. The basic formatting
parameters are as follows:
• The graph title: The graph title is a text string placed over the graph.
• The default parameter options: There are two default parameter options: a) to set the default
parameters (e.g., graph title, X-Axis title, etc.) every time the graph options form is invoked,
and b) to set the format parameters to used in the previous graphing session. These values
are saved in the corresponding module.INI file. Note that when the default parameter set is
enabled, changes to the form components are disabled.
• The rotation and elevation of the 3-D image can be set from within the Graph Form.

explained below:
• Options: This form is used to define a number of default parameters and options pertaining
specifically to the data export functions of the Graphing Module. These options include:
309
– Format: Use this option to specify whether the exported data will be in free format or
fixed format. See details on fixed format below.
– Delimiter: Use this option to specify the default delimiter character that will be used
to separate data columns. The delimiter can either be the SPACE character or the TAB
character.
– Fixed format options: Use this option to the fixed format configuration. The user needs
to specify the total width of each data column (in characters), the number of digits
used for the integer portion of the number as well as the number of decimal digits.
Allowing for one character position for the sign of the number and one position for
the decimal point, the following relationship should always be true: NoIntegerDigits +
NoDecimalDigits + 2 < ColumnWidth The default parameters are:
* NoIntegerDigits = 6
* NoDecimalDigits =3
* ColumnWidth = 12
310
Appendix B
The Initialization File
Each SDPS module creates its own initialization (*.INI) file. This initialization file is automat-
ically created by all SDPS modules the first time they are executed. They should reside in the
a special SDPS directory (MySDPS) create in the “My Documents” directory of each user, e.g.,
C:\Documents and Settings\User\My Documents\My SDPS\.
• The profile function method module creates and uses the PROF.INI file.
• The influence function method module creates and uses the INFL.INI file.
• The pillar stability analysis module creates and uses the PILL.INI file.
• The graphing module creates and uses the GRAF.INI file.
Sample entries are shown below (the sequence and parameter values may be different in the
actual file):
[Settings]
DefaultUnits=0
DisplayActionWin=1
MaxDisplaySize=300
KeepFileNames=1
ShowDisclaim=0
DataPath=C:\SDPS\
FileExtension=PRF
[FileMenu]
MaxLastFiles=1
LastFile1=C:\SDPS\TEST.PRF
[TextBrowse]
BrowseFontName=Courier New
BrowseFontSize=10
BrowseFontBold=0
BrowseFontItalic=0
311
Notes
• If this initialization file is deleted, it will be automatically reconstructed the next time the
program is executed, but the various settings will default to their original values.
• Installing a new version of the program will reset the initialization files to ensure data in-
tegrity.
312
Appendix C
Troubleshooting
C.1 General Troubleshooting

1. Problem: The registration information does not seem to work. SDPS does not allow
saving of the license information.
Make sure that you have submitted the correct license code to the supplier and that you
entered the license code correctly. The license code should not contain any letter O; substitute
zero (0) instead.
2. Problem: The software has been registered, it worked for a while and now it comes up
with the message “Demo expired” and stops working.
In the original versions of the package, installation or re-installation erased all previous li-
censing information. However, it kept the date of the first installation as well as a count of the
number of function calls during its demo operation. If re-installation occurred after 30 days
of original installation or after 200 function calls were performed in demo mode, the “Demo
expired” message was triggered. Note that this behavior is not expected for upgrades of
versions 5.1P and later. If upgrading from a much older version, this message will appear
again. Please obtain a new license code from the supplier.
3. Problem: Some forms are truncated and may be larger that the current windows screen.
Most of the forms were designed to fit on a screen with a resolution of 640x480. However,
some forms, need a screen resolution of 800x600 to display properly. To correct the problem,
please set the resolution in the Settings section of the desktop properties option (right click
on the windows desktop and select properties), to these or higher settings.
4. Problem: Command button captions, form captions, frame captions and/or labels are
truncated or wrapped (General).
The command buttons, forms and labels were designed using the MS San Serif font (size 8).
Changing the default settings for the windows desktop and screen may affect the appearance
of the forms and labels in SDPS 6.x. To resolve the issue, please right click on the windows
screen (desktop) and select Properties. Enter the Appearance section and a) set the fonts
to normal size, and b) set the fonts for selected objects to default settings (under advanced
options).
313
5. Problem: Command button captions, form captions, frame captions and/or labels are
truncated or wrapped (for Windows 7 systems).
A change was made for Windows 7, to set the screen resolution to the monitor’s native reso-
lution. If the screen is over a certain resolution the default font size becomes 120 DPI (dots
per inch). This is approximately 125% of normal 96 DPI (100%). When the system defaults
to 125% DPI it also adjusts the MS Sans Serif font to be bigger. If the user then decides to set
the DPI back to 100%, TrueType fonts, which are scalable, adjust as expected. But the bitmap
MS Sans Serif font does not: it remains at the larger size, hence this issue. This problem does
not occur if Windows 7 keeps DPI at 100% when it is first installed. To fix a Windows 7
system, the computer administrator should perform the following registry change:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Fonts]
"MS Sans Serif 8,10,12,14,18,24"="SSERIFE.FON"
"MS Serif 8,10,12,14,18,24"="SERIFE.FON"
"Courier 10,12,15"="COURE.FON"
6. Problem: When saving data, the decimals seem to disappear, or the file can not be read
again.
If the localization settings (regional settings) for your Windows environment are set to allow
for xx.xxx,yy instead of xx,xxx.yy then decimals are saved using a “comma”. Comma is also
used to separate data in comma-delimited files, so this confuses the program. Please revert
to US regional settings.
7. Problem: When accessing data through the Table mode (spread sheet mode), the deci-
mals seem to disappear.
If the localization settings (regional settings) for your Windows environment are set to allow
for xx.xxx,yy instead of xx,xxx.yy then data entry through the Table mode will not work be-
cause this feature is not supported by the 3rd party vendor of this component. Please revert
to US regional settings.
8. Problem: Accessing any of the graph functions under Windows Vista or Windows 7,
produces error 339 and exits the program.
Due to increased security settings under Windows Vista and/or later systems, some compo-
nents may not be registered properly by just installing or running a program as administrator.
In this case, right click on the program icon (under Start Menu) and execute Run as Admin-
istrator. Then all components are registered properly. After that, programs may be accessed
as usual.
C.2 Further Assistance

In this section common installation and runtime problems were explained. If, however, you en-
counter what you feel may be a problem with the software (bug), please consult your dealer to
ensure that you have the latest release of the software. Normally an update with fixes and upgrades
will be issued every 6 months. If your problem does not seem to be covered by the latest software
314
release as provided by your dealer, then please send the following information by e-mail to Prof.
Michael Karmis (mkarmis@vt.edu) or to Prof. Zach Agioutantis (zach.agioutantis@uky.edu):
• the program and module version as shown in menu item Help / About the program;
• the description of the operating system on your computer (e.g., WinXP, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, etc.);
• a detailed description of the problem;
• the corresponding files (e.g., DWG, DXF, PRJ, etc.);
• the steps that were followed when the problem occurred as recorded by the program (to log
program functions the “Copy History” feature of the package should be enabled through the
Utilities-Settings menu; then the recorded steps can be copied in any document or text file
using the clipboard).
315
Appendix D
Setting up Projects for the Influence

Function Method
D.1 Common Questions and Answers

Q1: In what context are the terms panel, pillar and parcel used in the mine plan definition?
A1: See below:
• The term panel defines the boundaries of any single extraction area (extraction bound-
aries).
• The term pillar defines the boundaries of any single pillar. Note that pillars can not
exist outside extraction boundaries (panels).
• The term parcel may refer to either a panel entity or a pillar entity.
Q2: How can a longwall panel be defined?
A2: A longwall panel can be defined by one parcel which will be specified as a panel. Everything
else around the panel is assumed to be solid material.
Q3: How can a room-and-pillar panel be defined?
A3: A room-and-pillar panel should be defined by more than one parcels. One parcel should
be specified as a panel and will define the boundaries of the room-and-pillar panel itself
(extraction boundaries, extraction area) and the remaining parcels should be defined as pillars
within the extraction area (panel).
Q4: The mine plan comprises multiple longwall panels, room and pillar sections, mains and
submains. Should everything be digitized and imported in SDPS?
A4: An efficient way of modeling a complicated mine plan is to identify areas with similar ex-
traction characteristics and digitize those areas only. In this sense, a room-and-pillar section
would just be one polygon, a submains section would be another, etc.
316
Q5: The project comprises a polygonal mine plan and scattered surface points. Is there a
way to export the surface points as a grid?
A5: No. Grid points can only be exported if a grid is defined for the prediction points.
Q6: Can the program automatically account for the edge effect offset in polygonal mine
plans?
A6: No. The program can only automatically account for the edge effect offset (as a function of
depth, rib conditions, etc.) in the case of the rectangular mine plan, provided the user specifies
all necessary parameters. In the case of polygonal mine plans the user can manually enter a
value of the edge effect offset.
D.2 Examples of Erroneous Panel Definitions for the Influence

Function Method Formulation
Figure D.1 presents a digitized mine plan, which includes 5 longwall sections, with the appropriate
entries around each panel. However, if this plan is used for surface deformation calculations using
the SDPS package, the results will be erroneous because there are logical errors in the mine plan
description:
According to the definitions given in Chapter 4, all pillars should be placed inside extraction
areas. In this case, five (5) extraction areas are defined, one for each longwall panel. However, the
pillars are not placed inside any extraction area.
Subsidence calculations for this case will produce negative subsidence in the middle of the
panels and positive subsidence around the panels over the pillars in the entries.
One way of producing a mine plan without logical errors would be to create one boundary line
around all mining activity and dismiss the individual extraction panels, as shown in Figure D.2 (see
also Section 4.21, starting on page 129).
A second logical error in this plan can be observed when focusing on the last set of entries
(bottom). This detail is shown in Figure D.3. Overlapping pillars can be observed in this case
(due to digitization errors). Their influence will be minor in the final result, but it is nevertheless a
logical error.
Figure D.4 shows in detail the digitized mine plan of a section of another longwall operation.
Here, it appears that each pillared section is enclosed in an extraction area, which conforms to the
specifications. However, this is not the most efficient way to do these calculations:
Creating a large extraction area is much more efficient than small adjacent extraction areas.
The possibility of creating overlapping extraction areas increases with the number of small
adjacent areas used in a project.
Increased number of areas results in increased solution times.
317
Figure D.1: Example of digitized mine plan with logical errors
D.3 Examples of Simplifying Problem-Solving for the Influence

Function Method Formulation
Figure D.5 presents a digitized mine plan, which includes 5 longwall sections, with the appropriate
entries around each panel (mains and submains). Although this is a “correct” mine plan in terms
of definitions, the calculation of surface deformation will take a long time due to the large number
of mine plan points. Figures D.6 and D.7 present an alternative approach to the same problem.
D.4 Troubleshooting the Influence Function Module

1. Problem: Mine plan files digitized in AutoCAD and saved as a DXF file, can not be
imported or are not properly imported, to the Influence Function Module.
Make sure that:
• The mine plan layers (PANELS, PILLARS, etc.) are defined properly.
• The mine plan elements (entities) are digitized as polylines.
• The mine plan entities are not defined as blocks.
318
Figure D.2: Corrected mine plan: pillars are placed inside an extraction area
Figure D.3: Detail of bottom entry system: Overlapping pillars
• All mine plan objects are selected when exporting to DXF.

• The scaling factors on the input form are reset to 1.
• The “append data” option on the input form is disabled.
319
Figure D.4: Detail of longwall operation with multiple adjacent extraction areas
If everything fails, try exporting the mine plan as a DXF file for AutoCAD R12LT (use the
options button in the AutoCAD dxfout interface, or select the appropriate file type). Use
the dxfout AutoCAD command.
2. Problem: The mine plan has been defined and imported without any problems. How-
ever, when viewing the mine plan, all parcels are clustered in one dot on the view win-
dow.
A point may have been defined with coordinates (0,0) by accident. The view window tries to
fit in all points and point (0,0) may be grossly out of scale compared to the XY coordinates
of your mine plan. To correct the problem:
• Find point (0,0) and delete it.
3. Problem: Prediction point files digitized in AutoCAD and saved as a DXF file, can not
be imported or are not properly imported to the Influence Function Module.
Make sure that:
• The prediction point layers (POINTS, etc.) are defined properly.

• The elevation values for the points are set to the proper values.
320
Figure D.5: Digitized mine plan with five longwall sections
Figure D.6: Simplified mine plan where all the mains and submains sections are considered as one parcel;
(the two smaller panels on the right can easily be added to this layout)
• The scaling factors are reset to 1.

• The Append Data option on the input form is disabled.
If everything fails, try exporting the mine plan as a DXF for AutoCAD R12LT.
4. Problem: Prediction points digitized in AutoCAD do not import in sequence into the
Influence Function Module, and directional strains are not calculated properly.
Assume that you create 10 points in a row starting from left to right and you save them in an
AutoCAD drawing file. Assume that you import these points to the Influence Function. The
points will be imported last point first, i.e., the first point in the prediction points sequence
321
Figure D.7: Simplified mine plan which including only the extracted areas that correspond to each panel
will be the last point in AutoCAD. If now, you go back to AutoCAD and edit point 4, i.e.,
move it slightly, this point will be imported completely out of sequence.
5. Problem: AutoCAD 2000 or higher is installed on the computer. However, not all (or
none at all) entities can be imported through the import forms.
Make sure that:
• AutoCAD 2000 or higher is functioning properly in stand-alone mode.

• Mine plan entities (panels or pillars) are defined as light-weight polylines or 3d poly-
lines.
• Contours are defined as as light-weight polylines or 3d polylines.
• SDPS will not import entities included in blocks. Blocks should be exploded first so
that entities become part of the drawing itself.
• SDPS will not entities found in external references. Point SDPS to the external refer-
ence file directly.
• See also Section D.4 on page 318.
If everything fails, try exporting the mine plan as a DXF file.

6. Problem: AutoCAD 2011LT is installed on the computer. However, no entities can be
imported through the import forms.
• The AutoCAD LT series does not support automation (i.e., interfacing with other soft-
ware), therefore SDPS can not communicate directly with AutoCAD objects.
322
• Export the data in DXF format and import using the SDPS DXF import utility.
7. Problem: AutoCAD 2007 or higher is installed on the computer. However, SDPS can
not complete the function “Import Points and Panels from AutoCAD” and fails with an
error message.
The Influence Function program can import data directly from AutoCAD DWG files. In
order to achieve this, the AutoCAD file is silently opened using application automation tech-
niques and the layer and other data are read in to the Influence Function module. In turn, this
requires that AutoCAD 2000 or higher is installed and fully functional.
Under some circumstances the AutoCAD file is loaded and remains visible. In this case, the
user should minimize the AutoCAD interface and return to the SDPS interface to complete
the import. Closing the AutoCAD interface before completing the import will result in an
“Automation Error”. In this case, the importing procedure should be re-started.
Note that all operations interfacing with AutoCAD load the program in the background (in-
visible) and then interrogate AutoCAD for layers, entities, etc. Even if AutoCAD is already
running, SDPS will load a new instance to complete the import operations.
If problems persist, make sure that:
• When AutoCAD loads there is no message that requires direct user input before Auto-
CAD loads completely.
• If the problem persists, specify that AutoCAD should be loaded in visible mode (Utilities-
Options-CAD options) and look for any input required by AutoCAD before it completes
loading. Many times this will appear as a small flashing window in the background.
8. Problem: IntelliCAD is available on the computer, but it can not be used instead of
AutoCAD to import CAD entities.
The IntelliCAD engine is different than the AutoCAD engine. At this time SDPS does not
support IntelliCAD for import operations.
9. Problem: The Table command button is disabled in the mine plan and prediction points
forms.
To correct the problem:
• Enable this option through the Utilities-Options menu under “Advanced Options”.
10. Problem: The project has been defined and saved without any problems. However,
when calculating surface deformations zero values are obtained for one or more defor-
mation indices.
Make sure that:
• Prediction points overlap the mine plan (verify by using View All in the mine plan editor
or in the prediction point editor).
323
• The elevation difference between mine plan and prediction points is properly set, and
it is larger than 0.
• The extraction thickness and subsidence factor values were properly set (for imported
or hand-keyed mine plans).
11. Problem: The project has been defined and saved without any problems. However,
when calculating surface deformations, positive values for subsidence are generated.
Make sure that (Figure D.8):
• All pillars are surrounded by an extraction boundary or perimeter line (panel).

• There are no pillars that lie outside extraction boundaries.
• Extraction boundaries are defined as panels and not as pillars.
12. Problem: The mine plan has been digitized exactly as provided. However, the program
predicts surface deformations over mains and areas with less than 50% extraction.
The method will indeed predict very small surface deformations over areas that should not
experience any such deformations. If such deformations are attributed to mains or very low
extraction areas, in order to eliminate them, do the following:
• Digitize such areas (e.g., mains and pillars in mains) as equivalent parcels designated
as pillars with a very small (i.e., 0.001) supercritical subsidence factor.
13. Problem: When checking the orientation of the panels, the program identifies parcels
that need to be rotated counter-clockwise and rotates them either manually or automat-
ically. Re-running the check routine, the program still identifies parcels that “need”
rotation.
Make sure that:
• The parcels are not “zero area” parcels or parcels where the perimeter crosses itself
(Figure D.9).
(A) (B)
Figure D.8: Illegal parcel definition (a) some pillars cross the extraction boundary (b) pillars are defined
without an extraction boundary
324
Figure D.9: Illegal parcel definition (its rotation can not be properly identified)
14. Problem: The “Calibration Influence Function” option is not enabled.

To correct the problem:
• Set the appropriate option through the Utilities-Options form.
D.5 Error Messages in the Influence Function Solution Module

The error messages below may be generated by the Influence Function Method Solution Module.
A brief explanation is given on how to overcome the error.
1. Surface point #nnnn and parcel #nnn have equal elevations = xxx: This error message is
generated when a prediction point and has the same elevation as the vertex or parcel elevation
of a mine plan panel or pillar even if they are quite a distance apart. This is usually a user
input error. If the mine plan and surface points cover a large area, it is possible that this
condition may be true. In this case the “Allow for Extremely Variable Terrain Elevations”
option should be enabled before invoking the solution module.
2. Invalid grid cell size: This error message is generated when the grid cell size is zero or
negative. Change the grid specification and run calculations again.
3. Prediction point #nnnn has lower elevation (Z=xxxx) than the extracted seam: This error
message is generated when a prediction point and has lower elevation than the vertex or parcel
elevation of a mine plan panel or pillar even if they are quite a distance apart. This is usually
a user input error. If the mine plan and surface points cover a large area, it is possible that this
condition may be true. In this case the “Allow for Extremely Variable Terrain Elevations”
option should be enabled before invoking the solution module.
325
4. No active prediction points in project: The project has defined prediction points, but none
of them is currently active. Reactivate surface prediction points and run calculations again.
5. No active mine plan parcels in project: The project has defined mine plan parcels, but none
of them is currently active. Reactivate mine plan parcels and run calculations again.
6. Edge effect adjustment: Duplicate point definition in polygonal mine plan. Remove
duplicate points and/or remove Edge Effect: One or more parcels in the polygonal mine
plan have duplicate points and the edge effect offset can not be automatically computed. In
the Influence Function Module, enable the warning for “Poor Mine Plan Definition” under
Utilities-Options and when in the mine plan editor, view the mine plan. When viewing the
program will identify the parcel(s) with duplicate vertex points. Under the second tab of the
polygonal mine plan form, there is a button to delete all such duplicate points.
7. Edge Effect Adjustment: Possible parcel segment of zero length: One or more parcels
in the polygonal mine plan have duplicate points and the edge effect can not be automati-
cally computed. In the Influence Function Module, enable the warning for “Poor Mine Plan
Definition” under Utilities-Options and when in the mine plan editor, view the mine plan.
When viewing the program will identify the parcel(s) with duplicate vertex points. Under
the second tab of the polygonal mine plan form, there is a button to delete all such duplicate
points.
8. Edge effect adjustment: Effect can not be calculated. Depth should be > 100 ft: The
edge effect offset can not be computed because the depth is less or equal to 100 ft. Remove
the edge effect offset specification for the panel and run calculations again. Alternatively
define a mine plan based on a modified parcel perimeter which accounts for the edge effect
offset and calculate deformations without any edge effect offset adjustment.
9. Dynamic panel NOT defined: A dynamic analysis has been specified but a dynamic panel
has not been specified. Define a panel as dynamic and run calculations again.
10. Dynamic subsidence calculations allow only one dynamic panel per project: A dynamic
analysis has been specified but more than one dynamic panels have been specified. Define
only one panel as dynamic and run calculations again.
11. Parametric step values are zero: During project calibration for either subsidence or strain,
a step value is specified for a number of variables. One of these step values is zero and there-
fore, the corresponding parameters can not be incremented. Check the input to the calibration
routines and run calculations again.
12. Invalid angle of influence: The tangent of the influence angle specified in the project is
either zero or negative. Correct the value and run calculations again.
326
Appendix E
Coordinates and Coordinate Systems
1. Question: What is the State Plane coordinate System?

The State Plane coordinate System (SPCS) is a system for specifying positions of geodetic
stations using plane rectangular coordinates.
It came into use in the United States in the 1930s when the United States Coast and Geodetic
Survey used it to provide a common reference system to surveyors and mappers. In the 1950s,
the US Geological Survey also began to base new topographic quadrangles on it. SPCS
divides the 50 states, Puerto Rico, and the US Virgin Islands into more than 120 numbered
sections. These sections, referred to as zones, have assigned code numbers that define the
projection parameters for that region.
The SPCS system is based largely (Alaska is based on yet another projection) on two different
projections depending on the shape of the region being mapped. In the case of states that
have an extensive east-west expanse, the Lambert conformal conic projection is used. In the
case of a state with a north-south expanse, the transverse Mercator projection is used. Many
county and municipal governmental organizations use SPCS in local mapping projects.
There are two phases of the SPCS system, SPCS27 and SPCS83, and they are quite different.
While SPCS27 is based on the local datum NAD27 and is measured in feet, SPCS83 is based
on the updated geocentric datum NAD83 and is measured in meters.
2. Question: What is the North American Datum?

There are two phases of the North American Datum - NAD27 and NAD83 - one local the
other geocentric. Local datum align a spheroid to closely fit the earth’s surface in a particular
area. A point on the surface of the spheroid is matched to a point on the earth’s surface -
this point is the origin of the datum and has fixed coordinates. All other points are calculated
from the origin. The North American Datum of 1927 is a local datum based on the Clarke
1866 spheroid and centered on an area named “Meades Ranch” in Kansas.
Geocentric datum relate coordinates to the earth’s center of mass. Such datum have been
improved by modern satellite data. The North American Datum of 1983 is based on the
modern GRS 1980 ellipsoid - almost identical to the most widely used WGS 1984 ellipsoid
which is also geocentric. Both earth and satellite data went into the determination of this
datum. Because raw GPS data is based on the WGS 1984 ellipsoid, the data is also compatible
with NAD83.
327
3. Question: What is the WGS 1984?
The WGS 1984 (World Geodetic System, WGS84) is an earth fixed global reference frame,
including an earth model. It is defined by a set of primary and secondary parameters:
• The primary parameters define the shape of an earth ellipsoid, its angular velocity, and
the earth mass which is included in the ellipsoid reference.
• The secondary parameters define a detailed gravity model of the earth.
328
Index
active mining zone, 195 grid files, 242

AHSM, 225 grid points, 42
ALPS, 185
AMSS, 235 Holland, 177
angle of break, 16 Holland-Gaddy, 177
angle of critical deformation, 16 horizontal strain coefficient, xix, 15
angle of draw, 11, 13, 23, 266 horizontal strain factor, xix, 15
angle, abutment, 186 inflection point, 12
ARBS, 217, 221 influence function, 33, 35
ARMPS, 195 IntelliCAD, 129
ARMPSHWM, 203 interburden, 235
ASCII, 5, 6, 158, 241, 242, 264, 265, 269, 274, Intersection span, 220
276, 284, 288
AutoCAD, 5, 35, 93, 115, 116, 129, 133, 134, location angles, 170
146, 149, 320 long-term risk analysis, 157
longwall, 14, 35, 41, 66, 69–71, 80, 86, 106, 129,
Bieniawski, 176 149, 175, 185, 186, 188, 212
Carlson Software, 242, 248, 284
Mark-Bieniawski, 175, 178, 204–206, 208
CMRR, 185–188, 211, 217–221
mine plan, 40
coal strength, 175, 290
mine plan, polygonal, 40, 92, 93, 95, 98, 104,
coal strength factor, 175, 290
120, 121, 135, 277
coal strength, in situ, 175
mine plan, rectangular, 40, 42, 51, 66, 74, 113,
critical conditions, 11
277, 279, 317
curvature, 15, 34, 35, 37, 38, 243
curvature, radius, 34 Obert-Duvall, 175, 178
overburden, 13–15, 19, 21, 43, 56, 133, 175,
damage classification, 18
186, 225
depth of cover, xix
overburden depth, xix
displacement, horizontal, 15, 34, 35, 37, 38, 243
overburden thickness, xix, 295, 299, 302
DOS, 1, 274, 284
overmining, 235
DWG, 116, 274, 315, 323
DXF, 115, 117, 129, 274, 275, 315, 318, 320 panel width, 20, 186
Pennsylvania Law, 175
edge effect, 13
percent hardrock, 13–15, 21, 27, 49, 57, 72
edge effect offset, xix, 40, 43, 48, 56, 119, 137,
pillar design equations, 175
142, 146, 147, 278, 280, 282, 285, 317
prediction points, 42
extraction ratio, 72, 119, 180, 205
profile function, 19
extraction thickness, 33, 43, 266
329
profile function method, 14, 19, 20
profile, average, 23, 24
profile, conservative, 23, 24
protection area, 175, 183
room-and-pillar, 14, 15, 35, 72, 115, 118
safety factor, 175, 180

scattered points, 42, 43, 309
slope, 34
State Plane coordinates, 43, 327
strain contours, 125
strain, axial, 284
strain, directional, 34, 35, 107, 110
strain, ground, 34, 35, 80, 82, 86, 87, 107, 110,
158
strain, horizontal, 15, 34, 37, 38, 61, 63, 65, 80,
149–151, 243
subsidence contours, 125
subsidence development, 153
subsidence factor, 14, 19, 40, 41, 43, 56
subsidence factor, negative, 41, 118
Surfer, 242, 248, 274, 284
tilt, 34
tributary area, 175, 176
undermining, 235
XYZ data, 243, 274, 275, 284
330

SDPS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SDPS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SDPS

Surface Deformation Prediction System for

Quick Reference Guide

Dr. Zach Agioutantis

May 11, 2015

The authors declare that there are no warranties, expressed or im-

The purpose of this guide

The purpose of this guide is to provide a quick reference guide

As of version 6.1 the SDPS suite of programs supports AutoCAD

2 Overview of Subsidence Parameters 11

3 The Profile Function Method 19

4 The Influence Function Method 33

5 Pillar Stability Analysis Calculations 175

6 The ALPS Module 185

7 The ARMPS Module 195

9 The CMMR Module 211

10 The ARBS Module 217

11 The AHSM Module 225

12 The AMSS Module 235

13 The Graphing Options 238

14 References and Bibliography 249

A Program Reference 263

B The Initialization File 311

D Influence Function Primer 316

E Coordinates and Coordinate Systems 327

1.1 The SDPS main menu form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2.1 Definition of subsidence parameters (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3.1 Definition of terms used in the profile function method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

4.1 Steps for defining a project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

6.1 Example W1: ALPS: Input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

7.1 Example S1: ARMPS: Input parameters - development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

8.1 Example Q0: ARMPSHWM: Plot of mine plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

9.1 CMRR and intersection span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

10.1 ARBS Design of one support system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

11.1 AHSM Stress design diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

13.1 Basic graph options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

D.1 Example of digitized mine plan with logical errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

1.1 System requirements for the SDPS suite of programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.1 Maximum subsidence factors (Smax /m) for longwall panels . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

8.1 ARMPS-HWM Suggested Minimum Stability Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

1.2 Installing / Uninstalling SDPS

Table 1.1: System requirements for the SDPS suite of programs

Operating system Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 (32/64), Windows 8

Installing from a CDROM

Installing a downloaded file

Installing from diskettes

• Click on the “Uninstall SDPS” shortcut under “All Programs”

1.3 SDPS Software Overview

1.4 SDPS Features

• Easy to use input forms

• Check boxes, option buttons, command buttons, combo boxes

• Metric and imperial (English) units

• Context sensitive help (one help file for all programs)

• General program options (settings)

• Custom program options

• Standard file selection dialog

• Standard print dialog

Program Name Program Function

The File System

• Custom path support for data files

• Redefinable file extensions

• Multiple line description for each project

• CDROM / DVD drives

• Network File Systems